JP2019213704A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To enhance a performance effect when executing a notification performance.SOLUTION: A game machine can execute a plurality of types of suggestion performances (e.g., notice performances A to C) suggesting to be in an advantageous state (e.g., a big winning game state). When any suggestion performance is executed out of the plurality of types of suggestion performances, a notification performance for notifying a predetermined period (e.g., "10 seconds", "20 seconds", "30 seconds") until the suggestion performance is executed can be executed, and after the predetermined period is notified in the notification performance, the notification for the predetermined period is made unrecognizable before the predetermined period elapses. In the case of a super ready-to-win A, an ally character is displayed on an image display device to start a ready-to-win performance. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the ready-to-win performance, the title of the super ready-to-win A is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device, and the title of the super ready-to-win A is notified by a sound corresponding to the title name of the ready-to-win being output from the speaker.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 20-13

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a slot machine capable of playing a game.

  As a gaming machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game ball wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something to be done. Further, a variable display device capable of variably displaying (also referred to as “fluctuations”) the identification information is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific display result on the variable display device, a game state (game The state of the machine, that is, the state in which the gaming machine is controlled.) Is changed to provide a predetermined game value to the player (so-called pachinko machine).

  In addition, after setting a predetermined number of bets for one game on a predetermined game medium, the player starts variable display of identification information by the variable display device by operating the start lever, and the player By operating the stop button provided corresponding to the display device, the variable display of the identification information is stopped within the range of the maximum delay time determined in advance from the operation timing, and the variable display of all the variable display devices is displayed. In accordance with the display result derived when the game is stopped, a winning occurs, a predetermined game medium determined in advance according to the winning is paid out, and when a specific winning occurs, a player is given a predetermined gaming value as a gaming state. There is one that is configured to be in a state to be given to (so-called slot machine).

  In addition, the game value means that the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the gaming area of the gaming machine is in a state that is advantageous for a player who is easy to win a hit ball, or is in a state that is advantageous for the player. In other words, the right is to be generated or the conditions for paying out prize balls are easily satisfied.

  In a pachinko gaming machine, a predetermined specific display mode is derived and displayed as a display result of a variable display of a special symbol (identification information) started on the variable display device based on a game ball winning the starting winning opening. When this is done, a "big hit" occurs. The derived display is to finally stop and display a symbol (final stop symbol). When the big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big hit gaming state where the hit ball is easy to win. And in each open period, if there is a prize for a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the big prize opening, the big prize opening is closed. And the number of times of opening the special winning opening is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the big winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each special winning opening may be referred to as a round. A game in a round may be referred to as a round game.

  Further, in the variable display device, a symbol other than a symbol that is a final stop symbol (for example, a middle symbol among the left, middle, and right symbols) is continuously stopped for a predetermined period of time and stopped or shaken in a state where the symbol matches a specific display result. It is possible to generate a big hit before the final result is displayed due to movement, enlargement / reduction or deformation, or when multiple symbols fluctuate synchronously with the same symbol, or the position of the displayed symbol is switched An effect performed in a state where sex is continued (hereinafter, these states are referred to as a reach state) is referred to as a reach effect. Further, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. Then, if the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the variable display device is not a specific display result, the result is “missing” and the variable display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  In such a gaming machine, when a suggestion effect is performed, there is a gaming machine configured to be able to execute a notification effect for notifying a predetermined period until the suggestion effect is executed. For example, in Patent Document 1, when the time displayed on the timer image is counted down to 0 as time passes, or when the time displayed on the timer image becomes 0, a notice effect image is displayed. And that the main display image is in a specific image mode.

Japanese Patent Application No. 2013-198568 (paragraphs 0269 and 0270, FIG. 42)

  However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Literature 1, there is a possibility that the effect of performing the notification effect of notifying the predetermined period until the suggested effect is executed cannot be sufficiently enhanced.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the effect of performing a notification effect.

(Means 1) A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game and being controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player, and controlled to an advantageous state. A suggestion effect execution means (for example, a part for executing step 105 IWS216 in the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestion effects (for example, notice effects A to C), and a plurality of suggestion effects When a suggestion effect of any of the above is executed, a notification effect (e.g., FIG. 7) for notifying a predetermined period (for example, “10 seconds”, “20 seconds”, “30 seconds”) until the suggestion effect is executed Notification effect executing means (for example, step 105 IWS 207 in effect control CPU 120) capable of executing notification display 105 IW003 shown in 20-13 (B). After the notification of the predetermined period in the notification effect, the notification of the predetermined period is made unrecognizable before the predetermined period elapses (for example, a portion that executes step 105 IWS210 in the effect control CPU 120). Further, the game apparatus further includes title notifying means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggested effect, wherein the title information means responds to the suggested effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggested effect. It is possible to notify the user of the changed title (for example, FIGS. 21-2 (D) and (F)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect of performing the notification effect.

(Means 2) In the means 1, the suggestion effect execution means can be executed at a plurality of timings during the variable display according to the type of the suggestion effect (for example, as shown in FIG. It may be configured to execute during the fluctuation, execute the notice effect B when the reach is established, and execute the notice effect C after the reach is established). According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect of performing the notification effect.

(Means 3) In the means 1 or 2, when the long period is notified as the predetermined period in the notification effect, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the short period is notified as the predetermined period (for example, 20-6, the expectation (reliability) with respect to the big hit may be configured to be higher when a longer period is notified as the notification period.) According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which period is notified as the predetermined period.

(Means 4) In any one of the means 1 to 3, the notification effect execution means may perform the notification effects by a plurality of types of notification modes (for example, a rectangular display, an ellipse display, and a diamond display shown in FIG. 20-7). Executable, even if the same type of suggestion effect is executed and the same period is notified as the predetermined period in the notification effect, the ratio controlled to the advantageous state according to the type of the notification mode of the notification effect is (For example, as shown in FIG. 20-7, the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big hit is different depending on whether the display is rectangular display, elliptical display, or diamond display). Is also good. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which notification mode the notification effect is executed.

(Means 5) In any one of the means 1 to 4, the notification effect execution means may determine that the predetermined period has not elapsed after the notification of the predetermined period has become unrecognizable and at a timing immediately before the predetermined period elapses. (In this example, the remaining time is displayed as shown in FIGS. 20-14 (E)-(G)) (for example, a part that executes steps 105IWS213-S214 in the effect control CPU 120). May be configured. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect of performing the notification effect.

(Means 6) In any one of the means 1 to 5, after the notification of the predetermined period is made unrecognizable, a predetermined effect (for example, a numerical effect) using numbers is executed until the predetermined period elapses. It may be configured to include a possible predetermined effect executing means (for example, a part for executing step 105 IWS 212 in the effect control CPU 120). According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect of performing the notification effect.

(Means 7) In any one of the means 1 to 5, after the notification of the predetermined period is made unrecognizable, a predetermined effect in which the mode changes stepwise until the predetermined period elapses (for example, step-up It is configured to include a predetermined effect execution means (for example, a part that executes the same processing as step 105 IWS 212 in effect control CPU 120 and executes a step-up notice effect and a pseudo-sequence) that can execute a notice effect and a pseudo-sequence. May be. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect of performing the notification effect.

  Further, embodiments for carrying out the invention described below include inventions according to the following means 8 to 15. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been a gaming machine that performs a title display for notifying the type of the reach effect at the start of the reach effect as disclosed in JP-A-2006-101428. In the conventional gaming machines described above, it is desired to enhance the effect of the game. In view of this point, there is a demand for a game machine capable of enhancing the effect of the game.

(Means 8) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to another aspect is a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player. A suggestion effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect) suggesting that the state is controlled, and a title notification means (for example, an effect) capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggestion effect. The control CPU 120), and the title notifying unit can notify a title corresponding to the suggested effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggested effect (for example, FIG. F)).
According to such a configuration, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

(Means 9) In the means 8, the suggestion effect execution means can execute a plurality of types of the suggestion effects, and in the plurality of types of the suggestion effects, at least a part of the effects within the predetermined period is common. (For example, FIG. 21-2 (C)).
According to such a configuration, it can be noticed which of the suggestion effects is executed, and the interest is improved.

(Means 10) In means 8 or means 9, at a plurality of execution timings during the execution of the suggested effect, it is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, an advanced effect or a notice effect) suggesting that the advantageous state is controlled, An execution timing of the specific effect may not be provided during the predetermined period.
According to such a configuration, the player's expectation can be maintained even after the title is announced.

(Means 11) In any one of the means 8 to means 10, the suggestion effect execution means may include at least a first suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect of super reach A or super reach B) and a second suggestion effect as the suggestion effect. (E.g., a super-reach D or super-reach E reach effect), and the title informing means has corresponded to the second suggestion effect from the start of the second suggestion effect in the second suggestion effect. The title may be notified.
According to such a configuration, the notification of the title according to the suggested effect can be executed, so that the effect of the effect is improved.

(Means 12) In the means 11, in the case where the first suggestion effect is executed, the rate of controlling to the advantageous state may be higher when the first suggestion effect is executed than when the second suggestion effect is executed.
According to such a configuration, the rendering effect is improved.

(Means 13) In any one of the means 8 to 12, the suggestion effect execution means may be capable of executing the suggestion effect in an effect mode related to a title notified in the predetermined period. .
According to such a configuration, the rendering effect is improved.

(Means 14) In any one of the means 8 to 13, a detecting means (for example, a stick controller 31A or a push button 31B) capable of detecting an action of the player, and a specific display (for example, a small button) corresponding to the detecting means A specific display execution unit (for example, effect control CPU 120) for performing the image 31AK043, the large button image 31AK047, and the stick image 31AK051. The specific display execution unit includes a first specific display (for example, small Button image 31AK043) and a second specific display (for example, a large button image 31AK047, a stick image 31AK051) having a higher advantage for the player than the first specific display can be displayed, and the detection by the detection unit is invalid. During the period, after displaying the first specific display, The first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, FIGS. 21-10 (E) and 21-11 (I)), and during the valid period of the detection by the detecting means, the second specific display after the change is changed. May be executed (for example, FIGS. 21-11 (J) and (K)).
According to such a configuration, the rendering effect is improved.

(Means 15) In any one of the means 8 to means 14, as a suggestion display indicating the degree of expectation of control to the advantageous state, a first suggestion display whose display size is the first size (FIG. 21-12 ( a) The first size shutter image 31AK061 displayed at the time of the shutter effect shown in a) and the second suggestion display having the display size of the second size (displayed at the time of the reach title effect shown in FIG. 21-12 (d)). A display means (for example, the image display device 5, the effect control CPU 120) capable of displaying the reach title image 31AK062 of the second size and the like is further provided, and the display means includes a plurality of types of elements having different modes (FIGS. (E1 (banana), E2 (melon), E3 (apple), E4 (watermelon), E5 (strawberry), etc. shown in (a) and (d)) It is possible to display a specific image (such as the fruit pattern shown in FIGS. 21-12 (a) and (d)) configured to include the first suggestion display and the second suggestion display in a pattern including the specific image. Is displayed, a plurality of types of elements are displayed so as to be included in each of the first suggestion display and the second suggestion display (the shutter shown in FIGS. 21-12 (a) and (d)). Both the image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 may be displayed such that the elements E1 to E5 are included).
According to such a configuration, the specific image can be suitably displayed regardless of the display size of the suggestion display. Thereby, it is possible to accurately convey that the specific image is displayed.

  Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting change unit for changing a set value in a plurality of stages based on a setting change operation from the outside. In a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), when changing a set value, it is necessary to appropriately execute control relating to the provision of a game medium. The invention according to the means A1 to A9 has been made in view of the above situation, and it is an object of the invention to provide a gaming machine which appropriately executes control relating to the provision of game media.

The gaming machine of the means A1
A gaming device capable of executing processing relating to valuable values (remaining prepaid balance, ball holding, ball storage, etc.) (processing related to ball lending consuming prepaid balance, ball lending consuming ball holding, ball lending consuming ball storage, etc.) A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of receiving a signal (a VL signal, a BRDY signal, a BRQ signal, etc.) output from the (card unit 21TM050),
Providing means (payout control microcomputer 21TM370 controlling the payout motor 21TM289) for providing a game medium based on a signal output from the gaming machine;
A specific control unit (step S21TM1690 or the like that executes processing such as step S21TM1690) capable of executing specific control (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (a set value 1 to 6 in which the range of the big hit determination random number is different). A control microcomputer 100);
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value to a setting change mode;
With
When controlled in the setting change mode, application of a game medium based on a signal output from the gaming device is restricted. (1. The game control microcomputer 100 when controlled in the setting change mode) Does not turn on the connection confirmation signal (does not output it to the payout control board 21TM037), 2. When the game control microcomputer 100 does not transmit the connection confirmation command while being controlled to the setting change mode, the payout control micro 2. The computer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal. 3. When the gaming machine frame 3 is detected by the gaming machine frame opening sensor to be in the open state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal. No, 4. When the game is being controlled in the setting change mode, Since the microcomputer 100 does not transmit the connection confirmation command (because the dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370 does not receive the connection confirmation command), even if the dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the BRQ signal is on, the EXS signal is output. Do not turn it on.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, when being controlled to the setting change mode, it is possible to execute appropriate control regarding the provision of the game medium.
For example, as shown in FIGS. 22-12 and 22-13, when the power switch 21TM055 is operated and the operating voltage is supplied to the main board 11, the game control microcomputer 100 turns on the lock switch 21TM051. And based on the fact that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state, control is performed to a setting change mode in which the set value can be changed. During the period in which the setting change mode is being controlled, the connection confirmation signal is not output to the payout control board 21TM037 because the serial communication circuit setting process in step S21TM1480 is not executed, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 Do not perform ball rental.

Further, as a gaming machine of means AA for solving the problem of the gaming machine described in JP 2010-200902 A,
A gaming device capable of executing processing relating to valuable values (remaining prepaid balance, ball holding, ball storage, etc.) (processing related to ball lending consuming prepaid balance, ball lending consuming ball holding, ball lending consuming ball storage, etc.) A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of receiving a signal (a VL signal, a BRDY signal, a BRQ signal, etc.) output from the (card unit 21TM050),
Providing means (payout control microcomputer 21TM370 controlling the payout motor 21TM289) for providing a game medium based on a signal output from the gaming machine;
A specific control unit (step S21TM1690 or the like that executes processing such as step S21TM1690) capable of executing specific control (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (a set value 1 to 6 in which the range of the big hit determination random number is different). A control microcomputer 100);
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value to a setting change mode;
With
When controlled in the setting change mode, application of a game medium based on a signal output from the gaming device is restricted (1. When the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled in the setting change mode, 1. The connection confirmation signal is not turned on (not output to the payout control board 21TM037), and the payout control microcomputer 100 does not transmit the connection confirmation command when the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled in the setting change mode. 2. The 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal. 3. When the gaming machine frame opening sensor detects that the gaming machine frame 3 is open, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal. 4. When the game is being controlled in the setting change mode, Since the computer 100 does not transmit the connection confirmation command (because the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not receive the connection confirmation command), even if the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the BRQ signal is on, the EXS signal is output. Do not turn it on.),
further,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestion effects (for example, notice effects A to C) indicating that the game is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) advantageous to the player. A part for executing step 105 IWS216 in CPU 120);
When any one of the plurality of types of suggested effects is executed, a predetermined period (for example, “10 seconds”, “20 seconds”, “30 seconds”) until the suggested effect is executed is set. A notification effect execution means (for example, a part for executing step 105 IWS 207 in effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a notification effect for notification (for example, display of notification display 105 IW003 shown in FIG. 20-13 (B));
After notifying the predetermined period in the notification effect, the notification of the predetermined period is made unrecognizable before the predetermined period elapses (for example, a portion that executes step 105 IWS210 in the effect control CPU 120). Gaming machines.
According to this feature, it is possible to execute appropriate control regarding the provision of the game medium when the game mode is controlled to the setting change mode. In addition, it is possible to enhance the effect of performing the notification effect.

The gaming machine of the means A2 is
The gaming machine of the means A1,
Game control means (game control microcomputer 100 executing a game control timer interrupt process) having the specific control means and the setting change mode control means, and controlling the progress of the game in the gaming machine;
The game control means includes a setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value,
The provision means (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) can provide a game medium when a special signal (connection confirmation signal) is input from the game control means,
The game control means does not output the special signal when being controlled in any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode (the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 outputting the connection confirmation signal Will be executed after exiting the mode and after exiting the setting confirmation mode),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to prevent a game medium from being provided when the game machine is controlled to any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming machine of the means A3 is
The gaming machine of the means A1,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
The providing means (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) outputs a first predetermined signal (PRDY signal) to the gaming device, and based on the input of the first predetermined signal, the gaming device Game media can be provided based on the input of the second predetermined signal (BRDY signal) output from
The first predetermined signal is not output when being controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (1. The PRDY signal is not turned on when the connection confirmation signal is not input; When the command is not received, the PRDY signal is not turned on),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to prevent a game medium from being provided when the game machine is controlled to any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of means A4 is
The gaming machine of the means A1,
Game control means (game control microcomputer 100 executing a game control timer interrupt process) having the specific control means and the setting change mode control means, and controlling the progress of the game in the gaming machine;
At least one of the game control means and the giving means (for example, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) has an open state detecting means (an open state detecting means (open state detecting means) for detecting an open state in which a gaming machine frame or a door frame corresponding to the gaming machine is opened. A gaming machine frame opening sensor capable of detecting that the gaming machine frame 3 is open, and a door frame opening sensor capable of detecting that the glass door frame 3a is open. Door frame opening sensor 21TM300) is provided,
Regardless of whether or not the setting change mode is controlled, the application of the game medium is restricted when the open state is detected (when the game machine frame 3 is in the open state, the glass door frame 3a Does not turn on the PRDY signal when is in the open state),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, when the gaming machine frame or the door frame is opened in order to control the setting change mode, the provision of the game medium can be limited.

The game machine of means A5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to the means A4,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
The providing means outputs a provision signal in response to input of a provision request signal from the gaming device (a BRQ signal is turned on) (turns an EXS signal on) and outputs the provision signal. When an application command signal output from the gaming device according to the input is input (when the card unit 21TM050 that has detected the ON of the EXS signal turns off the BRQ signal), the game medium is applied,
When controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the application preparation signal is not output even if the application request signal is input (the EXS signal is turned on even if the BRQ signal is detected on). do not do),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to prevent a game medium from being provided when the game machine is controlled to any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming machine of the means A6 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to the means A5,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
When the setting change condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on when the power is turned on, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) ) When 21TM052 is ON), control to the setting change mode,
The setting confirmation mode control means determines that the setting confirmation condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on when the power is turned on, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) ) When 21TM052 is off), control to the setting confirmation mode is performed.
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power supply to the gaming machine is started.

The game machine of means A7 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to the means A6,
When the mode is controlled to the setting change mode, the game state is initialized (RAM clear in step S21TM1410 is executed),
After the notification corresponding to the end of the control of the setting change mode is performed based on the end of the control of the setting change mode (after the setting value is blinked on the display monitor 21TM029), the gaming state is initialized. (The letter "C" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the clerk at the game hall or the like can grasp that the control of the setting change mode has ended and the gaming state has been initialized.

The game machine of means A8 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to the means A7,
A game control means having the specific control means and the setting change mode control means, and controlling the progress of a game in the gaming machine (a game control microcomputer 100 executing a game control timer interrupt process);
Effect control means (effect control CPU 120) for controlling the execution of the effect,
The game control means further includes a setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling to a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value,
The game control means outputs a command (a setting change mode command, a setting confirmation mode command) to the effect control means in response to being controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode,
The effect control means executes control relating to notification in accordance with the command (displays “setting is being changed” on the image display device 5 when a setting change mode command is received, and when a setting confirmation mode command is received). "Setting is being confirmed" is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible for the clerk or the like of the game arcade to know that the control has been performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of means A9 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to the means A8,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 at power-on) and an initialization operation (operation of turning on the clear switch 21TM052 at power-on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on),
Along with the control in the setting change mode, the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized (if the game mode is controlled in the setting change mode, the RAM clear processing in step S21TM1410 is executed), and the game proceeds to the setting confirmation mode. As a result of the control, the gaming state of the gaming machine is not initialized (if controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the RAM clearing process of step S21TM1410 is performed only when NO is determined in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330). Is executed),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, a store clerk or the like at the game arcade can select which of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode to control, and can also select whether or not to initialize the game state.
The correspondence between the means A2 to A9 and the means A1 can be applied to the correspondence between the means A2 to A9 and the means AA.

  Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting change unit for changing a set value in a plurality of stages based on a setting change operation from the outside. In a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), when changing a set value, it is necessary to appropriately execute control based on a signal output from the gaming machine. The invention according to means B1 to means B7 has been made in view of the above situation, and is to provide a gaming machine that appropriately executes control based on a signal output from a gaming device.

The gaming machine of the means B1 is
A gaming device capable of executing processing relating to valuable values (remaining prepaid balance, ball holding, ball storage, etc.) (processing related to ball lending consuming prepaid balance, ball lending consuming ball holding, ball lending consuming ball storage, etc.) A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of receiving a signal (a VL signal, a BRDY signal, a BRQ signal, etc.) output from the (card unit 21TM050),
Predetermined control means (payout control microcomputer 21TM370 for controlling the payout motor 21TM289) for executing predetermined control (ball lending) based on a signal output from the gaming machine;
A specific control unit (step S21TM1690 or the like that executes processing such as step S21TM1690) capable of executing specific control (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (a set value 1 to 6 in which the range of the big hit determination random number is different). A control microcomputer 100);
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value to a setting change mode capable of changing the set value,
It is possible to execute a predetermined control based on a signal output from the gaming machine regardless of whether or not the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode (the gaming control microcomputer 100 is controlled to the setting change mode). Even during the period, the connection confirmation signal is turned on, and the connection confirmation command and the winning ball number command can be transmitted. When the connection confirmation signal is on, the connection confirmation command and the winning ball number command are received. The microcomputer 21TM370 can execute ball lending regardless of whether or not the period is controlled to the setting change mode.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to appropriately execute the predetermined control based on the signal output from the gaming device, and it is possible to avoid a control burden when the predetermined control is not executed when being controlled in the setting change mode. .

Further, as a game machine of means BA for solving the problem of the game machine described in JP 2010-200902 A,
A gaming device capable of executing processing relating to valuable values (remaining prepaid balance, ball holding, ball storage, etc.) (processing related to ball lending consuming prepaid balance, ball lending consuming ball holding, ball lending consuming ball storage, etc.) A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of receiving a signal (a VL signal, a BRDY signal, a BRQ signal, etc.) output from the (card unit 21TM050),
Predetermined control means (payout control microcomputer 21TM370 for controlling the payout motor 21TM289) for executing predetermined control (ball lending) based on a signal output from the gaming machine;
A specific control unit (step S21TM1690 or the like that executes processing such as step S21TM1690) capable of executing specific control (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (a set value 1 to 6 in which the range of the big hit determination random number is different). A control microcomputer 100);
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value to a setting change mode capable of changing the set value,
It is possible to execute a predetermined control based on a signal output from the gaming machine regardless of whether or not the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode (the gaming control microcomputer 100 is controlled to the setting change mode). Even during the period, the connection confirmation signal is turned on, and the connection confirmation command and the winning ball number command can be transmitted. When the connection confirmation signal is on, the connection confirmation command and the winning ball number command are received. The microcomputer 21TM370 can execute ball lending regardless of whether or not the period is controlled to the setting change mode.)
further,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestion effects (for example, notice effects A to C) indicating that the game is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) advantageous to the player. A part for executing step 105 IWS216 in CPU 120);
When any one of the plurality of types of suggested effects is executed, a predetermined period (for example, “10 seconds”, “20 seconds”, “30 seconds”) until the suggested effect is executed is set. A notification effect execution means (for example, a part for executing step 105 IWS 207 in effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a notification effect for notification (for example, display of notification display 105 IW003 shown in FIG. 20-13 (B));
After notifying the predetermined period in the notification effect, the notification of the predetermined period is made unrecognizable before the predetermined period elapses (for example, a portion that executes step 105 IWS210 in the effect control CPU 120). Gaming machines.
According to this feature, the predetermined control based on the signal output from the gaming device can be appropriately executed, and it is possible to avoid a control burden when the predetermined control is not executed when being controlled in the setting change mode. it can. In addition, it is possible to enhance the effect of performing the notification effect.

The gaming machine of the means B2 is
The gaming machine of means B1,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
When the predetermined control is being executed, the predetermined control is interrupted based on the occurrence of a predetermined event (e.g., a power cut-off). After the end of the change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the predetermined control is resumed (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 suspends the ball lending when the power is cut off during the ball lending, and resumes the power supply after the power supply is restarted. When the game control microcomputer 100 shifts to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the ball lending is resumed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends without immediately resuming the ball lending),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, even when the control is switched to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the occurrence of the predetermined event, the predetermined control can be appropriately executed.

The gaming machine of the means B3 is
The gaming machine of means B1,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
If the control is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode while the predetermined control is being executed, the predetermined control is terminated (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 determines that the power is cut off during the ball lending operation). When it occurs, the ball lending is forcibly terminated (stopped), and the ball lending is not resumed when the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is restored thereafter, and the setting change is not performed. Ball rental is not resumed even after the end of the mode or setting confirmation mode),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the control for restarting the predetermined control after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode becomes unnecessary, and the predetermined control can be simplified.

The game machine of means B4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B1 to the means B3,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
The setting change mode control means determines that the setting change condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is ON and the clear switch 21TM052 is ON). Control) to the setting change mode,
The setting confirmation mode control means determines that the setting confirmation condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is ON and the clear switch 21TM052 is OFF). Control) to the setting confirmation mode,
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode according to the condition that is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started.

The game machine of the means B5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B1 to the means B4,
When the mode is controlled to the setting change mode, the game information is initialized (when the mode is controlled to the setting change mode, the RAM is cleared in step S21TM1410),
When the set value is changed in the setting change mode, after the change of the set value is notified (after the set value is blinked on the display monitor 21TM029), it is notified that the gaming state has been initialized (display). The character "C" is displayed on the monitor 21TM029),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the clerk at the game hall or the like can grasp that the control of the setting change mode has ended and the gaming state has been initialized.

The gaming machine of the means B6 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B1 to the means B5,
A game control means having the specific control means and the setting change mode control means, and controlling the progress of a game in the gaming machine (a game control microcomputer 100 executing a game control timer interrupt process);
Effect control means (effect control CPU 120) for controlling the execution of the effect,
The game control means further includes a setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling to a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value,
The game control means outputs a command (a setting change mode command, a setting confirmation mode command) to the effect control means in response to being controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode,
The effect control means executes control relating to notification in accordance with the command (displays “setting is being changed” on the image display device 5 when a setting change mode command is received, and when a setting confirmation mode command is received). "Setting is being confirmed" is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible for the clerk or the like of the game arcade to know that the control has been performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of means B7 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B1 to the means B6,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 at power-on) and an initialization operation (operation of turning on the clear switch 21TM052 at power-on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on),
Along with the control in the setting change mode, the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized (if the game mode is controlled in the setting change mode, the RAM clear processing in step S21TM1410 is executed), and the game proceeds to the setting confirmation mode. As a result of the control, the gaming state of the gaming machine is not initialized (if controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the RAM clearing process of step S21TM1410 is performed only when NO is determined in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330). Is executed),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, a store clerk or the like at the game arcade can select which of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode to control, and can also select whether or not to initialize the game state.
The correspondence between the means B2 to B7 and the means B1 described above can be applied to the correspondence between the means B2 to B7 and the means BA.

  Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting change unit for changing a set value in a plurality of stages based on a setting change operation from the outside. In a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), when changing a set value, it is necessary to appropriately execute control when a game medium passes through a specific area. The invention according to the means C1 to C6 has been made in view of the above situation, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that appropriately executes control when a game medium passes through a specific area.

The game machine of the means C1 is
Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specific areas (first start winning opening, second starting winning opening), specific control (special value 1 to 6 in which the range of the random number for big hit determination is different) corresponding to the specific control (special control) A specific control means (a game control microcomputer 100 executing a process such as step S21TM1690) capable of executing a big hit determination process or the like in a symbol process process;
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value to a setting change mode capable of changing the set value,
When the game medium is controlled in the setting change mode, the specific control is not executed even when the game medium passes through the specific area (the control is performed in the setting change mode before the timer interrupt setting (step S21TM1500)). Accordingly, during the period in which the setting change mode is being controlled, the special symbol process process (big hit determination process) of step S21TM1690 is not executed),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to prevent the specific control from being executed when the setting value may be changed.

Further, as a gaming machine of means CA for solving the problem of the gaming machine described in JP 2010-200902A,
Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specific areas (first start winning opening, second starting winning opening), specific control (special value 1 to 6 in which the range of the random number for big hit determination is different) corresponding to the specific control (special control) A specific control means (a game control microcomputer 100 executing a process such as step S21TM1690) capable of executing a big hit determination process or the like in a symbol process process;
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value to a setting change mode capable of changing the set value,
When controlled in the setting change mode, the specific control is not executed even when the game medium passes through the specific area (the control is changed to the setting change mode before the timer interrupt setting (step S21TM1500)). Thereby, during the period of being controlled to the setting change mode, the special symbol process process (small hit determination process) of step S21TM1690 is not executed),
further,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestion effects (for example, notice effects A to C) indicating that the game is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) advantageous to the player. A part for executing step 105 IWS216 in CPU 120);
When any one of the plurality of types of suggested effects is executed, a predetermined period (for example, “10 seconds”, “20 seconds”, “30 seconds”) until the suggested effect is executed is set. A notification effect execution means (for example, a part for executing step 105 IWS 207 in effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a notification effect for notification (for example, display of notification display 105 IW003 shown in FIG. 20-13 (B));
After notifying the predetermined period in the notification effect, the notification of the predetermined period is made unrecognizable before the predetermined period elapses (for example, a portion that executes step 105 IWS210 in the effect control CPU 120). Gaming machines.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the specific control from being executed when the setting value may be changed. In addition, it is possible to enhance the effect of performing the notification effect.

  In addition, a plurality of types (for example, “10 seconds”, “20 seconds”, or “30 seconds” are reported) of a plurality of types of lengths of the predetermined period until the suggestion effect is performed, which is provided in the notification effect, is provided. By selecting the length of the predetermined period using a selection table or the like in which the selection ratio of the length of the predetermined period is different depending on the set value, and notifying the predetermined period of the selected length, the player can determine the length of the predetermined period. The set value may be estimated based on the appearance ratio of the suffix. By doing so, the length of the predetermined period is varied and the player can be given an opportunity to estimate the set value based on the appearance ratio of each length, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In addition, after notifying the predetermined period in the notification effect, there are a plurality of types of timings at which the notification of the predetermined period cannot be recognized before the predetermined period elapses (for example, “3 seconds before the predetermined period elapses, "4 seconds ago" and "5 seconds ago" are determined to be unrecognizable), and the timing at which recognition is disabled is selected using a selection table or the like in which the selection ratio of the timing at which recognition is disabled differs depending on the set value. By making the notification of the predetermined period unrecognizable at the timing, the player may be able to estimate the set value based on the appearance ratio of each timing. By doing so, the timing at which the notification of the predetermined period becomes unrecognizable is rich in changes, and furthermore, it is possible to give the player an opportunity to guess the set value based on the appearance ratio of each timing, thereby improving the gaming interest. be able to.

The game machine of the means C2 is
The game machine of means C1,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
The setting change mode control means determines that the setting change condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is ON and the clear switch 21TM052 is ON). Control) to the setting change mode,
The setting confirmation mode control means determines that the setting confirmation condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is ON and the clear switch 21TM052 is OFF). Control) to the setting confirmation mode,
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode according to the condition that is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started.

The gaming machine of the means C3 is
A game machine of means C1 or means C2,
When the game mode is controlled to the setting change mode, the game state is initialized (when the game mode is controlled to the setting change mode, the RAM is cleared in step S21TM1410).
After the notification corresponding to the end of the control of the setting change mode is performed based on the end of the control of the setting change mode (after the setting value is blinked on the display monitor 21TM029), the gaming state is initialized. (The letter "C" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the clerk at the game hall or the like can grasp that the control of the setting change mode has ended and the gaming state has been initialized.

The game machine of means C4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means C1 to the means C3,
A game control means having the specific control means and the setting change mode control means, and controlling the progress of a game in the gaming machine (a game control microcomputer 100 executing a game control timer interrupt process);
Effect control means (effect control CPU 120) for controlling the execution of the effect,
The game control means further includes a setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling to a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value,
The game control means outputs a command (a setting change mode command, a setting confirmation mode command) to the effect control means in response to being controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode,
The effect control means executes control relating to notification in accordance with the command (displays “setting is being changed” on the image display device 5 when a setting change mode command is received, and when a setting confirmation mode command is received). "Setting is being confirmed" is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible for the clerk or the like of the game arcade to know that the control has been performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of means C5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means C1 to the means C4,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
If the game medium is controlled in the setting confirmation mode, the specific control is not executed even if the game medium passes through the specific area (the control is performed in the setting confirmation mode before the timer interrupt setting (step S21TM1500)). Accordingly, during the period in which the mode is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the special symbol process process (big hit determination process) of step S21TM1690 is not executed),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to prevent the specific control from being executed when the setting value is confirmed.

The gaming machine of the means C6 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means C1 to the means C5,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 at power-on) and an initialization operation (operation of turning on the clear switch 21TM052 at power-on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on),
Along with the control in the setting change mode, the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized (if the game mode is controlled in the setting change mode, the RAM clear processing in step S21TM1410 is executed), and the game proceeds to the setting confirmation mode. As a result of the control, the gaming state of the gaming machine is not initialized (if controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the RAM clearing process of step S21TM1410 is performed only when NO is determined in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330). Is executed),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, a store clerk or the like at the game arcade can select which of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode to control, and can also select whether or not to initialize the game state.
The correspondence between the means C2 to C6 and the means C1 described above can be applied to the correspondence between the means C2 to C6 and the means CA.

  Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting change unit for changing a set value in a plurality of stages based on a setting change operation from the outside. In a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to execute an appropriate process when power supply is stopped when changing a set value. The invention according to the means D1 to D5 has been made in view of the above situation, and an object of the invention is to provide a gaming machine that executes an appropriate process when the power supply is stopped.

The gaming machine of the means D1 is
A specific control unit (step S21TM1690 or the like that executes processing such as step S21TM1690) capable of executing specific control (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (a set value 1 to 6 in which the range of the big hit determination random number is different). A control microcomputer 100);
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value to a setting change mode;
Setting check mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) controllable to a setting check mode for notifying the set value in a checkable manner;
Setting value storage means (setting value storage area of the RAM 102 in which the setting values are stored) for storing the setting values,
The setting change mode control means determines that the first condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state) and the second condition is satisfied (the clear switch ( The setting change mode) based on the setting change switch 21TM052 being ON),
The setting confirmation mode control means determines that the first condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state) and the second condition is not satisfied (clear). Switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in an OFF state) to control the setting confirmation mode,
The set value is determined based on a specific operation in the setting change mode (operation of switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state),
The setting value storage means stores a setting value before being controlled to the setting change mode when the setting change mode is being controlled (the setting value is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 before the transition to the setting change mode). The set value that has been set is continuously stored without being changed with the transition to the setting change mode),
In the setting change mode, the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without performing the specific operation (the power is cut off without performing the operation of switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state), and thereafter If the setting check mode is controlled when the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed, the set value stored in the set value storage unit is notified (control to the setting check mode after power-on). In this case, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 before the transition to the setting confirmation mode).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the clerk at the game hall or the like can appropriately set the set value when the power supply is stopped when the setting is changed to the setting change mode.

Further, as a game machine of means DA for solving the problem of the game machine described in JP 2010-200902A,
A specific control unit (step S21TM1690 or the like that executes processing such as step S21TM1690) capable of executing specific control (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (a set value 1 to 6 in which the range of the big hit determination random number is different). A control microcomputer 100);
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value to a setting change mode;
Setting check mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) controllable to a setting check mode for notifying the set value in a checkable manner;
Setting value storage means (setting value storage area of the RAM 102 in which the setting values are stored) for storing the setting values,
The setting change mode control means determines that the first condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state) and the second condition is satisfied (the clear switch ( The setting change mode) based on the setting change switch 21TM052 being ON),
The setting confirmation mode control means determines that the first condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state) and the second condition is not satisfied (clear). Switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in an OFF state) to control the setting confirmation mode,
The set value is determined based on a specific operation in the setting change mode (operation of switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state),
The setting value storage means stores a setting value before being controlled to the setting change mode when the setting change mode is being controlled (the setting value is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 before the transition to the setting change mode). The set value that has been set is continuously stored without being changed with the transition to the setting change mode),
In the setting change mode, the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without performing the specific operation (the power is cut off without performing the operation of switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state), and thereafter, If the setting check mode is controlled when the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed, the set value stored in the set value storage unit is notified (the power supply is controlled to the setting check mode after power-on). In this case, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 before the transition to the setting confirmation mode.)
further,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestion effects (for example, notice effects A to C) indicating that the game is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) advantageous to the player. A part for executing step 105 IWS216 in CPU 120);
When any one of the plurality of types of suggested effects is executed, a predetermined period (for example, “10 seconds”, “20 seconds”, “30 seconds”) until the suggested effect is executed is set. A notification effect execution means (for example, a part for executing step 105 IWS 207 in effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a notification effect for notification (for example, display of notification display 105 IW003 shown in FIG. 20-13 (B));
After notifying the predetermined period in the notification effect, the notification of the predetermined period is made unrecognizable before the predetermined period elapses (for example, a portion that executes step 105 IWS210 in the effect control CPU 120). Gaming machines.
According to this feature, a store clerk or the like at the amusement arcade can appropriately determine the set value when the power supply is stopped while being controlled to the setting change mode. In addition, it is possible to enhance the effect of performing the notification effect.

The gaming machine of the means D2 is
The gaming machine of means D1,
The setting change mode control means performs a shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051) when power supply to the gaming machine is started and initializes the operation (turns the clear switch 21TM052 on). Control) to perform the setting change mode when the
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode when the shift operation is performed when the power supply to the gaming machine is started and the initialization operation is not performed.
It is characterized by that.
According to this, a store clerk or the like at the game arcade can select which of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode is controlled.

The gaming machine of the means D3 is
A game machine of means D1 or means D2,
When the mode is controlled to the setting change mode, the game state is initialized (RAM clear in step S21TM1410 is executed),
Based on the end of the control of the setting change mode, a notification corresponding to the end of the control of the setting change mode is executed (the set value blinks on the display monitor 21TM029).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the clerk at the game hall or the like can grasp that the control of the setting change mode has ended.

The gaming machine of the means D4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means D1 to the means D3,
A game control means for controlling a progress of a game in the gaming machine (a game control micro-processor for executing a game control timer interrupt process), comprising the specific control means, the setting change mode control means, and the setting confirmation mode control means; Computer 100)
Effect control means (effect control CPU 120) for executing effect control,
The game control means outputs a command (a setting change mode command, a setting confirmation mode command) to the effect control means in response to being controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode,
The effect control means executes a notification according to the command (displays “Setting is being changed” on the image display device 5 when a setting change mode command is received, and displays an image when a setting confirmation mode command is received). "Setting is being confirmed" is displayed on the device 5),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible for the clerk or the like of the game arcade to know that the control has been performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming machine of the means D5 is
Any of gaming machines selected from the means D1 to the means D4,
Timing after the power supply to the gaming machine is started (timing after the game control microcomputer 100 can execute the game control timer interrupt process after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends) When the first condition or the second condition is satisfied, a predetermined notification is performed (the effect control CPU 120 outputs a lock switch operation command indicating that the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated, a clear switch (setting switch). When a setting changeover switch operation command indicating that the 21TM052 has been operated is received from the game control microcomputer 100, "operation of the lock switch has been detected.", "Operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected." Is displayed on the image display device 5)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the clerk at the game hall or the like can grasp that the first condition or the second condition is satisfied at a timing after the power supply is started.
The correspondence between the means D2 to D5 and the means D1 can be applied to the correspondence between the means D2 to D5 and the means DA.

  Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting change unit for changing a set value in a plurality of stages based on a setting change operation from the outside. Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine in which a "big hit signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board has been proposed. Regarding the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (Paragraph 0007), it may be necessary for the external device to grasp the status of the processing related to the change of the set value. Even if the conventional game machine signal output technology described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102) is applied, there is a problem that it is difficult for the external device to grasp the signal output technology. The invention according to the means E1 to E8 has been made in view of the above situation, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine which allows an external device to grasp the status of a process related to a change in a set value. is there.

The game machine of means E1 is
A gaming machine capable of executing specific control (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (a set value 1 to 6 in which the range of the random number for the jackpot determination is different),
The set value is changeable (changeable based on an operation in a setting change mode),
A specific signal (security signal) can be output from a first terminal (tenth terminal) in response to a predetermined event (abnormal winning, switch abnormality detection, magnetic error, RAM clear, etc.) occurring in the gaming machine,
A special signal (setting change corresponding signal) can be output from the second terminal (seventh terminal) in response to the processing related to the change of the set value (transition to the setting change mode, transition to the setting confirmation mode). ,
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the occurrence of the predetermined event and the execution of the process related to the change of the set value can be notified to the outside in a distinguishable manner.

Further, as a game machine of means EA for solving the problem of the game machine described in JP-A-2010-200902 and JP-A-2014-200506,
A gaming machine capable of executing specific control (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (a set value 1 to 6 in which the range of the random number for the jackpot determination is different),
The set value is changeable (changeable based on an operation in a setting change mode),
A specific signal (security signal) can be output from a first terminal (tenth terminal) in response to a predetermined event (abnormal winning, switch abnormality detection, magnetic error, RAM clear, etc.) occurring in the gaming machine,
A special signal (setting change corresponding signal) can be output from the second terminal (seventh terminal) in response to the processing related to the change of the set value (transition to the setting change mode, transition to the setting confirmation mode). ,
further,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestion effects (for example, notice effects A to C) indicating that the game is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) advantageous to the player. A part for executing step 105 IWS216 in CPU 120);
When any one of the plurality of types of suggested effects is executed, a predetermined period (for example, “10 seconds”, “20 seconds”, “30 seconds”) until the suggested effect is executed is set. A notification effect execution means (for example, a part for executing step 105 IWS 207 in effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a notification effect for notification (for example, display of notification display 105 IW003 shown in FIG. 20-13 (B));
After notifying the predetermined period in the notification effect, the notification of the predetermined period is made unrecognizable before the predetermined period elapses (for example, a portion that executes step 105 IWS210 in the effect control CPU 120). Gaming machines.
According to this feature, the occurrence of the predetermined event and the execution of the process related to the change of the set value can be notified to the outside in a distinguishable manner. In addition, it is possible to enhance the effect of performing the notification effect.

The game machine of means E2 is
The game machine of means E1,
The specific signal can be output in response to the start of power supply to the gaming machine (a security signal is output when RAM clear is executed),
A setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value in which the set value can be changed when the power supply to the gaming machine is started; Prepare,
When controlled to the setting change mode, both the specific signal and the special signal can be output (the security signal and the setting corresponding change signal are output simultaneously).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, since it is possible to notify to the outside at least the possibility of being controlled to the setting change mode by the specific signal, even in a conventional external device which does not assume the input of the special signal, the setting change is performed by the specific signal. It is possible to know that the mode may have been controlled.

The game machine of means E3 is
The game machine of means E2,
When both the specific signal and the special signal are output based on the control to the setting change mode, the output period of the specific signal is longer than the output period of the special signal (output of the setting corresponding change signal). For 30 seconds from the end of the security signal)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, since it is possible to notify the outside that there is a possibility that at least the setting change mode may be controlled by the specific signal, even in a conventional external device that does not assume the input of the special signal, the setting is performed by the specific signal. It can be grasped that the control may be performed in the change mode.

The game machine of means E4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means E1 to E3,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
The special signal can be output based on being controlled to the setting confirmation mode (a setting correspondence change signal is output during a period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to notify the outside that there is a possibility that the setting has been controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of means E5 is
The game machine of means E4,
When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the setting check mode can be controlled (when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is ON and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF). Is controlled to the setting check mode),
It is possible to output both the specific signal and the special signal based on being controlled to the setting confirmation mode (a security signal and a setting correspondence change signal are simultaneously output).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, since it is possible to notify to the outside at least the possibility of being controlled to the setting confirmation mode by the specific signal, even in a conventional external device which does not assume the input of the special signal, the setting is confirmed by the specific signal. It is possible to know that the mode may have been controlled.

The game machine of means E6 is
The game machine of means E1,
A setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value in which the set value can be changed when the power supply to the gaming machine is started; Prepare,
The special signal can be output when the setting change mode is controlled (a setting change corresponding signal is output when the setting change mode is controlled), and the specific signal can be output when the setting change mode ends. (If the RAM clear is executed, a security signal is output when the setting change mode ends).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to notify the outside of the occurrence of the predetermined event while simplifying the signal output process when the mode is controlled to the setting change mode.

The game machine of means E7 is
A game machine of means E1 or means E6,
A setting confirmation mode control means (the game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling to the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value when the power supply to the gaming machine is started; Prepare,
The special signal can be output when the setting confirmation mode is controlled (a setting change corresponding signal is output when the setting confirmation mode is controlled), and the specific signal can be output when the setting confirmation mode ends. (If the RAM clear is executed, a security signal is output when the setting confirmation mode ends)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to notify the occurrence of the predetermined event to the outside while simplifying the signal output processing when the mode is controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of means E8 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means E1 to E7,
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value to a setting change mode;
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value,
In the setting change mode, the setting value can be changed according to a setting change operation (the setting value can be changed by operating a setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 and operating the lock switch 21TM051);
When the setting change operation is performed while not being controlled in any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, a predetermined notification is performed (the effect control CPU 120 operates the lock switch 21TM051). When a lock switch operation command indicating that the lock switch operation command has been received from the game control microcomputer 100, the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 has been operated. , And a warning that “operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected” is displayed on the image display device 5).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, a clerk at the game hall or the like can grasp that an inappropriate setting change operation has been performed.
The correspondence between the means E2 to E8 and the means E1 can be applied to the correspondence between the means E2 to E8 and the means EA.

  Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting change unit for changing a set value in a plurality of stages based on a setting change operation from the outside. Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine in which a "big hit signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board has been proposed. Regarding the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it may be necessary for the external device to grasp information related to the setting value. However, there is a problem that it is difficult for the external device to grasp the signal output technology even if the conventional game machine signal output technology described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication (Paragraph 0102) is applied. The invention relating to the means F1 to F11 has been made in view of the above situation, and it is an object of the invention to provide a gaming machine capable of grasping information relating to a set value on an external device side.

The gaming machine of the means F1 is
A gaming machine capable of executing specific control (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (a set value 1 to 6 in which the range of the random number for the jackpot determination is different),
The setting value can be changed to any one of a plurality of values (changeable based on an operation in a setting change mode),
A special signal (setting change corresponding signal) can be output in response to a process related to the change of the setting value (transition to the setting change mode, transition to the setting confirmation mode),
The special signal can be output in a special mode in which the set value can be specified (a number of pulses corresponding to the set value are output).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it becomes possible to notify the setting value of the gaming machine to the outside.

Further, as a gaming machine of means FA for solving the problem of the gaming machine described in JP-A-2010-200902 and JP-A-2014-200506,
A gaming machine capable of executing specific control (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (a set value 1 to 6 in which the range of the random number for the jackpot determination is different),
The setting value can be changed to any one of a plurality of values (changeable based on an operation in a setting change mode),
A special signal (setting change corresponding signal) can be output in response to a process related to the change of the setting value (transition to the setting change mode, transition to the setting confirmation mode),
The special signal can be output in a special mode in which the set value can be specified (a number of pulses corresponding to the set value are output),
further,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestion effects (for example, notice effects A to C) indicating that the game is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) advantageous to the player. A part for executing step 105 IWS216 in CPU 120);
When any one of the plurality of types of suggested effects is executed, a predetermined period (for example, “10 seconds”, “20 seconds”, “30 seconds”) until the suggested effect is executed is set. A notification effect execution means (for example, a part for executing step 105 IWS 207 in effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a notification effect for notification (for example, display of notification display 105 IW003 shown in FIG. 20-13 (B));
After notifying the predetermined period in the notification effect, the notification of the predetermined period is made unrecognizable before the predetermined period elapses (for example, a portion that executes step 105 IWS210 in the effect control CPU 120). Gaming machines.
According to this feature, it is possible to notify the setting value of the gaming machine to the outside. In addition, it is possible to enhance the effect of performing the notification effect.

The game machine of the means F2 is
The gaming machine of the means F1,
A setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value to a setting change mode capable of changing the set value;
Outputting the special signal in the special mode with the end of the setting change mode (when the setting change mode ends, outputting a number of pulses corresponding to the determined set value);
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to output from the common terminal a signal for notifying whether or not the setting change mode is being controlled and a signal for notifying the setting value of the gaming machine.

The gaming machine of the means F3 is
The game machine of means F2,
When the setting change mode is controlled, a special signal in a non-special mode (a setting change corresponding signal which is turned on during the period in which the setting change mode is controlled) is output. After the output of the special signal is temporarily stopped (after the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off with the end of the setting change mode), the special signal of the special mode (the number of pulse-like settings corresponding to the determined set value) Change response signal),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to notify to the outside whether or not the setting change mode is controlled by the special signal, and also to notify the setting value of the gaming machine to the outside.

The game machine of means F4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means F1 to the means F3,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
Outputting the special signal of the special mode with the end of the setting confirmation mode (when the setting confirmation mode ends, outputting a number of pulses corresponding to the displayed set value);
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to output from the common terminal a signal for notifying whether or not the control is in the setting check mode and a signal for notifying the setting value of the gaming machine.

The gaming machine of the means F5 is
A game machine of means F4,
A special signal in a non-special mode (a setting change corresponding signal that is turned on during the period of being controlled in the setting confirmation mode) is output when the setting confirmation mode is being controlled. After temporarily stopping the output of the special signal (after once turning off the setting change corresponding signal with the end of the setting confirmation mode), the special signal of the special mode (the number of pulse-like signals corresponding to the displayed set value) is used. Output the setting change response signal),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to notify to the outside whether or not the setting check mode is controlled by the special signal, and also to notify the setting value of the gaming machine to the outside.

The gaming machine of the means F6 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means F1 to the means F5,
In the special signal of the special mode, the set value can be specified by the number of pulses. (By setting the number of output times of the pulse-shaped setting change corresponding signal to the same number as the set value, the set value can be specified in the external device. is there),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to easily specify the set value in the external device.

The game machine of means F7 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means F1 to the means F6,
A specific signal (security signal) can be output in response to a predetermined event (abnormal winning, switch abnormality detection, magnetic error, RAM clear, etc.) occurring in the gaming machine.
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the occurrence of the predetermined event can be notified to the outside.

The game machine of means F8 is
The game machine of means F7,
Outputting the specific signal (security signal) and the special signal (setting change corresponding signal) from a common terminal (for example, outputting from a tenth terminal);
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the occurrence of the predetermined event and the set value can be notified externally with a simple configuration.

The game machine of the means F9,
The game machine of means F7,
Outputting the specific signal (security signal) and the special signal (setting change corresponding signal) from different terminals (for example, outputting a security signal from the tenth terminal and outputting a setting change corresponding signal from the seventh terminal);
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the occurrence of the predetermined event and the set value can be notified to the outside in a manner that can be clearly distinguished.

The gaming machine of the means F10 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means F1 to the means F9,
A setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value to a setting change mode capable of changing the set value;
In the setting change mode, the set value can be changed according to a setting change operation (the set value can be changed according to an operation of a setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052);
Regardless of whether or not the setting change operation is performed in the setting change mode, the special signal of the special mode is output upon completion of the setting change mode (when the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off, Regardless of whether or not the setting change switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated before, the number of pulses corresponding to the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is output as a setting change corresponding signal.) ,
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the signal output process by executing the common signal output process regardless of whether the setting change operation is actually performed.

The game machine of the means F11 is
Any of gaming machines selected from the means F1 to the means F10,
The special signal of the special mode is output at the end of the process related to the change of the set value (the number of pulse signals corresponding to the set values stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 at the end of the set change mode). And outputs a number of pulse-like setting change corresponding signals corresponding to the set values stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 with the end of the setting confirmation mode). After the output is completed, the special signal of the special mode is output at a predetermined timing different from the processing related to the change of the set value (for example, the end of the big hit game state) (stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102). The number of pulse-like setting change corresponding signals corresponding to the set values
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to notify the setting value to the outside at a predetermined timing, and therefore, it is possible to increase opportunities for the external device to specify the setting value.
The correspondence between the means F2 to F11 and the means F1 described above can be applied to the correspondence between the means F2 to F11 and the means FA.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a figure for explaining a fluctuation pattern and a kind of reach. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a notice effect determination process. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio in a notice effect determination process. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation of a modification. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation of a modification. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation of a modification. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the characteristic part 105IW. It is a flowchart which shows a gate passage waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows a variable display start setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a notice effect determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of an information production decision table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a notification period determination table. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a notice mode decision table. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a numerical effect determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the production process during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting process per special figure. It is a flowchart which shows a gate passage waiting effect process. It is a flowchart which shows a gate passage waiting effect process. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the effect example when information effect, numerical value effect, and notice effect are performed during the fluctuation display of a decoration symbol. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the effect example when information effect, numerical value effect, and notice effect are performed during the fluctuation display of a decoration symbol. It is an explanatory view for explaining an example of an effect when a story reach effect and an end effect are executed. It is an explanatory view for explaining an example of an effect when a story reach effect and an end effect are executed. It is an explanatory view for explaining an example of an effect when a story reach effect and an end effect are executed. It is an explanatory view for explaining an example of an effect when a super reach effect is executed. It is an explanatory view for explaining an example of an effect when a super reach effect is executed. It is an explanatory view for explaining an example of an effect when a super reach effect is executed. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display effect process in a modification. It is a figure for explaining a fluctuation pattern and a kind of reach. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a notice effect determination process. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio in a notice effect determination process. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation of a modification. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation of a modification. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation of a modification. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of a payout control board. It is a rear view which shows a pachinko gaming machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. (A) is a simplified front view of the main board, and (B) is an explanatory view for explaining the display contents of the display monitor. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a partial configuration of a storage area in a RAM on a main board. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a memory map of a CPU on a main board. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a RAM area corresponding to a storage area of a main board RAM. (A) is a time chart showing the display time of the item displayed on the display monitor, and (B-1) to (B-6) are explanatory diagrams for explaining changes in the display content of the display monitor. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating movement of data stored in a storage area of a ring buffer. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing for game control. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display mode of a display monitor in a setting change mode. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a display mode of a display monitor in a setting confirmation mode. (1) is a diagram showing information displayed on the image display device when controlled to the setting change mode, and (2) shows information displayed on the image display device when controlled to the setting confirmation mode. FIG. (1) to (3) are explanatory diagrams showing an effect mode of a setting suggestion effect, and (4) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining an effect mode of a setting suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the control signal output to a payout control board from a game control board. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the control command transmitted / received between a game control board and a payout control board. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating signal lines and the like used for transmitting and receiving control signals and control commands. It is a sequence diagram showing transmission and reception of signals between the microcomputer for game control and the microcomputer for payout control during normal operation. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which CPU for payout control performs. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process which CPU for payout control performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline | summary of the ball lending restriction method in this embodiment. It is a timing chart for explaining communication between a card unit and a pachinko gaming machine. It is a timing chart which shows the 1st ball lending restriction method. It is a timing chart which shows the 2nd ball lending restriction method. It is a timing chart which shows the 3rd ball lending restriction method. It is a timing chart which shows the 4th ball lending restriction method. FIG. 9 is a timing chart showing an example in which ball lending is not restricted during the setting change mode. It is a timing chart which shows the example which restarts payout after the end of a setting change mode. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing an example in which payout is forcibly terminated along with a shift to a setting change mode. It is a timing chart which shows transmission and reception of the signal between the microcomputer for game control and the microcomputer for payout control at the time of normal operation. It is a timing chart which shows transmission and reception of the signal between the microcomputer for game control and the microcomputer for payout control during the period when it is controlled to the setting change mode. It is a timing chart which shows transmission and reception of the signal between the microcomputer for game control and the microcomputer for payout control during the period when the game machine frame or the glass door frame is open. (1) is an explanatory diagram showing control when a power failure occurs before a set value is determined, and (2) is an explanatory diagram showing control when a power failure occurs after a set value is determined. It is a figure showing a warning screen when a setting change operation is performed during a game. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of a signal output from each output terminal. FIG. 9 is a timing chart showing an output period of a security signal and a setting change correspondence signal. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a relationship between a set value and an output mode of a setting change correspondence signal. FIG. 6 is a timing chart showing an output mode and an output period of a setting change corresponding signal. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process.

(Basic explanation)
First, a basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also a configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched into a game area from a predetermined hitting device.

  In a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, to the right of the game area), a variable display (also called a special figure game) of special symbols (also called special figures) as a plurality of types of special identification information A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating “0” to “9” or a lighting pattern such as “−”. The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

  The “variable display” of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Examples of the fluctuation include an update display of a plurality of symbols, a scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, and enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols. In the case of a special symbol or a variation of a normal symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative pattern described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scroll-displayed or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. Note that the variation includes an aspect in which a certain symbol is blinked. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped as a display result (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) (the same applies to variable display of other symbols described later). Note that variable display may be expressed as variable display or fluctuation.

  The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as “second special symbol”. In addition, the special figure game using the first special figure is referred to as a “first special figure game”, and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a “second special figure game”. There may be one kind of special symbol display device that performs variable display of special symbols.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 includes, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

  For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, decorative symbols (such as symbols indicating numbers) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbols. The variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the left, middle, and right decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, up and down) Direction scroll display and update display). Note that the special display game and the variable display of the decorative symbols executed in synchronism are collectively referred to simply as variable display.

  On the screen of the image display device 5, there may be provided a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display for which execution is suspended and an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. The hold display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

  The number of variable displays that are held is also called the number of stored memories. The number of reserved memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as a first reserved memory number, and the number of reserved memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as a second reserved memory number. The total of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

  In addition, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2, and the first hold indicator 25A indicates the number of LEDs lit. To display the first reserved memory number, and the second reserved indicator 25B displays the second reserved memory number according to the number of lit LEDs.

  Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

  The winning ball apparatus 6A forms a first start winning opening that is maintained in a certain open state in which a game ball can always enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number of (for example, three) prize balls are paid out and the first special game can be started.

  The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second start winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball apparatus 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the movable wing piece is in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is off, the tip of the movable wing piece Is close to the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball enters the closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning port (also referred to as the second starting winning port is closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening by moving the movable wing piece to the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state (second starting point). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the one having an electric tulip type accessory as long as it changes between a closed state and an open state.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four places in the lower left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 that are always kept in a certain open state by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when entering any of the general winning ports 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the large winning opening door closes the large winning opening and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning entrance. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize opening door is in the ON state, the special prize opening door opens the big prize opening, so that the game ball can easily enter the special prize opening. Become.

  When game balls enter the big prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When game balls enter the big prize opening, for example, more prize balls are paid out than when game balls enter the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, and the general prize opening 10, for example.

  The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as “winning”. In particular, winning at the starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port starting port) is also referred to as starting winning.

  A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and variably displays normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such variable display of normal symbols is also called a general game.

  On the left side of the image display device 5, a passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the usual game is executed.

  Above the normal symbol display 20, a universal figure holding display 25 </ b> C is provided. The general figure hold display unit 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of general figure hold storage, which is the number of general figure games that are being executed, by the number of lighted LEDs.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken.

  Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a gaming effect lamp 9 for a gaming effect is provided around the gaming area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

  At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates in accordance with the performance is provided.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 that is operated by a player or the like in order to launch a game ball toward the game area by the hitting ball launching device.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. ) Is provided. Below the upper plate, there is provided a hitting ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31 </ b> A and the push button 31 </ b> B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's operation (operation, etc.), but other detection means may be provided.

(Outline of game progress)
A game ball is launched toward the game area by a rotation operation by the player to the hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In the case where the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the previous execution of the usual game, etc. (when the game ball passes through the pass gate 41 but the usual game based on the pass cannot be executed immediately). The usual game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In this ordinary game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbols per ordinary symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “ordinary symbol losing”. When the “normal hit” is reached, an opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period (the second start winning opening is opened).

  When a game ball enters the first start winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

  If a game ball enters (wins) a start winning opening during a period during which a special figure game is being executed or during a period where a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state, which will be described later, is controlled (a start winning has occurred) In the case where the special game based on the start prize cannot be immediately executed), the special game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In a special game, if a specific special symbol (a jackpot symbol, for example, “7”, the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type to be described later) is stopped and displayed as a special symbol, it will be a “hit” symbol. If a predetermined special symbol different from (a small hit symbol, for example, “2”) is stopped and displayed, “small hit” is obtained. In addition, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, “-”) different from the big hit symbol or the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it is “lost”.

  After the display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the big hit gaming state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes “small hit”, the game is controlled to the small hit gaming state.

  In the big hit game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is selected from the timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing of the number of game balls that have entered the special winning opening reaching a predetermined number (for example, nine). It is continued until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which a special winning opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an opening upper limit period. One cycle in which the special winning opening is opened is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the round reaches a predetermined upper limit number (15 times or 2 times).

  In the big hit game state, the player can obtain a prize ball by causing the game ball to enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the big hit gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state, and the longer the opening upper limit period, the more advantageous for the player.

  Note that a “big hit” is set as the big hit type. For example, a number of types of opening of the big prize opening (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) and gaming state after the big hit gaming state (described later, normal state, short-time state, probability variation state, etc.) are prepared, and depending on these, the big hit Type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type that can obtain many prize balls, or a jackpot type that has few prize balls or hardly obtains prize balls.

  In the small hit gaming state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in the case of some big hit types (the number of times of opening of the big prize opening is the same as the number of rounds and the closing timing of the big prize opening is also the same. Etc.), the grand prize opening is opened. Similar to the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the “small hit”.

  After the big hit gaming state is ended, depending on the big hit type, it may be controlled to a short time state or a probable change state.

  In the short-time state, control (short-time control) is executed to shorten the average special figure change time (period during which the special figure is changed) compared to the normal state. In the short-time state, by reducing the average normal map change time (period in which the normal map is changed) from the normal state, or by improving the probability of “per normal map” in the normal game, than the normal state, Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. The short-time state is a state advantageous for the player because the variation efficiency of the special symbol (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

  In the probability variation state (probability variation state), in addition to the time reduction control, probability variation control is executed in which the probability that the display result is “big hit” is higher than in the normal state. The probability variation state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is likely to be a “hit” in addition to the improvement of the variation efficiency of the special symbol.

  The short-time state or the probability change state continues until any one end condition such as that a predetermined number of special game has been executed and the next big hit game state has been established. A game whose end condition is that a predetermined number of special game has been executed is also referred to as a number of cuts (short time cut, number change probability change, etc.).

  The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as a big hit gaming state advantageous for the player, a short-time state, a probable change state, etc., and the display result in the ordinary game is “per ordinary figure”. The pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game is “big hit” is the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, a predetermined return after power-on) This is the same control as when the process was not executed.

  A state in which the probability variation control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which the probability variation control is not being performed is also referred to as a low probability state. The state where the time reduction control is executed is also referred to as a high base state, and the state where the time reduction control is not executed is also referred to as a low base state. By combining these, it is said that the short-time state is a low-accuracy and high-base state, the probability variation state is a high-accuracy and high-base state, the normal state is a low-accuracy and low-base state, and the like. The highly accurate state and the low base state are also referred to as a highly accurate low base state.

  After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special game is “small hit” is controlled continuously (however, “small hit” occurs) If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times, the gaming state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there is no “small hit” as the display result of the special game.

  Note that the gaming state may change based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big prize opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game ball may be controlled to be in a probable change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 This may be performed by turning on / off the light, and the operation of the movable body 32.

  In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, the first special game or the first game is produced as an effect executed in accordance with the progress of the game. Corresponding to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the fixed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable decorative symbol display ) Is also stopped (derived).

  In the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end thereof, the variable display mode of the decorative design may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display for decorative symbols that have not been stopped yet when the decorative symbols stopped on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of a jackpot combination described later. It is a mode that is continuing.

  In addition, a reach effect is executed in response to the above-described reach mode during variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special figure game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) according to the production mode becomes “big hit” (also called the big hit reliability or the big hit expectation). Different types of reach production are executed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach with higher hit reliability than normal reach.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “big hit”, a predetermined decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of variable display of decorative symbols on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration) The display result of the variable display of the symbol is “big hit”). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, “7”, etc.) are stopped and displayed together on predetermined active lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

  In the case of “probability big hit”, which is controlled to the probable change state after the big hit gaming state, odd numbers of decorative symbols (for example, “7”, etc.) are all stopped and displayed, and after the big hit gaming state, the probable change state is entered. In the case of a “non-probable big hit (normal big hit)” that is not controlled, an even number of decorative symbols (for example, “6”, etc.) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as probability variation symbols, and even-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as non-probable variation symbols (normal symbols). After becoming a reach mode with a non-probable variation pattern, a promotion effect that finally becomes a “probability large hit” may be executed.

  When the display result of the special game is “small hit”, as a display result of variable display of decorative symbols on the screen of the image display device 5, a fixed decorative symbol (for example, “ 1 3 5 "etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is" small hit "). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eye are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes “big hit” of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit gaming state in the same manner as the small hit gaming state) and when it becomes “small hit” A common fixed decorative symbol may be derived and displayed.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “losing”, the decorative display variable display mode is not the reach mode, but the non-reach combination fixed display pattern (“ (Also referred to as “non-reach lose”) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be “non-reach lose”). Further, when the display result is “losing”, after the decorative display variable display mode becomes the reach mode, the predetermined reach combination (“reach loss”) that is not a big hit combination is displayed as the variable display display result of the decorative design. In other cases, the fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as “definitely”) is stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is “reach lose”).

  The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). As other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed during variable display of decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the big hit reliability in the variable display being executed, and a pre-read notice effect for notifying the big hit reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display for which execution is suspended). As the pre-reading notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

  Further, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative design during the variable display of the decorative design and then restarting the variable display, the single variable display is made to appear as a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. A pseudo-continuous effect may be executed.

  Even during the big hit game state, the big hit effect for informing the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit effect, an effect for notifying the number of rounds or a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state may be executed. In addition, during the small hit game state, the small hit effect during the small hit game state is executed. In addition, the big hit game in the small hit game state and a part of the big hit type (a big hit type of the big hit gaming state in the same manner as the small hit gaming state, for example, a big hit type in which the subsequent gaming state is a high probability state) By executing a common effect with the state, the player may not know whether the current state is the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, a common effect is executed after the end of the small hit gaming state and after the end of the big hit gaming state, so that it is not possible to identify whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. May be.

  Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, and a relay board 15 as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are disposed on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-described game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of holding), execution of a general game (including management of holding), jackpot A gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, and the like). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, and the like. And a random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

  The CPU 103 performs a process for controlling the progress of the game (a process for realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as later-described variation patterns, later-described effect control commands, and various tables referred to when making various determinations described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which a part or all of the RAM 102 is stored for a predetermined period even when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. Note that all or a part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

  The random number circuit 104 counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used for controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The game random number may be updated by CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and various signals (the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, the first hold). And an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display hold device 25B, the second hold display device 25B, the general-purpose hold display device 25C, and the like, and a solenoid drive signal).

  The switch circuit 110 is configured to detect detection signals (game balls pass or not) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch is turned on is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. Through the transmission of the detection signal, the passing or entry of the game ball is detected.

  The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the grand prize opening door. To transmit.

  The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) sends an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. 12 is supplied. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The production control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type), a variation pattern used when the special figure game is executed (details will be described later) )), A game status (for example, start and end of variable display, open status of a big prize opening, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, gaming state), a command specifying an error, and the like.

  The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives production control commands, and produces productions (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. (Including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, notification of power failure recovery, etc.).

  On the effect control board 12, an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125 are mounted.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute an effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above-described function of the effect control board 12 and an effect to be executed). Including the determination of At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals output when an operation by the player is detected and indicating the operation content as appropriate). The control unit 123 may be instructed.

  The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

  The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display the effect image by supplying the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to perform sound output synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or a lamp signal (a signal designating the lighting / extinguishing mode of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

  The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the audio designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

  The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the ramp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the ramp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls audio output and lamp on / off.

  The production control CPU 120 executes sound output, lamp on / off control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.) and control of the movable body 32 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do it.

  The random number circuit 124 counts numerical data indicating various random values (effect random numbers) used for executing various effects in an updatable manner. The effect random number may be updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

  For example, the I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 transmits an input port for receiving an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, ramp signal). Output port.

  Substrates other than the main board 11 such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14 are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operations of the main board 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

  In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets prohibition of interruption (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial setting includes setting of a stack pointer, register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, etc.), setting for making the RAM 102 accessible.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on while the clear switch is on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), an initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

  If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop process immediately before it becomes unable to operate due to the stop of the power supply. In the power supply stop process, a process for turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process for the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes addition of error detection codes (checksum, parity bits, etc.) and processing for backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data for progressing the game (including various flags, states of various timers, and the like), but also the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed using the error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

  If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). As a result, when the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped and the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is resumed from the state before the recovery by executing the game control timer interrupt processing described later. Will be.

  And CPU103 transmits the production control command which instruct | indicates the recovery | restoration from a power interruption to the production control board 12 (step S7). In conjunction with this, an effect control command for designating a backed-up gaming state before power interruption, or an effect control for designating the display result of the special figure game being executed when the special figure game is being executed. A command may be transmitted. As these commands, the same commands as those set for transmission in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command for specifying the time of recovery from the power interruption, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the power recovery from the power interruption has been made or is being recovered from the power interruption. To display the screen. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

  After finishing the restoration process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and an interrupt is permitted (step S12). ). Thereafter, the loop processing is started. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

  When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes a game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby causing the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port through the switch circuit 110. Whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S21). Subsequently, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed by executing a predetermined main-side error process, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrence of jackpot) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of winnings) and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the probability has changed) is output (step S23).

  Subsequent to the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of special symbol game execution and suspension, control of a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state, control of a gaming state, etc. Later).

  Following the special symbol process, a normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process for each timer interruption, thereby managing the execution and holding of the ordinary game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), The opening control of the variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on “per figure” is enabled. The ordinary game is executed by driving the normal symbol display device 20, and the ordinary figure display number is displayed by turning on the ordinary symbol display device 25C.

  After executing the normal symbol process, a process when a power interruption occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, or the like may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt process. Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

  In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting occurrence of a start winning, storing hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold memory number is executed. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining a display result (including a jackpot type) and a variation pattern is extracted and stored as hold information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process for determining in advance a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the hold information and the number of reserved memories, transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command for designating determination results such as the occurrence of a start prize, the number of reserved memories, and the prefetch determination is performed on the effect control board 12. . The effect control command at the time of a start winning set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. Is transmitted.

  After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S <b> 110 to S <b> 120) of the special symbol process, transmission settings for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 are performed.

  The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of the hold information. Also, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is “big hit” or “small hit” based on the random number value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when “big hit” is assumed Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (any one of the big hit symbol, the small hit symbol, or the lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set corresponding to the determined display result. Thereafter, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1”, and the special symbol normal process ends. Note that the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the order of winning game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special figure game may be established in the order of winning (also referred to as winning order digestion).

  When various determinations are made based on random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which determination values to be compared with random number values are assigned to the determination results) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting process, one of multiple types of variation patterns can be selected using a random value for determining the variation pattern based on the result of prior determination of whether or not the display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. The process to decide on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”, and the variation pattern setting process ends.

  Fluctuation patterns include special game execution time (special graphic variable time) (also the execution time of decorative symbol variable display), decorative symbol variable display mode (such as presence / absence of reach), and variable decorative symbol display The content of the production (the type of reach production, etc.) is designated and is also called a variable display pattern.

  The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. This special symbol variation process includes a process for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached a special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. When the time elapsed since the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “3”, and the special symbol variation process is terminated.

  The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B stops the variation of the special symbol, and stops (displays) the definite special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. The process to set for is included. When the display result is “big hit”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4”. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is “small hit”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”. When the display result is “lost”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”. When the display result is “small hit” or “losing”, the gaming state is also updated when the time reduction state or the probability variation state is controlled and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop process ends.

  The big hit release pre-processing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This pre-opening process for jackpots includes a process for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot gaming state and setting the open winning opening based on the fact that the display result is “hit” It is. When the big prize opening is in an open state, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an open upper limit period in which the big winning opening is opened or an upper limit execution number of rounds is set corresponding to which of the big hit types. When these settings are finished, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”, and the big hit release pre-processing is finished.

  The big hit release processing in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". In the big hit opening process, the winning prize opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is in the open state, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. The process etc. which determine whether it became the timing which returns to a closed state from an open state are included. Then, when returning the prize winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing for stopping the supply of the solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the prize winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “6”, The processing during the jackpot release is terminated.

  The big hit release post-processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-hit-opening process, a process for determining whether or not the number of executions of the round in which the big winning opening is opened has reached the set upper limit execution number, and when the upper limit execution number is reached, the big hit game state The process etc. which perform the setting for ending are included. When the round execution count does not reach the upper limit execution count, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”, whereas when the round execution count reaches the upper limit execution count, the special figure process flag value is updated. The value is updated to “7”. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the processing after the big hit release ends.

  The big hit end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. The jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending effect is executed as an effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. This includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”, and the jackpot end processing ends.

  The small hit pre-release process in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This pre-opening process for small hits includes a process for setting the big winning opening in the small hit gaming state based on the fact that the display result is “small hit”. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “9”, and the small hit release pre-processing ends.

  The small hit releasing process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In the small hit opening process, the process for measuring the elapsed time since the big prize opening is in the open state, and the timing for returning the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time, etc. The process etc. which determine whether or not were included are included. When the big prize opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit gaming state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “10”, and the small hit opening process ends.

  The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. This small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period during which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit gaming state is executed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit gaming state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”, and the small hit end processing ends.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and displays the effect control board 12. Performs register settings for the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32 such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for performing a predetermined operation check is executed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and awaits.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is generated when, for example, an effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interruption due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal occurs, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is fetched from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I / O 125. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt processing after setting the interrupt permission.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis processing, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command can be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process or the like. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

  After executing the command analysis process in step S75, an effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 and a decoration LED, and the movable body 32 Control for operating various effect devices, such as the drive operation, is performed. In addition, determination, determination, setting, and the like according to an effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11 are performed on the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices.

  Following the effect control process in step S76, an effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Another process may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

  FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a prefetch notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, and setting for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main board 11. Further, a process for displaying a hold display is executed based on the hold memory number specified from the effect control command.

  After executing the process of step S161, the CPU 120 for effect control selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process for determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for specifying the start of variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative design in the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”, and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative design (determined decorative design), the variable display mode of the decorative design, the reach effect and various The presence / absence of execution of various effects such as a notice effect, its mode, execution start timing, and the like are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. Thereafter, based on the set production control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the production process flag is updated to “2”, and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols.

  The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. In addition, driving the movable body 32, outputting sound and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and issuing a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14 Various effects control during variable display of decorative symbols, such as turning on / off / flashing the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by the output, is executed. After such effect control is performed, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of decorative symbols is read from the effect control pattern, or a command specifying stop display of the final decorative symbols is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to what has been done, the definite decorative symbol that is the display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. When the definite decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”, and the effect process during variable display ends.

  The special figure waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command for designating the start of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state has been received from the main board 11. When an effect control command designating starting a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state is received, if the command designates the start of a big hit gaming state, the value of the production process flag is set to “6”. Update to "". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit gaming state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “4” which is a value corresponding to the effect processing during the small hit. Also, when the command waiting time of the command has passed without receiving a command specifying that the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is started, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is “losing”. Thus, the value of the production process flag is updated to “0” which is an initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process per special figure is terminated.

  The small hitting effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the setting contents. . Also, in the small hit effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command to end the small hit gaming state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. It is updated to a certain “5”, and the small hit effect production process is terminated.

  The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the set content. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”, and the small hit end effect process is ended.

  The big hit effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In the jackpot effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the jackpot game state, and executes various effect controls in the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Also, in the big hit effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command for ending the big hit gaming state from the main board 11, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect processing. 7 ", and the big hit effect processing is terminated.

  The ending effect process in step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state, and performs various effects control of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0”, which is the initial value, and the ending effect process ends.

(Modification of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winnings, but encloses the game media and gives points based on the occurrence of winnings. It may be an enclosed game machine.

  Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating “−”) is displayed during variable display of the special symbol, and variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, in the case where the symbol is displayed during variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (a symbol indicating “−” may not be displayed as a display result).

  In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but a predetermined number of bets are set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated in accordance with the operation of the operation lever by the player. When the symbols are stopped in response to the stop button operation by the player, if the combination of the stopped symbols becomes a specific symbol combination, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus etc.).

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium with respect to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1; It is also possible to adopt a form that is distributed by installing it in a storage device. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

  In the present specification, the comparison expression (expression such as “high”, “low”, “difference”, etc.) of various ratios such as the performance execution ratio is that the ratio of one is “0%”. May be included. For example, one of the ratios is “0%” and the other is a ratio of “100%” or a ratio of less than “100%”.

(Explanation about the characteristic part 31AK)
Next, the characteristic portion 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8 is a view for explaining a variation pattern and a type of reach in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 8 (A), in the present embodiment, the non-reach-loss variation patterns PA1-1 and PA1-2 in which the display mode is not the reach mode but the display result is "losing" in the variable display mode of the decorative symbol. , The display pattern is a "big hit", such as reach-loss variation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-6, PA3-1 to PA3-4, etc., in which the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode and the display result is "losing". There are prepared the following fluctuation patterns PB2-1 to PB2-6, PB3-1 to PB3-4, and the like.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 8B, in the present embodiment, reach effects such as normal reach and super reach AE are executed. In this embodiment, the reach effect is also referred to as a suggestion effect that indicates that it is controlled to the big hit state. The reliability (big hit reliability) when each reach is executed is represented by the number of black stars in FIG. 8B, normal reach <super reach E <super reach D <super reach C <super reach B <Super reach A increases in order. In addition, you may provide the reach which determines a big hit.

  In this embodiment, the super reach is executed via the normal reach. In addition, during the super-reach reach effect, an advanced effect that evolves (promotes) to a more reliable reach may be executed. The variation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4, etc., and variation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-4, etc. shown in FIG. 8A are variation patterns corresponding to the execution of the development effect. Note that FIG. 8A shows a variation pattern in which the reliability evolves into a super-reach one step higher, but a variation pattern in which the reliability evolves in two or more steps is also provided. Further, a variation pattern in which the development effect is executed a plurality of times may be provided.

  In this embodiment, the title of the reach is notified at a predetermined timing after the reach is established, except for the normal reach having the lowest reliability. As shown in FIG. 8B, the title notification mode differs depending on the type of reach. Specifically, the super reach E having the lowest reliability among the super reach is notified only by displaying the title of the reach, and the other super reach is notified of the title by display and sound. As described above, the notification of the title is executed by the effect device of the reach with the higher reliability than the reach with the lower reliability. As a result, the player's sense of expectation can be effectively instigated, and the production effect can be improved. The title notification mode may be arbitrarily changed depending on the reliability or irrespective of the reliability. Further, even in the same reach effect, the notification mode may be changed according to the actual display result or the like. Further, the font of the title character (Gothic, Mincho, etc.) or the typeface (line, square, etc.) may be changed depending on the type of the reach.

  The notification of the title of the reach (title notification) is not limited to the title itself such as the name of the reach, but may be the name of the character appearing in the reach effect, the content of the effect of the reach effect, or the like.

(Example of the production operation of the characteristic part 31AK)
Next, an example of a rendering operation according to the present embodiment will be described. The following production operation is executed by the production control CPU 120 executing the production control process based on the production control command transmitted from the main board 11. FIG. 9 and FIG. 10 are diagrams illustrating an example of a super reach effect operation according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9 (A) shows that the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” of the image display device 5. . Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 9 (B), the decorative symbol indicating the number 7 on the “left” and “right” stops and the reach mode is reached. After that, the production branches depending on the type of reach.

(Super Reach A)
In the case of Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 9C, a character 31AK001, which is a friendly character, is displayed on the image display device 5, and a reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period elapses from the start of the super-reach effect, such as when the introduction portion of the super-reach effect (also referred to as the super-reach effect) ends, the entire screen of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. The title 31AK002 of super reach A (here, the character of “SP reach A”) is displayed, and the sound (here, “super reach A”) corresponding to the title of reach is output from the speaker 8. , The title of Super Reach A is announced. Thereafter, the title 31AK002 of Super Reach A is erased, and as shown in FIG. 9 (E), the character 31AK003 which is the enemy character is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK003 confront each other. The subsequent part of the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed. An effect in which the characters confront each other is also referred to as a battle effect. In the battle effect, a victory occurs when an ally character wins, and a loss occurs when the ally character loses.

  In addition, when the words are displayed on the image display device 5 during the super reach effect, the sound corresponding to the words may be output from the speaker 8. Also, the dialogue is not limited to being displayed in a balloon as shown in FIG. 9E, and may be displayed as subtitles in a lower portion of the image display device 5 or the like.

(Super Reach B)
In the case of Super Reach B, as shown in FIG. 9C, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period elapses after the super reach effect is started, such as when the introduction portion of the super reach effect ends, as shown in FIG. 9 (F), the entire screen of the image display device 5 displays the title 31AK005 (here In this case, the character “SP Reach B” is displayed, and a sound (here, “Super Reach B”) corresponding to the title of the Reach is output from the speaker 8 to notify the title of Super Reach B. You. Thereafter, the title 31AK005 of Super Reach B is deleted, and as shown in FIG. 9 (G), the character 31AK006, which is the enemy character, is displayed. The subsequent part of the reach effect of Super Reach B is executed.

  As described above, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the title of the reach is notified when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the super reach effect. By doing so, the title can be notified after the introduction part of the super reach effect is shown to the player, so that the effect of the title notification can be enhanced.

  Also, in Super Reach A (FIG. 9 (C) → (D) → (E)...) And Super Reach B (FIG. 9 (C) → (F) → (G). In the introductory part before the notification, the super reach effect is executed in a common effect mode (FIG. 9C). In this way, the player can be noticed which super-reach has been started since the super-reach production started, and which title is to be notified. The super-reach A and the super-reach B are not limited to completely making the production mode until the title is announced. At least one super-reach can be determined if the production is watched. The sections may have a common effect mode. For example, in the introductory part of Super Reach A and Super Reach B, a super reach effect (for example, an effect that displays an enemy character or suggests an enemy character) may be performed in a manner related to a title to be notified thereafter. It may be. By doing so, the effect of the effect is improved, and the player pays attention to the effect. As described above, the title notification may be executed after the super reach can be specified.

(Super Reach D)
In the case of Super Reach D, the title 31AK007 of Super Reach D (here, the character of “SP Reach D”) is displayed at a part of the center of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. At the same time, a sound (here, “defeat the enemy”) corresponding to the title of the reach is output from the speaker 8, thereby notifying the title of the super reach D. As described above, in the super reach D, the title is notified at the start of the super reach effect. Under the title 31AK007, an expectation degree suggestion indication 31AK008 indicating the degree of expectation of the reach is displayed. The degree of expectation is represented by the number of black stars, as shown in FIG. Here, the degree of expectation is the degree of expectation to be a big hit, but does not have to completely match the big hit reliability of the reach.

  The notification by the voice of Super Reach D does not report the title as it is, but reports the content of the reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the mode of notification of the title notification by voice differs depending on the type of the reach. Thereby, the notification mode of the title notification is diversified, and the interest is improved.

  After the title is notified in the super reach D, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. At this time, the title 31AK007 and the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 continue to be displayed in a reduced size in the upper right portion of the image display device 5 or the like. By doing so, the player can grasp the degree of expectation of the reach even during the reach effect. Although FIG. 9 (I) shows the effect contents common to FIG. 9 (C) (super reach A, super reach B), a super reach effect dedicated to super reach D may be executed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 9 (J), the character 31AK009, which is the enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the reach effect of the super reach D in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK009 confront each other is executed. You.

(Super Reach E)
In the case of Super Reach E, the title 31AK010 of Super Reach E (here, the character of “SP Reach E”) is displayed in a part of the upper left of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. Thus, the title of Super Reach E is announced. In the super reach E, the notification of the title by voice is not performed. In addition to the display of the title 31AK010, the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011, which is an enemy character, are displayed. Be executed. As described above, in Super Reach E, the title is notified in accordance with the progress of the reach effect. In the super reach E, the title 31AK010 is continuously displayed during the reach effect.

  In the reach production of the super reach E having a low jackpot reliability, by giving the title information without stopping the progress of the reach production, it is possible to prevent the player from giving an excessive sense of expectation. On the other hand, in the reach effects of the super reach A, the super reach B, and the super reach D, the progress of the reach effect is stopped and the title is notified (FIGS. 9D, 9F, and 9F). H)). By doing so, the title notification according to the super reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. It should be noted that in super reach effects such as super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D, the title may be notified without stopping the progress of the reach. Also, in contrast to this embodiment, in the super-reach reach production with high jackpot reliability, the title may be notified without stopping the progress of the reach production. In the reach effect of the super reach having a low jackpot reliability, the progress of the reach effect may be stopped to notify the title.

(Timing notification timing)
As described above, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of Super Reach production, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, Super Reach production The title is announced at the start. By doing in this way, it is possible to execute the title notification according to the reach effect, and the effect of the effect is improved. In this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B having high jackpot reliability, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of the superreach production, and Super Reach D and Super Reach have low jackpot reliability. In E, the title was announced at the start of the super-reach production, but the title was announced at the start of the super-reach production in the case of the reach with a high jackpot reliability, and the super The title may be notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the reach effect.

(Title display area)
Further, in this embodiment, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the title is announced on the entire screen (first area) of the image display device 5, and in the super reach D and the super reach E, the image display device 5 is displayed. Is notified in a part of the screen (second area). By doing in this way, it is possible to execute the title notification according to the reach effect, and the effect of the effect is improved. In particular, in the case of a reach with a high jackpot reliability, the title notification is executed in a wider display area than in a case of a reach with a low reliability, so that effective title notification is possible. Note that the title notification on the entire screen of the image display device 5 may be such that the title is displayed in a size that fits the entire screen, or the entire background is displayed as a title notification background. (Title notification using the entire screen) or the like. Further, the display area for performing the title notification may be different between the super reach A and the super reach B, or the display area for performing the title notification may be different between the super reach D and the super reach E.

  The method of changing the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect is not limited to the example of this embodiment, and the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect may be arbitrarily changed. For example, in the case of a reach with a high jackpot reliability, the title notification may be executed in a narrower display area than in a case of a reach with a low reliability. Further, when the display area for performing the title notification is made different according to the reach effect, the display area may be made different as in this embodiment, or the display place may be made different.

(Expected indication)
In this embodiment, in the title notification in the super reach A and the super reach B having the high jackpot reliability, the super reach D having the lower jackpot reliability than the super reach A and the super reach B is displayed without displaying the indication of the expectation degree. In the title notification in, an indication of the degree of expectation was displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the effect from becoming dull. In addition, in the title notification in Super Reach E, which has a lower jackpot reliability than Super Reach D, an indication of the degree of expectation is not displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the expectation by displaying the expectation indicator indicating that the reliability is low in the reach with low reliability. Note that an expectation degree suggestion display may be displayed on at least a part of the super reach A, the super reach B, and the super reach E.

  Note that the indication of the degree of expectation is not limited to the one indicated by the number of black stars as shown in FIG. 9 (H) and the like. The set numerical value may be displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 9 (H) and the like, when the number of black stars is indicated, half (or half) black stars may be displayed, and the number of levels of expectation may be increased.

(Title display end timing)
In this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, after the title is displayed, the title is erased and a super reach effect is executed. Thereby, in the super reach A and the super reach B, it is possible to pay attention to the reach effect. Further, in the super reach D and the super reach E, after the title is displayed, the title is continuously displayed until a determined effect described later is executed. Thereby, in the super reach D and the super reach E, the type of the reach can be grasped even during the super reach effect. In addition, by performing the above, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect can be improved. Note that the display end timing of the title may be arbitrarily changed in order to improve the effect of presentation regardless of the timing.

  Note that, here, the production operation of the reach production of the super reach C is omitted, however, for example, a title notification and an expectation suggestion display according to the jackpot reliability may be executed.

(Decision production)
When it is time to derive the display result (the end of the variable display) after each reach effect has been executed, a fixed effect for notifying whether or not the display result will be a "big hit" is executed. The fixed effects include a fixed effect indicating that the display result is "big hit" and a fixed effect indicating that the display result is "losing". In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10B, a fixed effect in which the image 31AK012 is displayed on the image display device 5 is executed. Thereafter, if the display result is “big hit”, an image 31AK013 indicating that the ally character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 10C, and a big hit combination is obtained as shown in FIG. 10D. A fixed decoration symbol is derived. If the display result is "losing", an image indicating that the ally character has been defeated is displayed, and a fixed decorative symbol that is a reach-losing combination is derived.

  In the present embodiment, even when the title is continuously notified during the reach effect, the notification of the title is ended before the fixed effect is executed. As a result, attention can be paid to the determined effect, and a sharp title notification can be executed.

  In the effect operation example shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, during the reach effect of the super reach, the decorative design is reduced at the lower right portion of the image display device 5 and the variable display is executed. The method of displaying the decorative pattern of the item may be arbitrary. For example, the decorative design may not be displayed during the reach effect, or the display mode (size, position, shading, number, etc.) may be changed depending on the type of the reach effect.

  In addition, when the character resident in the hold display, the active display, and the variable display, and the display related to the mobile phone are displayed on the image display device 5, the display is appropriately not displayed during the reach effect of the super reach in order to focus on the reach effect. It may be. At this time, these displays may be kept displayed during a low-reliability reach effect such as super reach E. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from excessively expecting a low-reliability reach effect, and to pay attention to the reach effect in the high-reliability reach effect.

(Development stage)
Next, an example of an effect operation when the extended effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 11 (A), when the extended effect is executed when the reach effect of Super Reach D is executed (the title notification of Super Reach D is executed), FIG. As shown, an effect is performed in which the reach effect is interrupted and the screen is torn. Thereafter, in the case of developing into Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 11 (C), the title of Super Reach A is announced, and the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed. In the case of developing into Super Reach B, as shown in FIG. 11D, the title of Super Reach B is announced, and the reach effect of Super Reach is executed. As described above, when the development effect is performed, the notification of the title of the reach of the development source is switched to the notification of the title of the reach of the development destination. As illustrated in FIG. 11, when the reach of the development destination is a reach that performs title notification by display and voice, title notification by display and voice is executed again.

  Note that the development effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 11B, but may be an effect in which the screen is gradually cracked and cracked, or a sandstorm (display indicating failure) is displayed. You may do so. With such an effect, an unexpected effect can be performed. It should be noted that there may be a development effect of gasses, such as an effect in which the screen gradually cracks but the reach does not develop.

(Expectation suggestion effect)
In the effect operation example shown in FIG. 9H, the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 is configured such that black stars indicating the expectation degree are displayed from the beginning. An expectation degree suggestion effect that suggests an expectation degree by becoming a black star may be executed.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 12 (A), when announcing the title of Super Reach D, an expectation indicator 31AK021 of five white stars is first displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 12B, a black star 31AK022 larger than the star of the expectation indicator 31AK021 is displayed. As shown in FIG. 12C, the black star 31AK022 moves and the expectation indicator 31AK021 is displayed. An effect that fits into one of the white stars is performed. At this time, a sound of “pin” indicating that the number of black stars indicating the degree of expectation has increased is output from the speaker 8. As shown in FIGS. 12D and 12E, the same effect is repeated the number of times corresponding to the degree of expectation of the reach. At this time, the sound (volume, scale, sound quality, etc.) output from the speaker 8 may be changed step by step each time it is repeated (for each number of stars). When the number of black stars corresponding to the degree of expectation falls within the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK021, the black star is highlighted, as shown in FIG. By doing so, it becomes easy to understand that the expectation degree suggestion effect has ended.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 12A to 12F, the black stars are displayed one by one, and the expectation indicated by the expectation suggestion display is increased by one step. However, two or more black stars are displayed. It may be displayed so that the degree of expectation increases by two or more levels. Alternatively, half the black stars may be displayed, and the degree of expectation may be increased by half a step. In this case, different sounds may be output or the same sound may be output according to the number of displayed stars (the number of stages of the expected degree of rising). For example, the same sound may be output when half a black star is displayed and when one black star is displayed. The same sound may be output when two and a half black stars are displayed and when three black stars are displayed. Further, there may be a case where no sound is output. By doing so, the effect indicating the degree of expectation is diversified, and the effect of the effect is improved. Regardless of the number of steps of the degree of expectation that increases at one time, the same black star image is displayed and fits in the white star of the indication of expectation, and the number of black stars according to the number of steps of the degree of expectation that increases increases Such an effect may be performed.

(Direction mode)
There may be a plurality of effect modes in the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the game effect lamp 9. In different effect modes, even if the same command (for example, a command specifying a variation pattern) is transmitted from the main board 11, effects based on the command are executed in different effect modes. In each effect mode, the background, the character, the motif displayed on the image display device 5, the sound output from the speaker 8, and the like need only be different. The effect mode may be automatically changed according to the number of times of variable display or a game state, or may be changeable by a player's operation.

  FIGS. 12 (G) to 12 (L) are examples of the production operation of the title notification and the expectation degree suggestion production when the special mode is set when the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the production mode. In the normal mode, as shown in FIGS. 12 (A) to 12 (F), title notification and expectation degree suggestion effect are executed. In the special mode, the reach effect based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is a reach effect of the super reach D2 having a different effect form from the reach effect of the super reach D. Therefore, when the variation pattern of the super reach D is designated, the title 31AK023 of the super reach D2 is displayed as shown in FIG. At this time, a sound corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8, but a sound different from the normal mode (for example, a sound having a different voice color) is output. The expectation degree indication 31AK024 in the super reach D2 is not a star but a diamond.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 12 (H), a black diamond 31AK025 larger than the star of the expectation indicator 31AK024 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. An effect that fits into one of the white diamonds is executed. At this time, a sound “pong” is output from the speaker 8 indicating that the black diamond indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 12 (J) and (K), the same effect is repeated the number of times corresponding to the degree of expectation of the reach. When the number of black rhombuses corresponding to the degree of expectation falls in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024, the black rhombus is highlighted, as shown in FIG. As described above, by making the notification mode of the title different depending on the effect mode (the state when the reach effect is executed) determined according to the selection of the player, the game state, and the like, the effect is diversified, and the effect of the effect is enhanced. improves.

  FIG. 12 shows an example of the production operation when the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach D is designated. May be made different. Depending on the effect mode (the state when the reach effect is executed), whether to notify the title of the reach or the execution ratio of the title notification may be different. For example, when a predetermined effect mode is selected, the reach title may not be notified. By doing in this way, it is possible to execute the effect according to the preference of the player, and the effect of the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, the degree of expectation is suggested by the number of black stars in the degree of expectation suggestion display, and an expectation suggestion effect of gradually increasing the number of black stars is performed. May be executed to gradually reduce the number of displays that indicate the degree of expectation. Such an expectation suggestion effect may be executed in addition to or in place of the expectation effect effect of this embodiment.

(Other examples of development effects)
In the case of executing the expectation suggestion effect of gradually increasing the display indicating the expectation of the expectation suggestion display, the development effect may be executed after increasing the display indicating the expectation. In this case, when the display indicating the degree of expectation is increased after the development effect, the display to be increased may be displayed at a time instead of in a stepwise manner. For example, as shown in FIG. 13A, after the title of Super Reach D is announced and the effect of gradually increasing the number of black stars is completed, as shown in FIG. An extended effect in which the image 31AK031 is displayed is executed. Here, when the operation on the push button 31B is detected, as shown in FIG. The title of Reach C is announced. As described above, when the development effect is performed, the notification of the title of the reach of the development source is switched to the notification of the title of the reach of the development destination. Under the title 31AK032, the expectation degree suggestion indication 31AK033 having three black stars is highlighted. Even if the number of black stars increases by two or more, they are displayed at once. Note that, after the movable body 32 operates, a development effect in which the title and the expected degree suggestion display change may be executed.

(Preliminary production)
In this embodiment, a title announcement for announcing the jackpot reliability is executed as an announcement effect according to the title notification mode (for example, the display color of the title). For example, as shown in FIG. 14A, the title 31AK036 of Super Reach A is displayed in black, and a sound corresponding to the title of Reach is output from the speaker 8 to notify the title of Super Reach A. After that, as shown in FIG. 14B, a title notice in which the display color of the title 31AK036 changes to red is executed. As described above, when the title notice is not executed, the title is displayed in black, and when the title notice is executed, the title is displayed in a color other than black. In the title announcement shown in FIG. 14, the title display mode (display color) may change after the reach title is announced by voice. By doing so, the effect of the notice effect can be enhanced. The timing at which the title is displayed in a color other than black is not limited to this, and the title may be displayed in a color other than black from the start of the display of the title.

  When a title notice in which the title display mode (display color) changes is executed, a sound corresponding to the changed display mode may be output after the title display mode has changed. By doing so, the effect of the notice effect can be enhanced. The title notification by voice may be executed after the title display mode (display color) changes. In this case, a sound corresponding to the display mode (display color) of the title after the change may be output.

(Timing notification execution timing)
It is preferable that the notification of the title during the reach is executed at a timing other than the execution timing of an effect (specific effect) such as a notice effect or an advanced effect that increases the degree of expectation controlled in the jackpot advantageous state. By doing in this way, once the title is announced, an effect of improving the degree of expectation can be executed, so that the player's expectation can be maintained.

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an announcement effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute an announcement effect and an effect mode. The announcement effect determination process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process of step S171 in FIG. In the announcement effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern specified from the command transmitted from the main board 11 is a super-reach fluctuation pattern (step 31AKS001).

  If it is a super-reach variation pattern (step 31AKS001; Yes), the display color of the title of the super-reach (whether or not to execute the title notice) is determined (step 31AKS002).

  In step 31AKS002, the display color of the title of the super reach is determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16A, for example, according to whether the display result is "big hit" or "losing". As shown in FIG. 16A, the display color of the super reach title changes from “black”, “red”, “black” to “red”, and changes from “black” to “fruit pattern”. In addition, there are provided ones that change from “red” to “fruit pattern”, and the big hit reliability increases in this order (ascending order). That is, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the timing of change of the title display color. By doing so, the player pays attention to the timing of the change of the display color of the title, and the effect of the effect is improved.

  Note that the “fruit pattern” may be such that the title character is displayed in bold and the character itself is a “fruit pattern”, or the background portion of the title display area may be a “fruit pattern” . There may be a pattern displayed as a “fruit pattern” from the beginning. As for the display color that changes, the display color may change after the title notification is executed, as shown in FIG. As for the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be changed according to the timing at which the display color changes. Further, since the title display period varies depending on the type of super reach, the timing at which the display color changes depending on the type of super reach may be different. In the case of a super reach having a long title display period (for example, super reach D or super reach E), a plurality of changing timings may be provided, and the changing timing may be determined to any one. In the case of a super reach having a short title display period (for example, super reach A or super reach B), the number of changing timings may be one or a smaller number than a super reach having a long title display period.

  When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the title is determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16A in the normal mode, and the normal mode as shown in FIG. Determine the title display color at different rates. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode. As described above, by making the execution mode (display color and display color change timing) of the title notice different depending on the effect mode, the effect is diversified and the effect of the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a line notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed according to the character display mode (for example, the display color of the line) in the super reach reach effect.

  After the display color of the title of the super reach is determined, the display color of the words of the character in the reach attainment of the super reach (whether or not to execute a speech notice) is determined (step 31AKS003).

  In step 31AKS003, the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect is determined according to whether the display result is "big hit" or "losing", for example, at a determination ratio shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 16 (C), the display color of dialogue in the reach effect is changed from “white”, “red”, and “white” to “red”, and in this order (ascending order). The jackpot reliability is high. In other words, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the timing at which the display color of the dialogue changes. By doing so, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the dialogue, and the effect of the effect is improved. In the case where the display color changes, the display color may be changed after the words are displayed. As for the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be changed according to the timing at which the display color changes.

  The big hit reliability may be different depending on the combination of the presentation modes of the title notice and the speech notice. For example, in the case where the same announcement mode (display color) is included in the title announcement and the dialogue announcement, the big hit reliability may be increased when the same announcement mode is achieved. In addition, the big hit reliability may be made different by a combination of the timing of change of the presentation mode between the title notice and the speech notice. For example, when the change timing is the same, the jackpot reliability may be higher than when the change timings are different, or the jackpot reliability may be different depending on which change occurs first. By doing so, it is possible to pay attention to the respective change timings of the title notice and the dialogue notice.

  When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the dialogue may be determined at a different rate in the special mode from that in the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode.

  Note that, in place of the dialogue announcement, an announcement effect for notifying the jackpot reliability based on a change in the effect mode of the reach effect may be executed. In this case, in the notice effect, a plurality of change timings of the effect mode may be provided so that the big hit reliability differs according to the change timing.

  After the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect is determined, or when it is determined that the pattern is not a variation pattern of the super reach (step AK31S001; No), the presence or absence of other notice effects and the effect form are determined (step AK31S004). After that, the determination results in the 31AKS002 to 31AKS004 are stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (Step AK31S005), and the announcement effect determination processing ends.

  Note that in this embodiment, a title advance notice and a dialogue advance notice can be executed in the case of super reach. And at least one of the line announcement may be made executable. In addition, although the title announcement and the speech announcement have been described as being determined by the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16, the determination ratio is arbitrary, and the determination ratio may be changed according to the type of super reach, for example. By doing so, a notice effect can be executed according to the type of the reach, and the effect of the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, the number of executable effect modes (the number of display colors that can be displayed) differs between a title notice and a dialogue notice. By doing in this way, the effects can be varied and the effect of the effects can be enhanced. In the title notice and the dialogue notice, the number of executable effect modes may be arbitrarily changed, and the number and types of executable effect modes may be the same. By doing so, a notice effect with a sense of unity can be executed, and the player can easily grasp the jackpot reliability.

(Action effect)
When the presentation mode of the title notice and the dialogue of the dialogue change, an effect indicating that the presentation mode changes may be executed. For example, an action effect image may be displayed on the image display device 5 and the effect effect may be performed such that the image acts on at least one of a title and a line. Then, after the action effect is executed, the effect mode (display color) of the title or the line may be changed. The effect mode of the action effect (action effect image or the like) may be common to both the title and the line. It should be noted that there may be a case where the effect mode of the title or the dialogue does not change despite the execution of the action effect. In the case of executing the action effect, the presence / absence of execution of the effect effect, the execution timing, and the effect mode may be determined based on the determination result of the title notice and the dialogue notice. Such a determination may be performed in the process of step AK31S004. For example, the ratio at which at least one of the title announcement and the speech announcement changes in the effect mode (the rate at which the effect mode changes due to the action effect) may be different depending on the effect mode of the action effect. The ratio of the effect of the speech notice and that of which effect mode changes (the ratio of acting on which effect) may be different, or the ratio of the color (how many steps) it changes may be different. . By executing such an action effect, when the action effect image is displayed, the player pays attention to which of the title and the line is to be applied, and the effect is improved. When there are a plurality of effect modes, the presence or absence of the effect effect and the effect mode may be determined at different rates depending on the effect mode. By doing in this way, an action effect corresponding to the effect mode can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved.

  As another example of such an action effect, at least one effect mode (display color) of any of the title and the dialogue according to the effect content of the reach effect (for example, the effect content of the character motion or the battle effect). May be changed. In this way, the player pays attention to the content of the reach effect.

  The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the feature section 31AK, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, all of the features described in the above embodiments are not essential components, and can be omitted as appropriate.

(Sub LCD)
As a sub display device different from the image display device 5, a sub liquid crystal may be provided on the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3. Here, it is referred to as a sub liquid crystal, but the sub display device may be configured by an organic EL or a dot matrix LED. The sub liquid crystal device may be fixed, for example, in the vicinity of the image display device 5, or may be movable or housed. In the sub liquid crystal, various effects such as a notice effect and a display of a hold display are executed. For example, title notification may be executed in the sub liquid crystal. As in the case of the super reach D and the super reach E of the above-described embodiment, when the title is displayed continuously after the notification of the title, the display of the title and the degree of expectation may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal. In this case, the title and the degree of expectation suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal after the image display device 5 notifies the title. This makes it possible to display the title and the expected degree suggestion display without obstructing the super reach effect on the image display device 5, and the title and the expected degree suggestion display can be easily understood.

  In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to notification of a title of a reach effect as a suggestive effect has been described. However, the present invention is applied to title information (notice of mainly displaying characters) relating to other effects. You may. For example, as a notice effect (for example, a look-ahead notice effect), when performing a look-ahead zone effect of shifting to a plurality of zones (stage, effect mode, and the like) in which the background image and the effect mode on the image display device 5 are respectively different, the shifted zone The present invention may be applied to the title notification. When a mission (“Let's reach at 7”, “Use a stick controller to annihilate the enemy”, etc.) is presented, and a mission effect that is in a state advantageous to the player when the mission is completed is executed, The present invention may be applied to the notification of the title of a mission.

(Modification 1 of characteristic portion 31AK)
In the above-described embodiment, when it is time to derive the display result, a determined effect for notifying whether the display result is a “big hit” is executed, and thereafter, the display result is displayed ( FIG. 10 (B) to (D)). Instead of such a determined effect, at a predetermined timing before deriving the display result, an operation effect prompting the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is executed, and when a predetermined operation is detected during the operation valid period. The display result may be displayed by displaying the winning or losing of the battle effect or temporarily stopping the display result. By doing so, the display result is shown according to the operation of the player, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, and the interest can be improved.

  17 and 18 are diagrams illustrating an example of a super reach effect operation in a modification in which an operation effect is executed and a display result is displayed according to the operation. As shown in FIG. 17A, after reaching the reach mode in the image display device 5, for example, as shown in FIG. 17B, a character 31AK041 as a friend character and a character 31AK042 as an enemy character are displayed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 17 (C) to (F) and FIGS. 18 (G) to (I), a reach effect in which the character 31AK041 and the character 31AK042 confront each other is executed.

  With the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 17C, a small button image 31AK043 and a regulation line 31AK044 superimposed on the small button image 31AK043 are displayed at the lower right of the image display device 5. Thereby, an operation effect using the push button 31B is executed, but it is suggested that the reception of the operation is currently restricted.

  In this modification, a plurality of operation effect images indicating that an operation effect is to be executed are prepared. Then, the jackpot reliability differs depending on which operation effect image is displayed and the operation effect is executed. In addition, an image indicating that the operation effect is executed during the reach effect may change to a mode having higher reliability.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 17D, a praying character 31AK045 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 17E, the praying character 31AK045 changes to a happy character 31AK046, and the small button image 31AK043 becomes the large button image 31AK047. Changes to

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 18H, a cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 18I, an effect 31AK049 in which a bullet is fired from the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and a bullet hits the large button image 31AK047. The effect 31AK050 to be displayed is displayed. Then, the large button image 31AK047 changes to the stick image 31AK051.

  As described above, in this modification, when the operation effect image changes, the effect effect indicating that the operation effect image changes is executed. The operation effect image may change without accompanying the effect effect. Further, there may be a case where the operation effect image does not change even though the effect effect is executed. The rate at which the operation effect image changes may vary depending on the type of the effect effect.

  Thereafter, a predetermined time before the display result is derived, the regulation line 31AK044 is erased as shown in FIG. 18J, and the stick image 31AK051 is enlarged and displayed at the center as shown in FIG. 18K. Is displayed to prompt the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A. At this time, the operation on the stick controller 31A is an effective operation valid period.

  Here, when the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is detected, an image 31AK052 indicating that the ally character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. After that, at the timing when the fluctuation time ends, as shown in FIG. 18 (M), a fixed decoration symbol which is a big hit combination is derived. If no operation is detected within the predetermined operation validity period, the image shown in FIG. 18L is automatically displayed.

  In this modification, there are a small button image, a large button image, and a stick image as operation effect images, and an operation effect using these images in the order of small button image <large button image <stick image is performed. The jackpot reliability is high. Even when an operation effect image with low reliability is displayed, the operation effect image may change to a reliable operation effect image during the reach effect, so that the effect of the effect is improved and the player's sense of expectation is improved. Can be maintained.

  In the example of the rendering operation illustrated in FIGS. 17 and 18, the notification of the title of the reach and the indication of the degree of expectation are omitted. However, in parallel with the reach rendering and the operation rendering illustrated in FIGS. It may be executed. The determination of the operation effect and the operation effect image (whether or not there is an operation effect, the operation effect image to be displayed, whether or not there is an effect effect) may be executed in step 31AKS004 in FIG.

(Modification 2 of characteristic portion 31AK)
A suggestion indicating the expectation of control to an advantageous state such as a big hit game state may be displayed. For example, a shutter effect for performing the first suggestion display and a reach title effect for performing the second suggestion display may be executed. In the shutter effect, an effect of covering the screen with a shutter display after the start of the variable display is executed. In the reach title effect, after the reach, an effect of displaying a reach title indicating a development destination of the reach effect is executed. When displaying either the shutter display or the reach title display, a specific image may be included and displayed. The reach title effect may be the same as the title announcement in the above embodiment, or may be another effect determined by another process.

  The specific image is an image with a high jackpot reliability displayed including a plurality of types of elements in the image. The plural types of elements include a banana image of the element E1, a melon image of the element E2, an apple image of the element E3, a watermelon image of the element E4, and a strawberry image of the element E5. The fruit pattern image including these elements E1 to E5 is a specific image. In both the shutter display and the reach title display, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to be visible. The display sizes of the elements E1 to E5 constituting the specific image are changed and displayed according to the difference in display size between the shutter display and the reach title display. In addition, all the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to fit in the shutter display and the reach title display, respectively.

  When the shutter effect is executed after the start of the variable display, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the big hit reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. In addition, when a reach title is displayed during execution of the reach effect, when a fruit pattern image is displayed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. When the fruit pattern is not displayed, for example, a plain image that does not include the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Note that an image pattern other than the fruit pattern image may be prepared as an image indicating the jackpot reliability when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. For example, a white image <a blue image <a red image <a fruit pattern image may be prepared in the order of the jackpot reliability (for example, a red shutter or a red title reach title). Then, one of the image patterns may be selected by a predetermined random number lottery depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit.

  When performing the shutter display and the reach title display, even when a fruit pattern is displayed, the speaker 8 outputs a notification of outputting a common sound (melody) and also notifies the game effect lamp 9 of light emission. The common sound and the emission control of the game effect lamp 9 indicate to the player that the fruit pattern is a special image. When such a shutter display and a reach title display are performed, common notification for the fruit pattern is executed. In the reach title display, a specific sound (voice) is further output after the common notification. Note that the output period of the common sound and the specific sound may partially overlap.

  FIG. 19 is a display screen diagram when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. As shown in FIG. 19A, when the shutter effect is performed, the shutter image 31AK061 is displayed on the image display device 5 at the start of the variable display. On the shutter image 31AK061, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. In addition, when the shutter effect is performed, the notification that the common sound (melody) is output by the speaker 8 is performed and the notification by the emission of the game effect lamp 9 is performed. When the closed shutter is opened, as shown in FIG. 19B, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Downward arrows indicate variable display of left, middle, and right symbols. When the variable display of the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 19D, a super reach effect is started. The variable display is, for example, displayed small in the upper right of the screen, and a character is displayed on the left side of the screen. At the lower right of the screen, a reach title image 31AK062 is displayed, and the contents of the super reach to be executed are shown as reach title display. In the reach title image 31AK062, a fruit pattern image including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. In the reach title image 31AK062, the characters "Battle Reach" indicating that a reach effect accompanied by a battle effect is executed are displayed.

  In addition, when the reach title effect is executed, the notification that the common sound (melody) is output by the speaker 8 is executed and the notification by the emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. Further, after outputting the common sound, an effect is executed in which the character emits a specific sound (voice) indicating that the hit reliability is high, such as "hot hot". Here, in the reach title effect, the size of the suggestion display to be displayed is smaller than in the shutter effect. However, in this way, in the reach title effect, by outputting the specific sound, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the fruit pattern image is displayed. Although the case where the common sound and the specific sound have completely separated output periods has been described, the output periods may partially overlap.

  Thereafter, a battle reach effect as shown in FIG. 19 (e) is executed. An enemy character is displayed on the left side of the screen, and an ally character is displayed on the right side of the screen. When the ally character wins the battle with the enemy character, the character “BATTLE WIN!” Is displayed at the upper left of the screen. It is announced that the jackpot has been confirmed by winning the battle. When the battle effect ends, the display returns to the variable display screen using the original numeric symbols. As shown in FIG. 19 (f), all the symbols stop and the big hit symbol of “777” is displayed.

  As shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D, both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 are displayed including all the elements E1 to E5 constituting the fruit pattern image. In this way, the fruit pattern image can be suitably displayed in both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 having different display sizes. Thereby, it is possible to accurately convey that the fruit pattern image with a high jackpot reliability is displayed.

  The display size of the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 19A is larger than the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 19D. Therefore, the difference between the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 and the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 can be noticed.

  The shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 19A and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 19D are displayed at different timings. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the fruit pattern image, which is the specific image, from being difficult to see due to the overlapping of the execution timings.

  The determination relating to the shutter effect (the presence or absence of the shutter effect and the effect mode) may be executed in step 31AKS004 in FIG. In that case, the determination regarding the shutter effect may be made based on the determination result of the display color of the title in step 31AKS002 in FIG. For example, when it is determined that the display color of the title is a fruit pattern, the shutter effect of the fruit pattern may be easily executed. In addition, the determination regarding the reach title effect may be executed in step 31AKS004 in FIG. 15 together with the determination regarding the shutter effect.

(Explanation about the characteristic part 105IW)
Next, the characteristic portion 105IW of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 20A is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the characteristic portion 105IW. In the characteristic portion 105IW, as shown in FIG. 20A, a passage gate 105IW041 is provided on the right of the image display device 5 (to the right of the game area) instead of the passage gate 41 shown in FIG. . Further, instead of the special variable winning ball device 7 shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 105IW007 having a large winning port is provided on the right side of the game area. Further, in the characteristic portion 105IW, as shown in FIG. 20A, an operation gate 105IW001 is provided on the right side of the game area. A game ball that has passed through the operation gate 105IW001 is detected by the operation gate switch 105IW002.

  In the characteristic portion 105IW, when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed in the special symbol stop process (step S113), the process does not immediately shift to the big hit opening pre-process (step S114) but shifts to the gate passing waiting process.

  FIG. 20B is a flowchart illustrating the gate passage waiting process. In the gate passage waiting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first checks whether or not the activation gate switch 105IW002 is turned on (step 105IWS001). If the operation gate switch 105IW002 has not been turned on (that is, if the game ball has not passed through the operation gate 105IW001), the process is terminated. If the operation gate switch 105IW002 is in the ON state (that is, if the game ball passes through the operation gate 105IW001), the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a jackpot start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 ( Step 105 IWS002). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the pre-big hit start processing (step 105IWS003).

  By executing the gate passage waiting process shown in FIG. 20-2, in the characteristic portion 105IW, the jackpot game state is not immediately started when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, but the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. After that, the big hit game state is started based on the game ball passing through the operation gate 105IW001. In the characteristic portion 105IW, the processing of step 105IWS002 is executed, so that the effect control CPU 120 recognizes that the game ball has passed the operation gate 105IW001 based on the reception of the big hit start command. It is possible to recognize that the big hit gaming state is started.

  In the characteristic portion 105IW, a state before the game ball passes through the operation gate 105IW001 after the big hit symbol is derived and displayed is also referred to as a gate passage waiting state.

  FIG. 20C is a flowchart illustrating the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process process illustrated in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first reads a fluctuation pattern command from a fluctuation pattern command storage area (an area in which a received fluctuation pattern command (effect control command for establishing a fluctuation pattern) is stored) ( Step 105 IWS101). Next, effect control CPU 120 determines whether the fluctuation pattern command read in step 105 IWS 101 and the display result designation command storage area (the received display result designation command (display result (normal jackpot, probable big hit, sudden probable big hit, small hit or small hit) ) Is determined according to the data (that is, the received display result designation command) stored in the area in which the effect control command designating ()) is specified (step 105IWS102). . That is, when the processing of step 105 IWS 102 is executed by the effect control CPU 120, the display result (variable pattern stop) of the variable display of the identification information is displayed in accordance with the variable display pattern (variable pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determining means. A display result determining means for determining the symbol is realized. If a pseudo run is specified by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 120 determines in step 105 IWS 102 that the temporary stop symbol of the pseudo run is a chance symbol (such as “223” or “445”). , A combination of a big hit symbol and a symbol that is not one of the reach but is shifted by one symbol) is also determined. The effect control CPU 120 stores data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. In step 105 IWS102, the effect control CPU 120 may determine whether or not a big hit is based on the received variation pattern command, and determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on only the variation pattern command. .

  In step 105 IWS 102, when the received display result designation command indicates “normal jackpot”, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the three symbols are the same even symbols as stop symbols. Determine the combination. When the received display result designation command indicates “probable change big hit”, the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative symbols in which three symbols are the same odd-numbered symbols as stop symbols.

  When the received display result designation command indicates “suddenly changing big hit” or “small hit”, the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative symbols such as “135” as the stop symbol. In the case of "missing", a combination of decorative symbols other than the above is determined. However, when a reach effect is involved, a combination of two decorative symbols on the left and right is determined. Also, the combination of the three symbols derived and displayed on the image display device 5 is the “stop symbol” of the decorative symbol.

  The effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other, to determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. decide. That is, a stop symbol is determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to a numerical value matching the extracted random number.

  In addition, also about the decoration symbol, a stop symbol (a combination of symbols in which the left and right sides are all the same symbol) that reminds of a big hit is called a big hit symbol. In addition, a stop symbol that recalls a loss is called a loss symbol. In addition, a symbol (an odd symbol in the characteristic portion 105IW) that reminds the user to be in a probable variation state is also called a probability variation symbol, and a symbol (an even number symbol in the characteristic portion 105IW) that reminds the user not to enter the probable variation state is a non-probable variation symbol. Also called.

  In the characteristic portion 105IW, when a normal big hit or a probable big hit is made, there is a case where the game is controlled to the 16 round big hit game state and a case where it is controlled to the 4 round big hit game state.

  Next, effect control CPU 120 determines the presence or absence and the type of a notice effect to be performed during the variation display of the decorative symbol (step 105 IWS103). In step 105IWS103, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using a preview effect determination table for determining the presence / absence and type of the advance effect, and determines the presence / absence and type of the advance effect.

  FIG. 20D is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the announcement effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 20-4, in the preview effect determination table, determination values are assigned to no preview effect, preview effect A, preview effect B, and preview effect C, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 20-4, in the characteristic portion 105IW, the notice effects A to C have different timings to be executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. Specifically, the announcement effect A is an announcement effect that is executed during the high-speed fluctuation during the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol. In addition, the announcement effect B is an announcement effect that is executed when the reach is established during the change display of the decorative symbol. The announcement effect C is an announcement effect that is executed after the reach is established during the change display of the decorative symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 20-4, in the characteristic portion 105IW, the expectation (reliability) for the big hit is the highest when the notice effect C is executed, and the expectation for the next big hit is executed when the notice effect B is executed. The degree (reliability) is high, and when the notice effect A is executed, the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big hit is low. Therefore, the characteristic portion 105IW is configured such that the expected effect (reliability) for the big hit increases as the notice effect at a later timing is executed.

  As specific examples of the notice effects A to C, various notice effects such as a step-up notice effect, a group notice effect, a character notice effect, and an accessory notice effect can be considered. Also, in the characteristic portion 105IW, a case where three kinds of notice effects A to C are executed has been described, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, four or more notice effects may be configured to be executable, or conversely, only two notice effects may be configured to be executable.

  Also, in the characteristic portion 105IW, as shown in FIG. 20-4, a case is shown in which the presence or absence of a notice effect and the assignment of any of the notice effects A to C are made different depending on whether or not a big hit occurs. It is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the presence / absence of the reach and the type of reach, the presence / absence of the pseudo run, the type of the pseudo run, and the number of the pseudo run, and the allocation of whether or not to use the preview effects A to C are made different depending on the number of the pseudo runs. Is also good.

  When it is determined to execute any of the announcement effects (Y in Step 105 IWS 104), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the notification effect (Step 105 IWS 105). The “notification effect” is an effect that notifies a period before the notice effect is executed before the notice effect is executed. In step 105 IWS 105, effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on random numbers using an information effect determination table for determining whether or not to execute an information effect, and determines whether to execute an information effect. .

  FIG. 20E is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the notification effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 20-5, in the notification effect determination table, determination values are assigned to “no notification effect” and “notification effect”. As shown in FIG. 20-5, in the characteristic portion 105IW, even when the same announcement effect is executed, when the notification effect is executed, the big hit is obtained as compared with the case where the notification effect is not executed. The degree of expectation (reliability) for is high.

  In addition, in the characteristic part 105IW, as shown in FIG. 20-5, the case where the allocation of the presence / absence of the notification effect is made different depending on whether the hit is a big hit or not is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured such that the allocation of the presence or absence of the notification effect is made different depending on which of the notice effects A to C.

  When it is determined that the notification effect is to be executed (Y in Step 105 IWS 106), the effect control CPU 120 determines a notification period to be notified before the execution of the notice effect (Step 105 IWS 107). In step 105IWS107, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the notification period determination table for determining the notification period, and determines the notification period.

  FIG. 20-6 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the notification period determination table. Among them, FIG. 20-6 (A) shows a specific example of the notification period determination table used when executing the notice effect A. FIG. 20-6 (B) shows a specific example of a notification period determination table used when executing notice effect B. FIG. 20-6 (C) shows a specific example of a notification period determination table used when executing notice effect C. As shown in FIG. 20-6, in the notification period determination table, determination values are assigned to “10 seconds”, “20 seconds”, and “30 seconds” as notification periods.

  The feature unit 105IW is configured to execute a notification effect for notifying a period until the notice effect is executed before the notice effect is executed. For example, when "10 seconds" is determined as the notification period, a character display such as "? 10 seconds later" is displayed on the image display device 5 as the notification display 10 seconds before the announcement effect is executed. Accordingly, it is notified that the notice effect is executed after 10 seconds. Further, for example, when “20 seconds” is determined as the notification period, a character display such as “? 20 seconds later” is displayed as a notification display on the image display device 5 20 seconds before the notice effect is executed. By doing so, it is notified that the notice effect is executed after 20 seconds. Further, for example, when "30 seconds" is determined as the notification period, a character display such as "? 30 seconds later" is displayed on the image display device 5 as the notification display 30 seconds before the announcement effect is executed. By doing so, it is notified that the notice effect is executed after 30 seconds.

  Note that the notification mode in the notification effect is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, when “20 seconds” is determined as the notification period, the image display device 5 may additionally notify “+10 seconds” after notifying “10 seconds later?”. Further, for example, when “30 seconds” is determined as the notification period, the image display device 5 may further notify “+10 seconds” or “+20 seconds” after reporting “10 seconds later?”. It may be.

  As shown in FIG. 20-6 (A), when performing the notice effect A, “10 seconds” is determined with a 100% probability as the notification period. As described above, since the notice effect A is a notice effect performed during the high-speed change immediately after the start of the change of the decorative symbol, the notice effect is executed, and the notice period is notified and the notice effect is executed. Long periods cannot be secured. Therefore, when the notice effect A executed during the high-speed fluctuation is executed, the notice effect in which "10 seconds" is indicated as the notice period is uniformly executed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 20-6 (B), when the notice effect B is executed, “10 seconds” and “20 seconds” can be determined as the notification period. As described above, the notice effect B is a notice effect performed when the reach is established. Therefore, when compared with the notice effect A, the notice effect B is longer from the time when the notice effect is executed to notify the notice period to the time when the notice effect is executed. A period can be secured. Therefore, in the case of executing the announcement effect B executed when the reach is established, it is configured such that the announcement effect of notifying "10 seconds" and the notification effect of notifying of "20 seconds" can be executed as the notification period. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 20-6 (B), when the notice effect B is executed, the case where “20 seconds” is notified as the notification period is the case where “10 seconds” is notified as the notification period. The degree of expectation (reliability) for the big hit is higher than that of the big hit. Therefore, the characteristic portion 105IW is configured such that the longer the notification period is notified, the higher the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big hit is.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 20-6 (C), when executing the notice effect C, “10 seconds”, “20 seconds”, and “30 seconds” can be determined as the notification period. As described above, the notice effect C is a notice effect performed after the reach is established. Therefore, when compared with the notice effect A and the notice effect B, the notice effect is executed, the notice period is notified, and then the notice effect is executed. Can be secured for a long period of time. Therefore, when the notice effect C to be executed when the reach is established is performed, an information effect for notifying “10 seconds”, an information effect for notifying “20 seconds”, and an information effect for notifying “30 seconds” are set as the notification period. Are configured to be executable.

  As shown in FIG. 20-6 (C), when the notice effect C is executed, when “30 seconds” is notified as the notification period, the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big hit is highest, and “20 seconds”. Is reported, the expectation (reliability) for the next big hit is the highest, and when "10 seconds" is reported, the expectation (reliability) for the big hit is the lowest. Therefore, the characteristic portion 105IW is configured such that the longer the notification period is notified, the higher the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big hit is.

  In the characteristic portion 105IW, as described above, the degree of expectation (reliability) with respect to the big hit increases as the notice effect at a later timing is executed (see FIG. 20-4). The longer the notice effect is performed at a later timing, the longer the notice period is notified.

  Further, the characteristic portion 105IW shows a case where three types of periods of “10 seconds”, “20 seconds”, and “30 seconds” are notified as the notification period, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, four or more types of notification periods may be configured to be notified, or conversely, only two types of notification periods may be configured to be notified.

  Also, in the characteristic portion 105IW, as shown in FIG. 20-6, a case is shown in which the type of the notification period is differently assigned depending on whether or not a big hit has occurred. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the allocation of the type of the notification period is made different depending on whether or not there is a reach, the type of the reach, the presence or absence of the pseudo-run, the type of the pseudo-run, the number of the pseudo-runs, or any of the announcement effects A to C. Is also good.

  Next, effect control CPU 120 determines the notification mode of the notification period (step 105 IWS 108). At step 105 IWS 108, effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using a notification mode determination table for determining the notification mode, and determines the notification mode.

  FIG. 20C is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the notification mode determination table. As shown in FIG. 20-7, in the notification mode determination table, determination values are respectively assigned to “rectangular display”, “elliptical display”, and “diamond display” as the notification modes.

  When the “rectangular display” is determined as the notification mode, the notification effect is executed by, for example, displaying a character display such as “After 10 seconds?” In the rectangular display as the notification display. When “elliptical display” is determined as the notification mode, for example, the notification effect is executed in such a manner that a character display such as “after 10 seconds?” Is displayed as the notification display in the elliptical display. When “diamond display” is determined as the notification mode, the notification effect is executed in a mode in which, for example, a character display such as “after 10 seconds?” Is displayed as the notification display in the diamond display.

  As shown in FIG. 20-7, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot is the highest when the rhombus display is determined as the notification mode, and the expectation degree (the reliability) for the next big hit is determined when the ellipse display is determined as the notification mode. The reliability (reliability) is high, and the expectation (reliability) for the big hit is low when rectangular display is determined as the notification mode.

  Next, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a numerical effect (step 105 IWS 109). The “numerical effect” is an effect that is performed using a number or a numerical value after the notification effect is executed and the notification period is notified, and before the notice period is executed after the notification period elapses. In step 105IWS109, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on random numbers using a numerical effect determination table for determining whether or not to execute a numerical effect, and determines whether to execute a numerical effect. .

  FIG. 20-8 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the numerical value effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 20-8, in the numerical effect determination table, determination values are assigned to “no numerical effect” and “with numerical effect”. As shown in FIG. 20-8, in the characteristic portion 105IW, the expectation (reliability) for the big hit is higher when the numerical effect is executed than when the numerical effect is not executed.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 105IW, as shown in FIG. 20-8, a case is shown in which the assignment of the presence or absence of the numerical effect is made different depending on whether or not a big hit is made, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, it is configured such that the allocation of the presence or absence of the numerical effect is made different depending on whether or not there is a reach, the type of the reach, the presence or absence of the pseudo run, the type of the pseudo run, the number of the pseudo run, and any of the announcement effects A to C. Is also good.

  Further, for example, the allocation of the presence / absence of the numerical effect may be made different depending on the type of the notification period (“10 seconds”, “20 seconds”, “30 seconds”). Further, for example, when a plurality of types of numerical value effects are configured to be executable, different types of numerical value effects may be easily executed depending on the type of the notification period. For example, when the notification period is “10 seconds”, the numerical effect A executed at an earlier timing is easy to execute, and when the notification period is “30 seconds”, the numerical effect A is executed at a later timing. B may not be executed. In addition, for example, when the notification period is short, “10 seconds”, it is easy to execute the numerical effect α in which numbers are displayed one after another at a fast interval, and when the notification period is long, “30 seconds”, it is slow. It may be configured not to execute the numerical effect β in which the numbers are displayed one after another at intervals.

  Further, for example, the range of the numbers appearing in the numerical effect may be configured to be different depending on the type of the notification period. Further, for example, the presence / absence of a numerical effect and the assignment of the type of the numerical effect may be made different depending on the notification mode of the notification effect (rectangular display, elliptical display, diamond display).

  Next, effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the fluctuation pattern (step 105 IWS110). Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step 105 IWS111).

  The process table is a table in which process data to be referred to when the effect control CPU 120 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect devices (effect components) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table includes data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. The display control execution data describes data and the like indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variable time) of the variable display of the decorative symbol. Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. The process timer set value is set with a change time in the form of the change. The effect control CPU 120 refers to the process table and performs control for displaying the decorative symbol in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value. The process table is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. A process table is prepared for each variation pattern.

  In addition, in the process table used when effect control is executed for a variation pattern with reach effect, the left symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation, and the right symbol is stopped when a predetermined time further elapses. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the symbols is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbol, the temporary stop symbol in the pseudo-ream and the sliding effect. May be.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (the image display device 5 as effect component, the effect component) in accordance with the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). The control of the various lamps and the speakers 8L and 8R as effect parts is executed (step 105 IWS112). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 to cause the image display device 5 to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14 in order to control the turning on / off of various lamps. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound control board 13 to output sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R.

  In the characteristic portion 105IW, the effect control CPU 120 performs control such that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the change pattern corresponding to the change pattern command on a one-to-one basis. May be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to.

  In the characteristic portion 105IW, a super reach effect or a story reach effect (a reach effect for displaying an image in which a series of stories unfolds) is executed during the change display of the decorative pattern. If the variation pattern including the super-reach effect is specified in the command, a process table including the super-reach effect is selected in step 105 IWS 110, and the processes of step 105 IWS 112 and step 105 IWS 205 described later are executed according to the selected process table. Thus, the super reach effect is executed during the variation display of the decorative symbol.

  If the variation pattern including the story reach effect is specified in the variation pattern command, the process table including the story reach effect is selected in step 105 IWS 110, and the process table in step 105 IWS 112 and step 105 IWS 205 described later is selected according to the selected process table. By performing the process, the story reach effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol.

  As described above, in the characteristic portion 105IW, there are a case where the game is controlled to the 16-bit jackpot game state and a case where the game is controlled to the 4-round big jackpot game state. And when the game is controlled to the big hit game state of 16 rounds and in the case of being controlled to the big hit game state of 4 rounds when the big hit occurs There is. On the other hand, the story reach effect can be executed in the case of a loss, and in the case of a big hit, it may be executed only when the game is controlled to a 16-round big hit game state. , The story reach effect is not executed.

  Next, effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step 105IWS113).

  Then, effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (step S172) (step 105IWS114).

  FIG. 20-9 is a flowchart illustrating the variable display effect processing (step S172) in the effect control process processing illustrated in FIG. 7. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first decrements the value of the process timer by 1 (step 105IWS201) and decrements the value of the variable time timer by 1 (step 105IWS202). When the process timer times out (step 105 IWS203), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer set value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step 105 IWS204). Further, the control state of the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, and the sound number data set next (step 105 IWS 205).

  Next, effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the execution of the notification effect has been determined, and whether or not the notification start timing of the notification period has come (step 105IWS206). Whether or not the notification start timing of the notification period has come can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the variable time timer set in step 105 IWS113. If the notification start timing of the notification period has come, the effect control CPU 120 displays a notification display of the notification period on the image display device 5 and performs control to start the notification effect (step 105IWS207). For example, if "10 seconds" is determined as the notification period and rectangular display is determined as the notification mode, a notification display including the character display "? 10 seconds later" is displayed in the rectangular display. Further, for example, if the notification period is determined to be “30 seconds” and the notification mode is determined to be a diamond display, a notification display including the character display “30 seconds later?” Is displayed in the diamond display.

  Then, effect control CPU 120 sets a notification period measurement timer for measuring the remaining time of the notification period (step 105IWS208). For example, if the notification period is determined to be “10 seconds”, a value corresponding to 10 seconds is set to the notification period measurement timer in step 105 IWS208. Further, for example, if the notification period is determined to be “20 seconds”, a value corresponding to 20 seconds is set to the notification period measurement timer in step 105 IWS208. Also, for example, if the notification period is determined to be “30 seconds”, a value corresponding to 30 seconds is set to the notification period measurement timer in step 105 IWS208.

  Next, effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the execution of the notification effect has been determined, and whether or not the notification end timing of the notification period has been reached (step 105IWS209). Note that whether or not the notification end timing of the notification period is reached can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the variable time timer set in step 105 IWS113. If the notification end timing of the notification period has come, the effect control CPU 120 erases the notification display of the notification period displayed on the image display device 5 and performs control to end the notification effect (step 105IWS210).

  Next, effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the execution of the numerical effect has been determined, and whether or not it is time to execute the numerical effect (step 105IWS211). Whether or not it is the execution timing of the numerical effect can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the variable time timer set in step 105 IWS113. Note that the execution timing of the numerical value effect comes after the notification effect is performed and before the notice effect is performed. If it is time to execute a numerical effect, the effect control CPU 120 performs control for executing a numerical effect on the image display device 5 (step 105IWS212).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the notification period measurement timer has a value corresponding to the remaining 3 seconds, 2 seconds, or 1 second after the execution of the notification effect (step 105IWS213). . If the value of the notification period measurement timer is a value corresponding to the remaining 3 seconds, 2 seconds or 1 second (that is, if the remaining time of the notification period is 3 seconds, 2 seconds or 1 second), the effect is produced. The control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display the remaining time display according to the remaining time of the notification period (step 105IWS214). For example, if the remaining time is 3 seconds, a character display of "3 seconds remaining" is displayed as the remaining time display. For example, if the remaining time is 2 seconds, a character display of "2 seconds remaining" is displayed as the remaining time display. For example, if the remaining time is one second, a character display of "one second remaining" is displayed as the remaining time display.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the notification period measurement timer has timed out after the execution of the notification effect (step 105IWS215). If the notification period measurement timer has timed out, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to execute a notice effect on the image display device 5 (step 105IWS216). For example, when the execution of the notice effect A is determined, the notice effect A is executed. When the execution of the notice effect B is determined, the notice effect B is executed, and when the execution of the notice effect C is decided. If there is, notice effect C is executed.

  In addition, in the characteristic portion 105IW, it may be determined that the notification effect is not executed when the notice effect is executed. However, when the notification effect is not executed, for example, the variable time timer set in step 105IWS113 is used. By confirming the value, the execution timing of the notice effect A during the high-speed fluctuation, the execution time of the notice effect B when the reach is established, the execution timing of the notice effect C after the reach is established, What is necessary is just to determine whether it is set, and to perform the notice effects A to C.

  Then, if the fluctuation time timer has timed out (step 105 IWS 217), effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the wait process per special figure (step S 173) (step 105 IWS 218).

  FIG. 20-10 is a flowchart showing the special figure hit waiting processing (step S173) in the effect control process processing shown in FIG. In the special figure waiting process, first, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to stop and display the determined stop symbol (missing symbol, big hit symbol, small hit symbol) (step 105IWS301).

  When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step 105IWS301 (Y in step 105IWS302), the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the story reach effect has been executed in the variable display to be ended this time (step 105IWS303). Whether or not the story reach effect has been executed can be determined, for example, by confirming the variation pattern command stored in the variation pattern command storage area. If the story reach effect has been executed, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the gate-passing effect including the end effect (step 105IWS304).

  "End effect" is an effect that displays an image corresponding to the end portion of the story in the story reach effect. By executing the processing of steps 105 IWS 312 and 105 IWS 404 described later according to the process table selected in step 105 IWS 304, the end effect is executed in the gate passing waiting state, and the story reach effect in the display of the variation of the decorative symbol is changed to the gate passing waiting state. The production of a series of stories is performed over the middle ending production.

  Next, effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the game is in the high base state (step 105 IWS 305). Whether or not the game is in the high base state can be determined, for example, by confirming an effect control command that can specify the game state received from the game control microcomputer 100. For example, when the background designation command for designating the background screen of the image display device 5 is configured so that the game state can also be specified (for example, the probable change state background specification command for specifying the probable change state, the time reduction state background specification for specifying the time reduction state). Command, a normal state background designating command capable of specifying a normal state), a probable change state background designating command, or a time saving state background designating command, it may be determined to be in the high base state. .

  If it is in the high base state, the process proceeds to step 105 IWS311. If it is not in the high base state (that is, if it is in the low base state), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to superimpose and display a caution display on the image display device 5 (step 105IWS306). For example, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to superimpose and display a character display such as “(attention) the movie ends at the gate” on the image display device 5. Then, control goes to a step 105 IWS311.

  In the characteristic portion 105IW, as described above, the end effect for the story reach effect is executed in the gate passage waiting state. It is configured to end the production. Therefore, if the game ball is quickly passed through the operation gate 105IWS001 in the low base state, the end effect ends on the way and cannot be watched to the end. Therefore, in the low base state, the processing of step 105 IWS 306 is executed to display a caution display, and if the game ball is quickly passed through the operation gate 105 IWS 001, the ending effect ends in the middle. This is so that the player can pay attention.

  If the story reach effect has not been executed, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the super reach effect has been executed with the variable display ended this time (step 105 IWS307). Whether or not the super reach effect has been executed can be determined, for example, by confirming the variation pattern command stored in the variation pattern command storage area. If a super-reach effect has been executed, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to a gate-passing effect including a promotion display (step 105IWS308). The “promotion display” is a display that prompts the user to perform a shooting operation aiming to the right of the game area so that the game ball passes through the operation gate 105IW001. For example, a character display such as “right-handed” is superimposed and displayed on the image display device 5 as the promotion display.

  Further, effect control CPU 120 sets a gate passage waiting time measurement timer for measuring an elapsed time from the gate passage waiting state (step 105IWS309). In this example, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 10 seconds in the gate passage waiting time measurement timer. Then, control goes to a step 105 IWS311.

  Even if the super-reach effect has not been executed (for example, if a large hit has occurred only in the normal reach), the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to a normal gate passage waiting effect (step 105 IWS 310). In addition, as a normal gate passage waiting effect, for example, the promotion display may be performed in the same manner as when the super reach effect is performed, or the display size may be smaller than when the super reach effect is performed. A small promotion display (for example, a right-handed display with a small display size) may be performed. Then, control goes to a step 105 IWS311.

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value to the process timer (step 105 IWS 311), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number) In accordance with the data 1), the control of the rendering device (the rendering display device 9 as the rendering component, the various lamps as the rendering component, and the speaker 27 as the rendering component) is executed (step 105IWS312).

  Next, if the large hit symbol is derived and displayed (Y in step 105IWS313), the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the gate passage waiting effect process (step 105IWS314). On the other hand, if the large hit symbol is not derived and displayed (N in step 105 IWS 313), that is, if the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, the effect control CPU 120 changes the value of the rendering control process flag to the small hit medium effect. The value is updated to a value according to the processing (step 105 IWS 315).

  When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step 105IWS301 (Y in step 105IWS316), the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the small hit medium effect (step 105IWS317). Then, control goes to a step 105 IWS311.

  When it is determined that neither the big hit nor the small hit is performed (N in step 105IW316), the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value according to the variable display start waiting process (step S170). (Step 105 IWS 318).

  Also, in the characteristic portion 105IW, when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed in the special figure waiting process (step S173), the process does not immediately shift to the big hit middle rendering process (step S176), but shifts to the gate passage waiting rendering process. I do.

  FIG. 20-11 and FIG. 20-12 are flowcharts showing the gate passing waiting effect processing. In the gate passage waiting effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 105 IWS401). When the process timer times out (step 105 IWS402), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer set value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step 105 IWS403). Further, the control state of the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, and the sound number data which are set next (step 105IWS404).

  Next, effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not a jackpot start designation command has been received (step 105 IWS405). If the jackpot start designation command has been received (that is, if the game ball has passed through the operation gate 105IW001), the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the story reach effect has been executed with the variable display ended this time. (Step 105 IWS406). Whether or not the story reach effect has been executed can be determined, for example, by confirming the variation pattern command stored in the variation pattern command storage area.

  If the story reach effect has been executed, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the game is in the high base state (step 105IWS407). Whether or not the game is in the high base state can be determined, for example, by confirming an effect control command that can specify the game state received from the game control microcomputer 100. For example, when the background designation command for designating the background screen of the image display device 5 is configured so that the game state can also be specified (for example, the probable change state background specification command for specifying the probable change state, the time reduction state background specification for specifying the time reduction state). Command, a normal state background designating command capable of specifying a normal state), a probable change state background designating command, or a time saving state background designating command, it may be determined to be in the high base state. .

  If it is in the high base state, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the big hit effect including the end effect (step 105IWS408). If it is not in the high base state (that is, if it is in the low base state), a process table corresponding to a normal big hit medium effect is selected (step 105IWS409). Then, control goes to a step 105 IWS 413.

  By executing the processing of steps 105 IWS 406 to S 409, in the characteristic portion 105 IW, the end effect is continued even if the game ball passes through the operation gate 105 IWS 001 and shifts to the big hit game state while in the high base state. Executed. On the other hand, if it is in the low base state, the end effect is ended based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the operation gate 105IWS001.

  In the characteristic portion 105IW, by executing the processing of steps 105IWS407 to S409, whether to end or continue the ending effect triggered by the passage of the game ball through the operation gate 105IWS001 depending on whether or not the base state is high. Is changed, and whether or not the caution display is displayed according to whether or not the high base state is performed by performing the processing of steps 105 IWS 305 to S306 is different, while whether or not the high base state is set. Irrespective of whether or not, the story reach production itself is the same, but the present invention is not limited to such a case. For example, a different story reach effect may be executed between the high base state and the low base state. In this case, for example, in the case of the high base state and the case of the low base state, the position as the reach is the same story reach production, but the production contents of the story reach production are different (for example, different story reach). (Or the effect of the effect content), or the fluctuating time (for example, reach effect period) may be changed.

  If the story reach effect has not been executed, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the super reach effect has been executed with the variable display ended this time (step 105IWS410). Whether or not the super reach effect has been executed can be determined, for example, by confirming the variation pattern command stored in the variation pattern command storage area. If the super-reach effect has been executed, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a large hit effect including a roulette effect according to the jackpot type (in this example, whether the hit is 16 rounds or 4 rounds) is made. A corresponding process table is selected (step 105 IWS411). Then, control goes to a step 105 IWS 413.

  By executing the processing of steps 105IWS410 to S411, in the characteristic portion 105IW, after the super reach effect is executed and the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, the game ball passes through the operation gate 105IW001 to start the big hit game. Sometimes, when a roulette effect is executed and an effect is performed to inspire a 16 round or 4 round jackpot, and if the final 16 round jackpot is reached, it must be a 16 round jackpot Is reported, and if it is a 4-round jackpot, it is reported that the round is a 4-round jackpot.

  Even if the super-reach effect is not executed (for example, if a big hit is caused only by the normal reach), the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to a normal medium-sized hit effect (step 105IWS412). Then, control goes to a step 105 IWS 413.

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value to the process timer (step 105 IWS 413), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number) According to the data 1), the control of the rendering device (the rendering display device 9 as the rendering component, the various lamps as the rendering component, and the speaker 27 as the rendering component) is executed (step 105IWS414).

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect processing during the big hit (step 105IWS415).

  If the jackpot start designation command has not been received in step 105IWS405 (that is, if the game ball has not yet passed through the operation gate 105IW001), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the value of the gate passage waiting time measurement timer is 0. It is confirmed whether or not it is (step 105 IWS416). If the value of the gate passage waiting time measurement timer is not 0, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the gate passage waiting time measurement timer (step 105 IWS417), and the value of the gate passage waiting time measurement timer after the subtraction becomes 0. (Step 105 IWS418).

  If the value of the gate passage waiting time measurement timer after the subtraction is 0, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the jackpot type is a jackpot of 16 rounds (step 105IWS419). Whether or not the jackpot type is a 16-round jackpot is determined, for example, by checking whether or not the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area specifies a 16-round jackpot. Can be determined.

  If it is a 16-round big hit, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a 16R big-hit notification effect for notifying that it is a 16-round big hit (step 105IWS420). In step 105IWS420, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using a 16R jackpot notification effect determination table for determining whether to execute the 16R jackpot notification effect, and executes the 16R jackpot notification effect. Is determined. In this example, it is determined that the 16R jackpot notification effect is to be executed with a probability of 50%.

  When it is determined that the 16R big hit notification effect is to be executed (Y in Step 105IWS421), the effect control CPU 120 switches to the process table corresponding to the 16R big hit notification effect (Step 105IWS422), and resets the process timer. The process is started (step 105 IWS423).

  By executing the processing of steps 105 IWS 416 to S 423, a super hit effect is executed to derive and display a big hit symbol. If 10 seconds elapse without a game ball passing through the operation gate 105 IW 001, 16 rounds are performed. , A 16R big hit notification effect may be executed by lottery.

  Next, a description will be given of an example of an effect in the case where the notification effect, the numerical value effect, and the notice effect are executed during the variation display of the decorative symbol. FIG. 20-13 and FIG. 20-14 are explanatory diagrams for explaining an example of an effect in the case where the notification effect, the numerical value effect, and the notice effect are executed during the variation display of the decorative symbol. In FIG. 20-13 and FIG. 20-14, the effect screen transitions in the order of (A), (B), (C),.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 20-13 and 20-14, it is assumed that it is determined to execute the notice effect C at the start of the variable display (refer to step 105IWS103) and to execute the notification effect ( Step 105 IWS105). It is also assumed that “30 seconds” is determined as the notification period in the notification effect (see step 105 IWS 107) and that a diamond-shaped display is determined as the notification mode (see step 105 IWS 108). Further, it is assumed that the execution of the numerical value effect has been determined (see step 105 IWS109).

  As shown in FIG. 20-13 (A), after the start of the fluctuating display of the left-middle-right decorative symbol, when the timing for performing the notification effect comes (in the present example, the timing becomes 30 seconds before the execution of the notice effect C). ), A notification effect is executed as shown in FIG. In the example illustrated in FIG. 20B, a case is described in which the notification effect is executed in a mode in which the notification display 105IW003 including the character display of “after 30 seconds?” Is displayed in the diamond display on the image display device 5. ing.

  Next, when the end timing of the notification effect comes, as shown in FIG. 20C, the notification display 105IW003 displayed on the image display device 5 is temporarily deleted, and the notification effect is ended.

  Next, when it is the execution timing of the numerical value effect, the numerical value effect is executed as shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 20D, the image display device 5 displays an image in which numerical values such as “2”, “5”, and “3” pop out, and displays “2” from the speakers 8L and 8R. "," 5 "," 3 "and the like are output to execute a numerical effect. In this example, as shown in FIG. 20-13 (D), during the execution of the numerical effect, a case is shown in which the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed at the upper right end of the display screen of the image display device 5. Have been.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 20E, the left and right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed with the same symbol (in this example, symbol "7"), and after the reach is established, the further announcement effect C is executed. When the remaining time is 3 seconds until the timing, as shown in FIG. 20E, the image display device 5 displays a remaining time display indicating that the remaining time is “3 seconds”. FIG. 20E shows a case where the character display 105IW004 of "3 seconds remaining" is displayed as the remaining time display. After that, when the remaining two seconds are left until the execution timing of the notice effect C, the remaining time display indicating that the remaining time is “2 seconds” is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. . FIG. 20F shows a case where the character display 105IW005 of “2 seconds remaining” is displayed as the remaining time display. When 1 second remains until the execution timing of the notice effect C, the remaining time display indicating that the remaining time is “1 second” is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. . FIG. 20-14 (G) shows a case where the character display 105IW006 of "1 second remaining" is displayed as the remaining time display.

  In addition, in this example, when the notification effect is executed, the case where the remaining time display as shown in FIGS. 20-14 (E) to (G) is always displayed is shown. Instead, even if the notification effect is executed, the remaining time is not displayed, and the notice effect may be executed as it is. Further, after performing the notification effect, the remaining time display may be displayed and then the notice effect may be performed, and the notice effect may be performed without performing the remaining time display. Good.

  Then, when it becomes the execution timing of the notice effect C, the notice effect C is executed as shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 20H, a case where the notice effect C is executed by displaying an image of the character 105IW010 corresponding to the notice effect C on the image display device 5 is shown. In the present example, as shown in FIG. 20H, during the execution of the announcement effect, a case is shown in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed at the upper right end of the display screen of the image display device 5. Have been.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 20-13 and 20-14, the case where the notice effect C is executed is shown. However, when the notice effect A is executed, during the high-speed fluctuation before the reach is established, for example, as shown in FIG. The notice effect A is executed by displaying the image of the character corresponding to the notice effect A in a manner similar to 20-14 (H). When the notice effect B is executed, when the reach is established, for example, the image of the character corresponding to the notice effect B is displayed in a manner similar to that of FIG. Is done.

  In addition, in the examples shown in FIGS. 20-13 and 20-14, the case where “30 seconds” is notified as the notification period is shown. However, when the notification period is “10 seconds” or “20 seconds”, 20-13 (B), the notification effect is displayed by displaying the notification display including the character display of “after 10 seconds?” Or “after 20 seconds?”.

  Also, in the examples shown in FIGS. 20-13 and 20-14, the case where the diamond display is determined as the notification mode is shown. However, when the rectangular display or the elliptical display is determined as the notification mode, FIG. In a manner similar to B), a notification effect including a character display such as "30 seconds later" is displayed in a rectangular display or an ellipse display, thereby executing a notification effect.

  Next, a description will be given of an example of an effect when the story reach effect and the end effect are executed. FIG. 20-15 to FIG. 20-17 are explanatory diagrams for explaining an effect example in the case where the story reach effect and the end effect are executed. 20-15 to FIG. 20-17, the effect screen transitions in the order of (A), (B), (C).

  In the example shown in FIGS. 20-15 to 20-17, based on the reception of the fluctuation pattern command specifying the fluctuation pattern including the story reach effect, the process table including the story reach effect is selected in step 105 IWS110, and the selection is made. It is assumed that the processing of step 105 IWS 112 and step 105 IWS 205 is executed according to the performed process table.

  As shown in FIG. 20-15 (A), after starting the variation display of the left middle right decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 20-15 (B), the left and right decorative symbols are the same (in this example, It is assumed that the stop display is performed at the symbol “7”) and the reach state is established.

  Next, when it is time to execute the story reach effect, the image display device 5 starts the story reach effect as shown in FIG. In this example, as a story reach effect, an effect is performed in which a racing car A105IW011, a racing car B105IW012, and a racing car C105IW013 appear and perform a race. In this example, as shown in FIG. 20-15 (C), when the story reach effect is started, a case is shown in which the decorative symbol variation display is reduced and displayed at the upper right end of the display screen of the image display device 5. ing.

  Next, when the fluctuating time is stopped, as shown in FIG. 20D, a stop symbol of the decorative symbol is derived and displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 20-15 (D), the same symbol (in this example, symbol “7”) is stopped and displayed as the left middle right decorative symbol, and the big hit symbol is derived and displayed.

  Next, after the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, the state is shifted to the gate passage waiting state. As shown in FIGS. 20-16 (E) and (F) and FIGS. 20-17 (E) and (F), the image display device 5 is displayed. , An end effect is executed (see step 105 IWS304). In this example, an end effect is performed in which the racing car C105IW013 of the three racing cars 105IW011 to 013 finally wins the race. In this example, after the story reach effects shown in FIGS. 20-15 (C) and (D), FIGS. 20-16 (E) and (F) and FIGS. 20-17 (E) and (F) show. It is assumed that each process table is configured so that when the process shifts to the end effect, the effect contents are smoothly connected from the story reach effect to the end effect.

  In this case, when the gaming state is in the low base state, as shown in FIGS. 20-16 (E) and (F), a warning display is displayed on the image display device 5 by “(attention) passing through the gate. A character display 105 IW014 such as “End of movie” is displayed (N in Step 105 IWS 305, see Step 105 IWS 036). On the other hand, when the gaming state is in the high base state, as shown in FIGS. 20-17 (E) and (F), no warning display is displayed on the image display device 5 (see Y in step 105IWS305).

  Next, when a game ball passes through the operation gate 105IW001 in the gate passage waiting state, a big hit game is started, and when the game state is in the low base state, as shown in FIG. The effect ends (N in step 105 IWS 407, see step 105 IWS 409). On the other hand, when the gaming state is in the high base state, as shown in FIG. 20-17 (G), the end effect is continued even if the big hit game is started (see Y in Step 105IWS407 and Step 105IWS408). . In this case, for example, after the big hit game is started, an image of the winning run after the race may be displayed as a continuation of the end effect, or an image of the scene of the goal may be repeatedly displayed.

  When the gaming state is in the low base state, based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed through the operation gate 105IW001, the ending effect is ended as shown in FIG. Production during the round is started. On the other hand, when the gaming state is in the high base state, even if the gaming ball passes through the operation gate 105IW001, as shown in FIG. 20-17 (G), the end effect continues even if the big hit game is started. However, when the image reproduction such as the winning run is ended, the end effect is ended, and the effect during the round of the jackpot game of the same mode is started (the effect during the round of the different mode is started). May be done).

  In this example, as shown in FIGS. 20-16 and 20-17, during the execution of the end effect or after the start of the big hit game, the big hit symbol is reduced and displayed on the upper right end of the display screen of the image display device 5. Is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 20-16, in this characteristic portion 105IW, when the gaming state is in the low base state, the end effect is ended when the game ball passes through the operation gate 105IW001 and starts the big hit game, If the game ball is passed too quickly through the operation gate 105IW001, the last part of the end effect (for example, the scene of the goal) cannot be seen. Therefore, in this example, when the low base state is in progress, the warning display 105IW014 is displayed so that the player can pay attention.

  In FIGS. 20-16 and 20-17, a right-handed display (a display for prompting the passing of the game ball to the operation gate 105IW001) may be further performed during the execution of the end effect. In this case, for example, in the low base state, the character display such as “right-handed” is displayed with a medium display size in FIGS. 20-16 (E) and (F), while the high base state is displayed. In the case of middle, inconspicuous modes such as displaying a character display such as “right-handed” with a small display size and displaying a rightward arrow in FIGS. 20-17 (E) and (F) are shown. May be configured to perform right-handed display.

  Next, an example of an effect when a super reach effect is executed will be described. FIG. 20-18 to FIG. 20-20 are explanatory diagrams for explaining an example of an effect when a super reach effect is executed. In addition, in FIGS. 20-18 to 20-20, the effect screen transitions in the order of (A), (B), (C),.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 20-18 to 20-20, a process table including a super-reach effect is selected in step 105 IWS110 based on the reception of a fluctuation pattern command specifying a fluctuation pattern including a super-reach effect. It is assumed that the processing of step 105 IWS 112 and step 105 IWS 205 is executed according to the performed process table.

  As shown in FIG. 20-18 (A), after starting the variation display of the left-middle-right decoration symbol, as shown in FIG. 20-18 (B), the left and right decoration symbols are the same (in this example, It is assumed that the stop display is performed at the symbol “7”) and the reach state is established.

  Next, when it is time to execute the super reach effect, the image display device 5 starts the super reach effect as shown in FIG. In this example, as a super reach effect, an effect is performed in which an ally character 105IW015 and an enemy character 105IW016 appear and battle. In this example, as shown in FIG. 20-18 (C), when the super reach effect is started, a case is shown in which the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed at the upper right end of the display screen of the image display device 5. ing.

  Next, when the fluctuating time is stopped, as shown in FIG. 20-18 (D), a stop symbol of the decorative symbol is derived and displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 20-18 (D), the same symbol (in this example, symbol “7”) is stopped and displayed as the left middle right decorative symbol, and the big hit symbol is derived and displayed.

  Next, after the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, when the state shifts to the gate passage waiting state, the promotion display is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 20-19 (E) (see step 105IWS308). In this example, a case where a character display 105IW017 of “Right-handed” is displayed as the promotion display, and a display prompting the activation gate 105IW001 to perform a shooting operation aiming at the right side of the game area to pass the game ball is performed. It is shown.

  Next, when the game ball passes through the operation gate 105IW001 in the gate passage waiting state, at the start of the big hit game, a roulette effect is executed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 20-19 (F) (see step 105IWS411). . In this example, as shown in FIG. 20F, a roulette image 105IW018 is displayed, and by rotating the roulette, an effect of inducing whether the round is a 16-round or a 4-round big hit is executed. Is done.

  In this example, it is assumed that a 16-round big hit has occurred, and as shown in FIG. 20-19 (G), the ball enters the “16R” square in the roulette effect, and as shown in FIG. 20-19 (H). , A 16-round jackpot is notified, and the game is controlled to a 16-round jackpot game state.

  On the other hand, although the promotion display 105IW017 is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 20-20 (E), the operation is continued even after 10 seconds as shown in FIG. 20-20 (F). It is assumed that the game ball has not passed through the gate 105IW001. In this case, if it is a 16-round jackpot game, it is determined by lottery whether or not a 16R jackpot notification effect is to be performed (see step 105 IWS420). As shown in G), a 16R jackpot notification effect is executed on the image display device 5 (see step 105IWS422). In this example, a case is shown in which a predetermined character 105IW019 appears as a 16R big hit notification effect, and a character display of "16R big hit!" Is displayed as a line of the character 105IW019.

  By executing the 16R jackpot notification effect shown in FIG. 20-20 (G), in this example, when the 16R jackpot notification effect is executed, it is determined that the round is a 16-round jackpot. On the other hand, there is a case where the 16R big hit notification is not executed even if 10 seconds elapse without the game ball passing through the operation gate 105IW001. In this case, the 16 round big hit and the 4 round big hit are not performed. There are both possibilities of being a jackpot.

  As described above, according to this characteristic portion 105IW, a plurality of types of suggestive effects (in this example, notice effects A to C) indicating that the vehicle is controlled to be in an advantageous state (in this example, a jackpot game state). Is executable. In addition, when any one of a plurality of types of suggested effects is executed, a predetermined period (in this example, “10 seconds”, “20 seconds”, “30 seconds”) until the suggested effect is executed. )), And after notifying the predetermined period in the notification effect, the notification for the predetermined period is made unrecognizable before the predetermined period elapses. For this reason, it is possible to enhance the effect of performing the notification effect.

  For example, when the notification period is displayed and then the notification period is continuously displayed until the timing of execution of the notification effect (for example, when a countdown display is performed), the execution timing of the notification effect can be recognized at a glance. The effect cannot be enhanced sufficiently. On the other hand, in the characteristic portion 105IW, the notification of the notification period is made unrecognizable before the notification period elapses, so that the progress of the notification period cannot be clearly grasped. Can count down the time until the notification period elapses in his / her head and wait for the game, and can enhance the effect of performing the notification effect.

  Note that, in this example, the case where the notification display displayed on the image display device 5 is erased as the case where “the notification for the predetermined period is made unrecognizable” is described, but the present invention is not limited to such a case. For example, even if the display screen of the image display device 5 is darkened (blacked out) by performing another effect such as a blackout effect while the notification display is being displayed, the notification display becomes unrecognizable. Good. Further, for example, a movable member provided in the gaming machine may be operated to hide the notification display so that the notification display becomes unrecognizable, and various modes may be considered.

  In addition, in this example, when the notification display is displayed as "before the predetermined period elapses", the case where the notification display is erased relatively quickly to make the display invisible is shown. I can't. For example, the notification display may be continuously displayed for a relatively long period of time, and the notification display may be erased for a relatively short period of time before the execution timing of the announcement effect to make the display invisible. Also, for example, the countdown display is performed until the execution timing of the notice effect, and the countdown display is erased for a moment before the execution timing of the notice effect, so that the display becomes invisible. Good. As such, various modes can be considered as “before the predetermined period elapses”.

  Further, in this example, the case where the "suggested effect" is a notice effect is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, a pseudo rend or a reach effect may be executed as a “suggested effect”, and a notification effect may be executed before the pseudo ream or the reach effect. Further, for example, as an effect to be performed during the fluctuation display, when the effect of the same effect as the so-called look-ahead zone effect is configured to be executable, the effect of the same effect as the look-ahead zone effect is referred to as `` indicative effect. '' It may be configured to execute the notification effect before the effect.

  Further, according to the characteristic portion 105IW, it can be executed at a plurality of timings during the variable display according to the type of the suggested effect (in this example, the notice effect A is executed during high-speed fluctuation, and the notice effect B is reachable). It is executed when it is established, and the notice effect C is executed after the reach is established.) For this reason, it is possible to enhance the effect of performing the notification effect.

  Further, according to this characteristic portion 105IW, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when a long period is notified as the predetermined period in the notification effect than when a short period is notified as the predetermined period (FIG. 20). -6). Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which period is notified as the predetermined period.

  Further, according to this characteristic portion 105IW, a notification effect can be executed in a plurality of types of notification modes (in this example, rectangular display, elliptical display, and diamond display), and the same type of suggestion effect is executed and the notification effect is performed. Even if the same period is notified as the predetermined period, the ratio of controlling to the advantageous state differs according to the type of the notification mode of the notification effect (see FIG. 20-7). Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which notification mode the notification effect is executed.

  In this example, as the notification mode, a case where the shape of the notification display is different, such as a rectangular display, an elliptical display, and a rhombus display, is not limited to such a mode. For example, as the notification mode, the display colors (for example, red, green, blue, and rainbow colors) of the notification display may be configured to be different. Further, for example, when a character is displayed together with the notification display, a different character may be displayed as a notification mode, or the voice of the character may be different.

  Further, according to the characteristic portion 105IW, after the notification of the predetermined period becomes unrecognizable, the timing immediately before the predetermined period elapses is notified that the timing is immediately before the predetermined period elapses (this In the example, the remaining time display shown in FIGS. 20-14 (E)-(G) is displayed). For this reason, it is possible to enhance the effect of performing the notification effect.

  In the present example, the “timing immediately before the predetermined period elapses” is a timing at which the time from when the notification period elapses to when the notification effect is performed is extremely short (in this example, three seconds before and two seconds before). Before one second before). It should be noted that the remaining time is displayed at a timing, for example, five seconds before, when the player recognizes that the time until the notice effect is short, not limited to the one indicated by the characteristic portion 105IW. You may.

  Also, in this example, a case is shown in which the notice effect is executed when the notification period elapses and the remaining time is displayed three seconds before the notification period elapses (for example, the notification period is “30 seconds”). In this case, the remaining time display is started when 27 seconds have elapsed, and the execution timing of the announcement effect is displayed when exactly 30 seconds have elapsed.) However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, when the notification period is “30 seconds”, the display of the remaining time is started when 30 seconds have elapsed, and the execution timing of the notice effect is performed when the display of the remaining time ends after 33 seconds. You may comprise.

  Further, according to the characteristic portion 105IW, after the notification of the predetermined period is made unrecognizable, a predetermined effect using a number (in this example, a numerical effect) can be executed until the predetermined period elapses. For this reason, it is possible to enhance the effect of performing the notification effect.

  For example, when the notification effect is executed and the notification period of “10 seconds”, “20 seconds”, or “30 seconds” is notified, the time of 10 seconds, 20 seconds, or 30 seconds is counted in the player's head. If so, there is a possibility that the player may recognize the execution timing of the announcement effects A to C. Therefore, in the characteristic portion 105IW, after executing the notification effect, the numerical effect is executed until the execution timing of the notice effects A to C, and the period until the notice effects A to C are executed in the numerical effect. Confuses the player by displaying irrelevant numbers or outputting by voice, making it difficult to count the time until the notice effects A to C are executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from easily recognizing the execution timings of the notice effects A to C, to improve the unexpectedness of the notice effect execution, and to increase the effect of performing the notice effect. It can be done.

  In the characteristic portion 105IW, the “numerical effect” is, as shown in FIG. 20-13 (D), for example, in the order of “2” → “5” → “3” →. By notifying (randomly) informing, the player is confused, and it is difficult to count the time until the notice effects A to C are executed. In addition, as long as it can confuse the player, not only such a mode but also various modes as “numerical effects” can be considered. For example, as “numerical effect”, numerical values are notified in a different order from the countdown (for example, remaining time display) in the notification effect (for example, in the notification effect, “30” → “29” → “28” →...). In contrast to the notification in descending order, the numerical effect may be confusing to the player by notifying in the ascending order of “2” → “3” → “4” →. For example, in the notification effect, the notification is performed in ascending order of “1” →... → “28” → “29” → “30”, whereas in the numerical effect, “4” → “3” → “2” The player may be confused by notifying the player in descending order such as "→ ...". For example, the "numerical effect" may be different from the internal numerical update timing in the notification effect. By performing the effect of updating the numerical value, the player It may be configured such that the timing of counting numbers in the mind is shifted so as to be in the way.For example, the notification cycle of the numerical value in “numerical effect” is changed irregularly (for example, from “2” to “ (5) is updated in 0.5 seconds, and “5” is updated in 2 seconds from “3”), which may confuse the player.

  Also, in the characteristic portion 105IW, as shown in FIG. 20-13 (D), the “numerical effect” is executed by displaying a numerical value on the image display device 5 and outputting sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R. , But is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, as a “numerical effect”, a light emitter such as a lamp or an LED is illuminated or vibrated at the timing of updating the numerical value (for example, the motor of the operation button is operated to vibrate, By vibrating, or the like), the player may break the rhythm counted in the mind and be confused. Further, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the player is confused only by the light emission or the vibration operation of the light emitter without displaying the numerical value.

  Note that, in the characteristic portion 105IW, a case has been described in which a numerical effect is executed to prevent a player from easily recognizing the execution timing of the notice effects A to C. However, the present invention is limited to such an aspect. Absent. For example, even after the notification of the predetermined period is made unrecognizable, a predetermined effect (for example, a step-up notice effect, a pseudo-rendition) in which the mode changes stepwise until the predetermined period elapses can be executed. Good. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being easily perceived by the change of the mode in a stepwise manner, and to easily recognize the execution timings of the notice effects A to C. The unexpectedness of execution can be improved, and the effect of performing the notification effect can be enhanced.

  The “step-up notice effect” is a notice effect performed in a manner in which the effect changes stepwise from the first stage to a plurality of stages. Generally, when the step-up notice effect is executed, the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big hit increases as the effect changes to more stages. In addition, the “pseudo series” refers to a re-variable display in which the temporary stop symbol is temporarily displayed temporarily after the variable display is started and the display result is derived and displayed, and then the variable display is executed again. This is a variable display mode executed one or more times. In general, when the pseudo-run is executed, the expectation (reliability) for the big hit becomes higher when more re-variable displays are executed.

  In addition, when executing the step-up notice effect or the pseudo-run, the step-up notice effect or the pseudo-run is started before the notification period is notified, and a part of the step-up notice effect or the pseudo-run It may be included from the notification to the execution of the notice effect.

  Also, according to the characteristic portion 105IW, after the specific display result (in this example, the big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as the variable display result, the specific condition is satisfied (in this example, the operation gate 105IW001 is played). Based on the fact that the ball has passed), it is possible to control to an advantageous state (in this example, a jackpot game state) advantageous to the player. Also, it is possible to execute a specific effect (in this example, a story reach effect, a super reach effect) indicating that the control is performed in an advantageous state, and when the specific effect is executed and the specific display result is derived and displayed, the specific effect is performed. In the period until the condition is satisfied, a special effect related to the specific effect (the end effect shown in FIGS. 20-16 (E) and (F) and FIGS. 20-17 (E) and (F) in this example) is executed. It is possible (in this example, when the story reach effect is executed, the end effect is executed in the gate passage waiting state). For this reason, it is possible to enhance the effect of performing the control in the advantageous state based on the specific condition being satisfied after the specific display result is derived and displayed.

  Further, according to the characteristic portion 105IW, a first specific effect (in this example, a story reach effect) and a second specific effect (in this example, a super reach effect) can be executed as the specific effects. When the first specific effect is executed and the specific display result is derived and displayed, a special effect related to the first specific effect in the period until the specific condition is satisfied (in this example, FIG. 20-16 (E) , (F) and the end effects shown in FIGS. 20-17 (E), (F)) can be executed (in this example, when the story reach effect is executed, the end effect is not executed in the gate passage waiting state). When the second specific effect is executed and the specific display result is derived and displayed, a predetermined effect that is not related to the second specific effect in a period until the specific condition is satisfied (in this example, FIGS. 20 to 19). (E) and the display of the promotion display shown in FIGS. 20-20 (E)) can be executed (in the present example, when the super reach effect is executed, the promotion display is displayed in the gate passing waiting state). ). For this reason, it is possible to enhance the effect of performing the control in the advantageous state based on the specific condition being satisfied after the specific display result is derived and displayed.

  Further, according to this characteristic portion 105IW, it is possible to control to a plurality of types of advantageous states (in this example, 16 rounds of big hits and 4 rounds of big hits). In addition, after the specific condition is satisfied, a notification effect for notifying the type of the advantageous state (in this example, a roulette effect shown in FIGS. 20-19 (F) and (G)) can be executed, and the first specific effect is performed. If it is controlled to the advantageous state after the execution, the notification effect is not executed (in this example, only when the super reach effect is executed, the roulette effect is executed after passing the game ball of the operation gate 105IW001, and the story reach effect Is not executed, the roulette effect is not executed). For this reason, it is possible to enhance the effect of performing the control in the advantageous state based on the specific condition being satisfied after the specific display result is derived and displayed.

  In particular, in the feature portion 105IW, the super-reach effect can be executed in the case of a loss, and can be executed in both of the 16 rounds and the 4 rounds in the case of a big hit. On the other hand, the story reach effect can be executed in the event of a loss, and can be executed only in the case of a 16-hit jackpot in the case of a big hit. In such a case, it is possible to avoid waste of the production by not performing the roulette production. For example, during the high base state, the story of the story reach production can be continuously shown by continuing the end production.

  Further, according to this characteristic portion 105IW, the execution of the special effect is terminated based on the establishment of the specific condition, and the execution of the special effect is terminated during the execution of the special effect based on the establishment of the specific condition. End notification (in this example, the caution display 105IW014 shown in FIGS. 20-16 (E) and (F)) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to warn that the special effect will be terminated unintentionally, and the effect of controlling to an advantageous state based on the specific condition being satisfied after the specific display result has been derived and displayed is reduced. It is possible to prevent the situation from being lowered.

  In this example, a case is shown in which the warning display is displayed throughout the execution of the end effect in the gate passage waiting state, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the attention display may be displayed only during a part of the period during which the end effect is being performed, or the display of the attention display may be started immediately before the end effect is started (for example, 1 to 3 seconds before). It may be configured as follows.

  Further, according to this characteristic portion 105IW, the special effect is executed during the advantageous state even after the specific condition is satisfied (in this example, when the gaming state is in the high base state, FIG. 20-17 (G ), Even if the game ball passes through the operation gate 105IW001 and the big hit game is started, the end effect is executed during the big hit game). For this reason, it is possible to enhance the effect of performing the control in the advantageous state based on the specific condition being satisfied after the specific display result is derived and displayed.

  Further, according to this characteristic portion 105IW, during the period from the time when the specific display result is derived and displayed until the specific condition is satisfied, the promotion effect that urges the specific condition to be satisfied (in this example, FIG. 20-19 (E ) And the display of the promotion display shown in FIGS. 20-20 (E)). In addition, based on the fact that a predetermined period has elapsed without the specific condition being satisfied from the start of the execution of the promotion effect, an advantageous state-related effect relating to the controlled advantageous state (FIG. 20-20 (G) in this example) 16R big hit notification effect) shown in FIG. For this reason, it is possible to enhance the effect of performing the control in the advantageous state based on the specific condition being satisfied after the specific display result is derived and displayed. Further, in particular, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect in a period from when the specific display result is derived and displayed until the specific condition is satisfied.

(Description of Modification of Feature 105IW)
In this characteristic part 105IW, although the story reach effect and the end effect are executed as a series of effects, the process table is switched and used during the display of the decorative symbols, in the waiting state for the gate passing, and after the start of the big hit game. Although the case where these series of effects are executed has been described, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the story reach effect and the ending effect may be configured to be executed from the display of the variation of the decorative symbols to the state of waiting for the gate to pass (and further to the jackpot game) using one piece of moving image data. Hereinafter, a modified example in which the story reach effect and the end effect are executed using one moving image data will be described.

  FIG. 20-21 is a flowchart showing the variable display effect processing (step S172) in the modification. In the present modification, in the variable display effect processing, the processing of Steps 105 IWS220 and S221 is executed in addition to the processing shown in FIG. 20-9.

  In the present variation, in the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not it is time to start the story reach effect (step 105 IWS220). Whether or not it is the start time of the story reach effect can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the variable time timer set in step 105 IWS113. If it is the start timing of the story reach effect, the effect control CPU 120 starts the moving image reproduction of the story reach effect on the image display device 5 using the moving image data (step 105IWS221).

  Thereafter, the super reach effect is executed during the variation display of the decorative symbol based on the moving image data of which the moving image reproduction has been started in step 105 IWS 221, and after the state of waiting for the gate passing, the state of waiting for the gate passing based on the moving image data is maintained. (If the base is in the high base state, the end effect is executed even after the start of the big hit game). Therefore, in the present modification, the processing of Step 105 IWS 304 and the processing of Step 105 IWS 408 become unnecessary.

  According to the modification shown in FIG. 20-21, the specific effect and the special effect are executed using one effect data (in this example, one moving image data). For this reason, it is possible to enhance the effect of performing the control in the advantageous state based on the specific condition being satisfied after the specific display result is derived and displayed.

  Note that the configuration shown by the characteristic portion 105IW (including the configuration of the modified example shown in FIGS. 20 to 21) can be appropriately combined with the configuration shown by the characteristic portion 31AK to configure a gaming machine. For example, when performing the notice effects A to C, the story reach effect, and the super reach effect indicated by the characteristic portion 105IW, a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the notice effects A to C, the story reach effect, and the super reach effect. At this time, in the same manner as the characteristic portion 31AK, the titles corresponding to the announcement effects A to C, the story reach effect, and the super reach effect may be configured to be notified.

  The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration thereof is included in the present invention even if there are changes and additions in a range not departing from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other exemplary embodiments described below.

  Moreover, it is good also as combining all or one part structure arbitrarily among the structure shown to embodiment mentioned above and each modification, and the structure shown in the below-mentioned embodiment and each modification.

  In addition, it should be thought that the above-described embodiment and the later-described embodiment disclosed this time are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above and the following description, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is a gaming machine capable of performing a game and being controllable in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player, and controlled in an advantageous state. Suggestion effect execution means (for example, a part for executing step 105 IWS216 in the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestion effects (for example, notice effects A to C), and a plurality of types of suggestion effects. When any of the suggestion effects is executed, a notification effect (eg, “10 seconds”, “20 seconds”, “30 seconds”) that notifies a predetermined period until the suggestion effect is executed (for example, The notification effect execution means (for example, step 105IWS207 in the effect control CPU 120) that can execute the notification display 105IW003 shown in FIG. 20-13 (B) is executed. After the notification of the predetermined period in the notification effect, the notification of the predetermined period is made unrecognizable before the predetermined period elapses (for example, a portion that executes step 105 IWS210 in the effect control CPU 120). Further, the game apparatus further includes title notifying means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggested effect, wherein the title information means responds to the suggested effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggested effect. Gaming machines that can notify the user of the changed title (for example, FIGS. 21-2 (D) and (F)).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect of performing the notification effect.

  Furthermore, as an example of a form of a gaming machine that can enhance the effect of performing a notification effect, a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player. And a suggestion effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect) indicating that the control is performed in the advantageous state, and a title corresponding to the suggestion effect can be notified. Title notification means (for example, effect control CPU 120), and the title information means can notify a title corresponding to the suggested effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggested effect (for example, FIG. 21-). 2 (D), (F)) gaming machines. Hereinafter, an example of the embodiment of the gaming machine will be described as another embodiment.

(Other examples)
Hereinafter, the characteristic portion 31AK of another embodiment will be described. FIG. 21A is a diagram for explaining a variation pattern and a type of reach in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 21A, in this embodiment, the non-reach loss variation patterns PA1-1 and PA1 in which the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode and the display result is "losing". -2. The display result is "big hit", such as reach-loss variation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-6, PA3-1 to PA3-4, in which the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode and the display result is "losing". Are prepared. PB2-1 to PB2-6, PB3-1 to PB3-4, and the like are prepared.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 21B, in this embodiment, reach effects such as normal reach and super reach A to E are executed. In this embodiment, the reach effect is also referred to as a suggestion effect that indicates that it is controlled to the big hit state. The reliability when each reach is executed (big hit reliability) is represented by the number of black stars in FIG. 21-1 (B), normal reach <super reach E <super reach D <super reach C <super reach Reach B <Super Reach A. In addition, you may provide the reach which determines a big hit.

  In this embodiment, the super reach is executed via the normal reach. In addition, during the super-reach reach effect, an advanced effect that evolves (promotes) to a more reliable reach may be executed. The variation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4 and the like and variation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-4 and the like shown in FIG. 21A are variation patterns corresponding to the execution of the development effect. In FIG. 21A, a variation pattern in which the reliability evolves to a super-reach with one step higher is shown, but a fluctuation pattern in which the reliability evolves in two or more steps is also provided. Further, a variation pattern in which the development effect is executed a plurality of times may be provided.

  In this embodiment, the title of the reach is notified at a predetermined timing after the reach is established, except for the normal reach having the lowest reliability. As shown in FIG. 21-1 (B), the notification mode of the title differs depending on the type of the reach. Specifically, the super reach E having the lowest reliability among the super reach is notified only by displaying the title of the reach, and the other super reach is notified of the title by display and sound. As described above, the notification of the title is executed by the effect device of the reach with the higher reliability than the reach with the lower reliability. As a result, the player's sense of expectation can be effectively instigated, and the production effect can be improved. The title notification mode may be arbitrarily changed depending on the reliability or irrespective of the reliability. Further, even in the same reach effect, the notification mode may be changed according to the actual display result or the like. Further, the font of the title character (Gothic, Mincho, etc.) or the typeface (line, square, etc.) may be changed depending on the type of the reach.

  The notification of the title of the reach (title notification) is not limited to the title itself such as the name of the reach, but may be the name of the character appearing in the reach effect, the content of the effect of the reach effect, or the like.

(Example of the production operation of the characteristic part 31AK)
Next, an example of a rendering operation according to the present embodiment will be described. The following production operation is executed by the production control CPU 120 executing the production control process based on the production control command transmitted from the main board 11. FIG. 21B and FIG. 21C are diagrams illustrating an example of a super-reach effect production operation according to the present embodiment. FIG. 21-2 (A) shows that the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. ing. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 21-2 (B), the decorative symbol indicating the number 7 on the “left” and “right” stops and the reach mode is reached. After that, the production branches depending on the type of reach.

(Super Reach A)
In the case of Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 21C, a character 31AK001, which is a friendly character, is displayed on the image display device 5, and a reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period elapses from the start of the super-reach effect, such as when the introduction part of the super-reach effect (also referred to as the super-reach effect) ends, as shown in FIG. The title 31AK002 of Super Reach A (here, the character of “SP Reach A”) is displayed on the entire screen, and a sound (here, “Super Reach A”) corresponding to the title of Reach is output from the speaker 8. Thus, the title of Super Reach A is announced. Thereafter, the title 31AK002 of Super Reach A is deleted, and as shown in FIG. 21E, the character 31AK003, which is the enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the characters 31AK001 and 31AK003 are displayed. Is executed, the subsequent portion of the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed. An effect in which the characters confront each other is also referred to as a battle effect. In the battle effect, a victory occurs when an ally character wins, and a loss occurs when the ally character loses.

  In addition, when the words are displayed on the image display device 5 during the super reach effect, the sound corresponding to the words may be output from the speaker 8. Furthermore, the dialogue is not limited to being displayed in a balloon as shown in FIG. 21-2 (E), and may be displayed as subtitles in a lower portion of the image display device 5 or the like.

(Super Reach B)
In the case of Super Reach B, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period elapses after the super-reach effect is started, such as when the introduction portion of the super-reach effect ends, the title 31AK005 of the super-reach B is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. (Here, the character of “SP Reach B”) is displayed, and the sound (here, “Super Reach B”) corresponding to the title name of Reach is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of Super Reach B is changed. Be informed. Thereafter, the title 31AK005 of Super Reach B is deleted, the character 31AK006 as the enemy character is displayed, the line 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK006 are displayed as shown in FIG. Is executed, the succeeding part of the reach effect of Super Reach B is executed.

  As described above, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the title of the reach is notified when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the super reach effect. By doing so, the title can be notified after the introduction part of the super reach effect is shown to the player, so that the effect of the title notification can be enhanced.

  Also, super reach A (FIG. 21-2 (C) → (D) → (E)...) And super reach B (FIG. 21-2 (C) → (F) → (G)...) Then, in the introductory portion until the title is announced, the super reach effect is executed in a common effect mode (FIG. 21-2 (C)). In this way, the player can be noticed which super-reach has been started since the super-reach production started, and which title is to be notified. The super-reach A and the super-reach B are not limited to completely making the production mode until the title is announced. At least one super-reach can be determined if the production is watched. The sections may have a common effect mode. For example, in the introductory part of Super Reach A and Super Reach B, a super reach effect (for example, an effect that displays an enemy character or suggests an enemy character) may be performed in a manner related to a title to be notified thereafter. It may be. By doing so, the effect of the effect is improved, and the player pays attention to the effect. As described above, the title notification may be executed after the super reach can be specified.

(Super Reach D)
In the case of Super Reach D, the title 31AK007 of Super Reach D (here, the character of “SP Reach D”) is displayed at a part of the center of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. At the same time, a sound (here, “defeat the enemy”) corresponding to the title of the reach is output from the speaker 8 to notify the title of the super reach D. As described above, in the super reach D, the title is notified at the start of the super reach effect. Under the title 31AK007, an expectation degree suggestion indication 31AK008 indicating the degree of expectation of the reach is displayed. The degree of expectation is represented by the number of black stars, as shown in FIG. Here, the degree of expectation is the degree of expectation to be a big hit, but does not have to completely match the big hit reliability of the reach.

  The notification by the voice of Super Reach D does not report the title as it is, but reports the content of the reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the mode of notification of the title notification by voice differs depending on the type of the reach. Thereby, the notification mode of the title notification is diversified, and the interest is improved.

  After the title is announced in the super reach D, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. At this time, the title 31AK007 and the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 continue to be displayed in a reduced size in the upper right portion of the image display device 5 or the like. By doing so, the player can grasp the degree of expectation of the reach even during the reach effect. Although FIG. 21-2 (I) shows the effect contents common to FIG. 21-2 (C) (super reach A and super reach B), a super reach effect dedicated to super reach D is executed. You may.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 21-2 (J), the character 31AK009, which is the enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the reach reach of the super reach D in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK009 confront each other is performed. Be executed.

(Super Reach E)
In the case of Super Reach E, as shown in FIG. 21-3 (A), the title 31AK010 of Super Reach E (here, the character of “SP Reach E”) is displayed on a part of the upper left of the image display device 5. Then, the title of Super Reach E is notified. In the super reach E, the notification of the title by voice is not performed. In addition to the display of the title 31AK010, the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011, which is an enemy character, are displayed. Be executed. As described above, in Super Reach E, the title is notified in accordance with the progress of the reach effect. In the super reach E, the title 31AK010 is continuously displayed during the reach effect.

  In the reach production of the super reach E having a low jackpot reliability, by giving the title information without stopping the progress of the reach production, it is possible to prevent the player from giving an excessive sense of expectation. On the other hand, in the reach effects of the super reach A, the super reach B, and the super reach D, the progress of the reach effect is stopped and the title is notified (FIGS. 21-2 (D) and (F)). , (H)). By doing so, the title notification according to the super reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. It should be noted that in super reach effects such as super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D, the title may be notified without stopping the progress of the reach. Also, in contrast to this embodiment, in the super-reach reach production with high jackpot reliability, the title may be notified without stopping the progress of the reach production. In the reach effect of the super reach having a low jackpot reliability, the progress of the reach effect may be stopped to notify the title.

(Timing notification timing)
As described above, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of Super Reach production, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, Super Reach production The title is announced at the start. By doing in this way, it is possible to execute the title notification according to the reach effect, and the effect of the effect is improved. In this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B having high jackpot reliability, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of the superreach production, and Super Reach D and Super Reach have low jackpot reliability. In E, the title was announced at the start of the super-reach production, but the title was announced at the start of the super-reach production in the case of the reach with a high jackpot reliability, and the super The title may be notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the reach effect.

(Title display area)
Further, in this embodiment, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the title is announced on the entire screen (first area) of the image display device 5, and in the super reach D and the super reach E, the image display device 5 is displayed. Is notified in a part of the screen (second area). By doing in this way, it is possible to execute the title notification according to the reach effect, and the effect of the effect is improved. In particular, in the case of a reach with a high jackpot reliability, the title notification is executed in a wider display area than in a case of a reach with a low reliability, so that effective title notification is possible. Note that the title notification on the entire screen of the image display device 5 may be such that the title is displayed in a size that fits the entire screen, or the entire background is displayed as a title notification background. (Title notification using the entire screen) or the like. Further, the display area for performing the title notification may be different between the super reach A and the super reach B, or the display area for performing the title notification may be different between the super reach D and the super reach E.

  The method of changing the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect is not limited to the example of this embodiment, and the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect may be arbitrarily changed. For example, in the case of a reach with a high jackpot reliability, the title notification may be executed in a narrower display area than in a case of a reach with a low reliability. Further, when the display area for performing the title notification is made different according to the reach effect, the display area may be made different as in this embodiment, or the display place may be made different.

(Expected indication)
In this embodiment, in the title notification in the super reach A and the super reach B having the high jackpot reliability, the super reach D having the lower jackpot reliability than the super reach A and the super reach B is displayed without displaying the indication of the expectation degree. In the title notification in, an indication of the degree of expectation was displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the effect from becoming dull. In addition, in the title notification in Super Reach E, which has a lower jackpot reliability than Super Reach D, an indication of the degree of expectation is not displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the expectation by displaying the expectation indicator indicating that the reliability is low in the reach with low reliability. Note that an expectation degree suggestion display may be displayed on at least a part of the super reach A, the super reach B, and the super reach E.

  The indication of the degree of expectation is not limited to the one indicated by the number of black stars as shown in FIG. 21-2 (H) and the like, and may be indicated by a meter or a gauge. May be displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 21-2 (H) and the like, in the case where the number of black stars is indicated, half (or half) black stars can be displayed, and the number of levels of expectation may be increased. .

(Title display end timing)
In this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, after the title is displayed, the title is erased and a super reach effect is executed. Thereby, in the super reach A and the super reach B, it is possible to pay attention to the reach effect. Further, in the super reach D and the super reach E, after the title is displayed, the title is continuously displayed until a determined effect described later is executed. Thereby, in the super reach D and the super reach E, the type of the reach can be grasped even during the super reach effect. In addition, by performing the above, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect can be improved. Note that the display end timing of the title may be arbitrarily changed in order to improve the effect of presentation regardless of the timing.

  Note that, here, the production operation of the reach production of the super reach C is omitted, however, for example, a title notification and an expectation suggestion display according to the jackpot reliability may be executed.

(Decision production)
When it is time to derive the display result (the end of the variable display) after each reach effect has been executed, a fixed effect for notifying whether or not the display result will be a "big hit" is executed. The fixed effects include a fixed effect indicating that the display result is "big hit" and a fixed effect indicating that the display result is "losing". In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21-3 (B), a fixed effect in which the image 31AK012 is displayed on the image display device 5 is executed. Thereafter, if the display result is “big hit”, an image 31AK013 indicating that the ally character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 21-3 (C), and as shown in FIG. 21-3 (D), A definitive decorative symbol to be a big hit combination is derived. If the display result is "losing", an image indicating that the ally character has been defeated is displayed, and a fixed decorative symbol that is a reach-losing combination is derived.

  In the present embodiment, even when the title is continuously notified during the reach effect, the notification of the title is ended before the fixed effect is executed. As a result, attention can be paid to the determined effect, and a sharp title notification can be executed.

  In the effect operation example shown in FIGS. 21-2 and 21-3, during the reach effect of the super reach, the decorative design is reduced at the lower right portion of the image display device 5 and the variable display is executed. The way of displaying the decorative pattern during the reach effect may be arbitrary. For example, the decorative design may not be displayed during the reach effect, or the display mode (size, position, shading, number, etc.) may be changed depending on the type of the reach effect.

  In addition, when the character resident in the hold display, the active display, and the variable display, and the display related to the mobile phone are displayed on the image display device 5, the display is appropriately not displayed during the reach effect of the super reach in order to focus on the reach effect. It may be. At this time, these displays may be kept displayed during a low-reliability reach effect such as super reach E. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from excessively expecting a low-reliability reach effect, and to pay attention to the reach effect in the high-reliability reach effect.

(Development stage)
Next, an example of an effect operation when the extended effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 21-4 (A), when the extended effect is performed when the reach effect of super reach D is executed (the title notification of super reach D is executed), FIG. 21-4. As shown in (B), an effect is executed in which the reach effect is interrupted and the screen is torn. Thereafter, in the case of developing into Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 21C, the title of Super Reach A is announced, and the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed. In the case of developing into Super Reach B, as shown in FIG. 21D, the title of Super Reach B is announced, and a Reach effect of Super Reach is executed. As described above, when the development effect is performed, the notification of the title of the reach of the development source is switched to the notification of the title of the reach of the development destination. As illustrated in FIG. 21D, when the reach of the development destination is a reach that performs title notification by display and voice, title notification by display and voice is executed again.

  Note that the development effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 21-4 (B), and may be an effect in which the screen is gradually cracked and cracked, or a sandstorm (indicating failure). It may be displayed. With such an effect, an unexpected effect can be performed. It should be noted that there may be a development effect of gasses, such as an effect in which the screen gradually cracks but the reach does not develop.

(Expectation suggestion effect)
In the effect operation example shown in FIG. 21H, the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 is configured to display black stars indicating the expectation degree from the beginning. It is also possible to execute an expectation suggestion effect that suggests an expectation by becoming a black star.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 21-5 (A), when notifying the title of Super Reach D, an expectation degree suggestion display 31AK021 of five white stars is first displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 21-5 (B), a black star 31AK022 larger than the star of the expectation degree indication display 31AK021 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 21-5 (C), the black star 31AK022 moves and is expected. An effect that fits into one of the white stars of the degree suggestion display 31AK021 is executed. At this time, a sound of “pin” indicating that the number of black stars indicating the degree of expectation has increased is output from the speaker 8. As shown in FIGS. 21-5 (D) and (E), the same effect is repeated the number of times corresponding to the degree of expectation of reach. At this time, the sound (volume, scale, sound quality, etc.) output from the speaker 8 may be changed step by step each time it is repeated (for each number of stars). When the number of black stars corresponding to the degree of expectation falls within the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK021, the black star is highlighted, as shown in FIG. 21-5 (F). By doing so, it becomes easy to understand that the expectation degree suggestion effect has ended.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 21-5 (A) to (F), black stars are displayed one by one, and the degree of expectation indicated by the expectation degree suggestion display is increased by one step. One or more items may be displayed and the degree of expectation may be increased by two or more levels. Alternatively, half the black stars may be displayed, and the degree of expectation may be increased by half a step. In this case, different sounds may be output or the same sound may be output according to the number of displayed stars (the number of stages of the expected degree of rising). For example, the same sound may be output when half a black star is displayed and when one black star is displayed. The same sound may be output when two and a half black stars are displayed and when three black stars are displayed. Further, there may be a case where no sound is output. By doing so, the effect indicating the degree of expectation is diversified, and the effect of the effect is improved. Regardless of the number of steps of the degree of expectation that increases at one time, the same black star image is displayed and fits in the white star of the indication of expectation, and the number of black stars according to the number of steps of the degree of expectation that increases increases Such an effect may be performed.

(Direction mode)
There may be a plurality of effect modes in the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the game effect lamp 9. In different effect modes, even if the same command (for example, a command specifying a variation pattern) is transmitted from the main board 11, effects based on the command are executed in different effect modes. In each effect mode, the background, the character, the motif displayed on the image display device 5, the sound output from the speaker 8, and the like need only be different. The effect mode may be automatically changed according to the number of times of variable display or a game state, or may be changeable by a player's operation.

  FIGS. 21-5 (G) to (L) are examples of the production operation of the title notification and the expectation degree suggestion production in the special mode when the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the production mode. In the normal mode, as shown in FIGS. 21-5 (A) to (F), title notification and expectation degree suggestion effect are executed. In the special mode, the reach effect based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is a reach effect of the super reach D2 having a different effect form from the reach effect of the super reach D. Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is designated, the title 31AK023 of the super reach D2 is displayed as shown in FIG. 21-5 (G). At this time, a sound corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8, but a sound different from the normal mode (for example, a sound having a different voice color) is output. The expectation degree indication 31AK024 in the super reach D2 is not a star but a diamond.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 21-5 (H), a black diamond 31AK025 larger than the star of the expectation degree indication display 31AK024 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 21-5 (I), the black diamond 31AK025 moves and is expected. An effect that fits into one of the white diamonds of the degree suggestion display 31AK024 is executed. At this time, a sound “pong” is output from the speaker 8 indicating that the black diamond indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 21-5 (J) and (K), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the degree of expectation of the reach. When the number of black rhombuses corresponding to the degree of expectation falls in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024, as shown in FIG. 21-5 (L), the black rhombus is highlighted so as to shine. As described above, by making the notification mode of the title different depending on the effect mode (the state when the reach effect is executed) determined according to the selection of the player, the game state, and the like, the effect is diversified, and the effect of the effect is enhanced. improves.

  FIG. 21-5 shows an example of the production operation when the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach D is designated. However, depending on the production mode (the state when the reach production is executed), another reach production (title notification, expectation degree) is performed. (Including a suggested effect) may be made different. Depending on the effect mode (the state when the reach effect is executed), whether to notify the title of the reach or the execution ratio of the title notification may be different. For example, when a predetermined effect mode is selected, the reach title may not be notified. By doing in this way, it is possible to execute the effect according to the preference of the player, and the effect of the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, the degree of expectation is suggested by the number of black stars in the degree of expectation suggestion display, and an expectation suggestion effect of gradually increasing the number of black stars is performed. May be executed to gradually reduce the number of displays that indicate the degree of expectation. Such an expectation suggestion effect may be executed in addition to or in place of the expectation effect effect of this embodiment.

(Other examples of development effects)
In the case of executing the expectation suggestion effect of gradually increasing the display indicating the expectation of the expectation suggestion display, the development effect may be executed after increasing the display indicating the expectation. In this case, when the display indicating the degree of expectation is increased after the development effect, the display to be increased may be displayed at a time instead of in a stepwise manner. For example, as shown in FIG. 21-6 (A), the title of Super Reach D is announced, and after the effect of gradually increasing the number of black stars is completed, the image is displayed as shown in FIG. 21-6 (B). An extended effect in which the button image 31AK031 is displayed on the device 5 is executed. Here, when the operation on the push button 31B is detected, the title 31AK032 of Super Reach C (here, the character of “SP Reach C”) is displayed as shown in FIG. 21-6 (C). , The title of Super Reach C is announced. As described above, when the development effect is performed, the notification of the title of the reach of the development source is switched to the notification of the title of the reach of the development destination. Under the title 31AK032, the expectation degree suggestion indication 31AK033 having three black stars is highlighted. Even if the number of black stars increases by two or more, they are displayed at once. Note that, after the movable body 32 operates, a development effect in which the title and the expected degree suggestion display change may be executed.

(Preliminary production)
In this embodiment, a title announcement for announcing the jackpot reliability is executed as an announcement effect according to the title notification mode (for example, the display color of the title). For example, as shown in FIG. 21A, the title 31AK036 of Super Reach A is displayed in black, and the sound corresponding to the title name of Reach is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of Super Reach A is displayed. Is notified, a title notice in which the display color of the title 31AK036 changes to red is executed as shown in FIG. 21-7 (B). As described above, when the title notice is not executed, the title is displayed in black, and when the title notice is executed, the title is displayed in a color other than black. In the title notice shown in FIG. 21-7, the display mode (display color) of the title may change after the reach title is notified by voice. By doing so, the effect of the notice effect can be enhanced. The timing at which the title is displayed in a color other than black is not limited to this, and the title may be displayed in a color other than black from the start of the display of the title.

  When a title notice in which the title display mode (display color) changes is executed, a sound corresponding to the changed display mode may be output after the title display mode has changed. By doing so, the effect of the notice effect can be enhanced. The title notification by voice may be executed after the title display mode (display color) changes. In this case, a sound corresponding to the display mode (display color) of the title after the change may be output.

(Timing notification execution timing)
It is preferable that the notification of the title during the reach is executed at a timing other than the execution timing of an effect (specific effect) such as a notice effect or an advanced effect that increases the degree of expectation controlled in the jackpot advantageous state. By doing in this way, once the title is announced, an effect of improving the degree of expectation can be executed, so that the player's expectation can be maintained.

  FIG. 21-8 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a notice effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute a notice effect and an effect mode. The announcement effect determination process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process of step S171 in FIG. In the announcement effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern specified from the command transmitted from the main board 11 is a super-reach fluctuation pattern (step 31AKS001).

  If it is a super-reach variation pattern (step 31AKS001; Yes), the display color of the title of the super-reach (whether or not to execute the title notice) is determined (step 31AKS002).

  In step 31AKS002, the display color of the title of the super reach is determined according to the determination result shown in FIG. 21-9 (A), for example, depending on whether the display result is "big hit" or "losing". As shown in FIG. 21A, the display color of the super reach title changes from “black”, “red”, “black” to “red”, and “black” to “fruit pattern”. The ones that change and those that change from “red” to “fruit pattern” are provided, and the big hit reliability increases in this order (ascending order). That is, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the timing of change of the title display color. By doing so, the player pays attention to the timing of the change of the display color of the title, and the effect of the effect is improved.

  Note that the “fruit pattern” may be such that the title character is displayed in bold and the character itself is a “fruit pattern”, or the background portion of the title display area may be a “fruit pattern” . There may be a pattern displayed as a “fruit pattern” from the beginning. For the display color change, the display color may be changed after the title notification is executed, as shown in FIG. 21-7. As for the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be changed according to the timing at which the display color changes. Further, since the title display period varies depending on the type of super reach, the timing at which the display color changes depending on the type of super reach may be different. In the case of a super reach having a long title display period (for example, super reach D or super reach E), a plurality of changing timings may be provided, and the changing timing may be determined to any one. In the case of a super reach having a short title display period (for example, super reach A or super reach B), the number of changing timings may be one or a smaller number than a super reach having a long title display period.

  When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the title is determined in the normal mode at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 21-9 (A), and as shown in FIG. 21-9 (B) in the special mode. The display color of the title is determined at a different rate from the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode. As described above, by making the execution mode (display color and display color change timing) of the title notice different depending on the effect mode, the effect is diversified and the effect of the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a line notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed according to the character display mode (for example, the display color of the line) in the super reach reach effect.

  After the display color of the title of the super reach is determined, the display color of the words of the character in the reach attainment of the super reach (whether or not to execute a speech notice) is determined (step 31AKS003).

  In step 31AKS003, the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect is determined according to whether the display result is “big hit” or “losing”, for example, at a determination ratio shown in FIG. 21-9 (C). As shown in FIG. 21-9 (C), the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect is changed from “white”, “red”, “white” to “red”, and is displayed in this order (ascending order). ) Has increased the jackpot reliability. In other words, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the timing at which the display color of the dialogue changes. By doing so, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the dialogue, and the effect of the effect is improved. In the case where the display color changes, the display color may be changed after the words are displayed. As for the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be changed according to the timing at which the display color changes.

  The big hit reliability may be different depending on the combination of the presentation modes of the title notice and the speech notice. For example, in the case where the same announcement mode (display color) is included in the title announcement and the dialogue announcement, the big hit reliability may be increased when the same announcement mode is achieved. In addition, the big hit reliability may be made different by a combination of the timing of change of the presentation mode between the title notice and the speech notice. For example, when the change timing is the same, the jackpot reliability may be higher than when the change timings are different, or the jackpot reliability may be different depending on which change occurs first. By doing so, it is possible to pay attention to the respective change timings of the title notice and the dialogue notice.

  When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the dialogue may be determined at a different rate in the special mode from that in the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode.

  Note that, in place of the dialogue announcement, an announcement effect for notifying the jackpot reliability based on a change in the effect mode of the reach effect may be executed. In this case, in the notice effect, a plurality of change timings of the effect mode may be provided so that the big hit reliability differs according to the change timing.

  After the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect is determined, or when it is determined that the pattern is not a variation pattern of the super reach (step AK31S001; No), the presence or absence of other notice effects and the effect form are determined (step AK31S004). After that, the determination results in the 31AKS002 to 31AKS004 are stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (Step AK31S005), and the announcement effect determination processing ends.

  Note that in this embodiment, a title advance notice and a dialogue advance notice can be executed in the case of super reach. And at least one of the line announcement may be made executable. In addition, the title notice and the speech notice have been described as being determined by the determination ratio shown in FIG. 21-9, but the determination ratio is arbitrary. For example, even if the determination ratio is changed according to the type of super reach, Good. By doing so, a notice effect can be executed according to the type of the reach, and the effect of the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, the number of executable effect modes (the number of display colors that can be displayed) differs between a title notice and a dialogue notice. By doing in this way, the effects can be varied and the effect of the effects can be enhanced. In the title notice and the dialogue notice, the number of executable effect modes may be arbitrarily changed, and the number and types of executable effect modes may be the same. By doing so, a notice effect with a sense of unity can be executed, and the player can easily grasp the jackpot reliability.

(Action effect)
When the presentation mode of the title notice and the dialogue of the dialogue change, an effect indicating that the presentation mode changes may be executed. For example, an action effect image may be displayed on the image display device 5 and the effect effect may be performed such that the image acts on at least one of a title and a line. Then, after the action effect is executed, the effect mode (display color) of the title or the line may be changed. The effect mode of the action effect (action effect image or the like) may be common to both the title and the line. It should be noted that there may be a case where the effect mode of the title or the dialogue does not change despite the execution of the action effect. In the case of executing the action effect, the presence / absence of execution of the effect effect, the execution timing, and the effect mode may be determined based on the determination result of the title notice and the dialogue notice. Such a determination may be performed in the process of step AK31S004. For example, the ratio at which at least one of the title announcement and the speech announcement changes in the effect mode (the rate at which the effect mode changes due to the action effect) may be different depending on the effect mode of the action effect. The ratio of the effect of the speech notice and that of which effect mode changes (the ratio of acting on which effect) may be different, or the ratio of the color (how many steps) it changes may be different. . By executing such an action effect, when the action effect image is displayed, the player pays attention to which of the title and the line is to be applied, and the effect is improved. When there are a plurality of effect modes, the presence or absence of the effect effect and the effect mode may be determined at different rates depending on the effect mode. By doing in this way, an action effect corresponding to the effect mode can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved.

  As another example of such an action effect, at least one effect mode (display color) of any of the title and the dialogue according to the effect content of the reach effect (for example, the effect content of the character motion or the battle effect). May be changed. In this way, the player pays attention to the content of the reach effect.

  The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the feature section 31AK, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention. For example, all of the features described in the above embodiments are not essential components, and can be omitted as appropriate.

(Sub LCD)
As a sub display device different from the image display device 5, a sub liquid crystal may be provided on the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3. Here, it is referred to as a sub liquid crystal, but the sub display device may be configured by an organic EL or a dot matrix LED. The sub liquid crystal device may be fixed, for example, in the vicinity of the image display device 5, or may be movable or housed. In the sub liquid crystal, various effects such as a notice effect and a display of a hold display are executed. For example, title notification may be executed in the sub liquid crystal. As in the case of the super reach D and the super reach E of the above-described embodiment, when the title is displayed continuously after the notification of the title, the display of the title and the degree of expectation may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal. In this case, the title and the degree of expectation suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal after the image display device 5 notifies the title. This makes it possible to display the title and the expected degree suggestion display without obstructing the super reach effect on the image display device 5, and the title and the expected degree suggestion display can be easily understood.

  In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to notification of a title of a reach effect as a suggestive effect has been described. However, the present invention is applied to title information (notice of mainly displaying characters) relating to other effects. You may. For example, as a notice effect (for example, a look-ahead notice effect), when performing a look-ahead zone effect of shifting to a plurality of zones (stage, effect mode, and the like) in which the background image and the effect mode on the image display device 5 are respectively different, the shifted zone The present invention may be applied to the title notification. When a mission (“Let's reach at 7”, “Use a stick controller to annihilate the enemy”, etc.) is presented, and a mission effect that is in a state advantageous to the player when the mission is completed is executed, The present invention may be applied to notification of a title of a mission.

(Modification 1 of characteristic portion 31AK)
In the above-described embodiment, when it is time to derive the display result, a determined effect for notifying whether or not the display result is a “big hit” is executed, and thereafter, the display result is displayed ( FIG. 21-3 (B)-(D)). Instead of such a determined effect, at a predetermined timing before deriving the display result, an operation effect prompting the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is executed, and when a predetermined operation is detected during the operation valid period. The display result may be displayed by displaying the winning or losing of the battle effect or temporarily stopping the display result. By doing so, the display result is shown according to the operation of the player, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, and the interest can be improved.

  FIGS. 21-10 and 21-11 are diagrams illustrating an example of a super reach effect operation in a modification in which an operation effect is executed and a display result is displayed according to the operation. After reaching the reach mode in the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 21-10 (A), for example, as shown in FIG. 21-10 (B), the character 31AK041 which is a friend character and the character which is an enemy character 31AK042 is displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 21-10 (C) to (F) and FIGS. 21-11 (G) to (I), a reach effect in which the character 31AK041 and the character 31AK042 confront each other is executed.

  With the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 21C, a small button image 31AK043 and a regulation line 31AK044 superimposed on the small button image 31AK043 are displayed at the lower right of the image display device 5. Thereby, an operation effect using the push button 31B is executed, but it is suggested that the reception of the operation is currently restricted.

  In this modification, a plurality of operation effect images indicating that an operation effect is to be executed are prepared. Then, the jackpot reliability differs depending on which operation effect image is displayed and the operation effect is executed. In addition, an image indicating that the operation effect is executed during the reach effect may change to a mode having higher reliability.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 21D, a praying character 31AK045 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. It changes to the large button image 31AK047.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 21-11 (H), a cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 21-11 (I), an effect 31AK049 in which a bullet is fired from the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and a large button image 31AK047. The effect 31AK050 that the bullet hits is displayed. Then, the large button image 31AK047 changes to the stick image 31AK051.

  As described above, in this modification, when the operation effect image changes, the effect effect indicating that the operation effect image changes is executed. The operation effect image may change without accompanying the effect effect. Further, there may be a case where the operation effect image does not change even though the effect effect is executed. The rate at which the operation effect image changes may vary depending on the type of the effect effect.

  Then, a predetermined time before the display result is derived, the regulation line 31AK044 is erased as shown in FIG. 21-11 (J), and the stick image 31AK051 is moved to the center part as shown in FIG. Is displayed, and a display urging the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is displayed. At this time, the operation on the stick controller 31A is an effective operation valid period.

  Here, when the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is detected, an image 31AK052 indicating that the ally character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 21-11 (L). After that, at the timing when the fluctuation time ends, as shown in FIG. 21-11 (M), a fixed decoration symbol which is a big hit combination is derived. If no operation is detected within the predetermined operation validity period, the image shown in FIG. 21-11 (L) is automatically displayed.

  In this modification, there are a small button image, a large button image, and a stick image as operation effect images, and an operation effect using these images in the order of small button image <large button image <stick image is performed. The jackpot reliability is high. Even when an operation effect image with low reliability is displayed, the operation effect image may change to a reliable operation effect image during the reach effect, so that the effect of the effect is improved and the player's sense of expectation is improved. Can be maintained.

  21-10 and FIG. 21-11, the notification of the title of the reach and the indication of the degree of expectation are omitted, but the reach effect shown in FIG. 21-10 and FIG. Or may be appropriately executed in parallel with the operation effect. The determination regarding the operation effect and the operation effect image (whether or not there is an operation effect, the operation effect image to be displayed, whether or not there is an effect effect) may be executed in step 31AKS004 in FIG. 21-8.

(Modification 2 of characteristic portion 31AK)
A suggestion indicating the expectation of control to an advantageous state such as a big hit game state may be displayed. For example, a shutter effect for performing the first suggestion display and a reach title effect for performing the second suggestion display may be executed. In the shutter effect, an effect of covering the screen with a shutter display after the start of the variable display is executed. In the reach title effect, after the reach, an effect of displaying a reach title indicating a development destination of the reach effect is executed. When displaying either the shutter display or the reach title display, a specific image may be included and displayed. The reach title effect may be the same as the title announcement in the above embodiment, or may be another effect determined by another process.

  The specific image is an image with a high jackpot reliability displayed including a plurality of types of elements in the image. The plural types of elements include a banana image of the element E1, a melon image of the element E2, an apple image of the element E3, a watermelon image of the element E4, and a strawberry image of the element E5. The fruit pattern image including these elements E1 to E5 is a specific image. In both the shutter display and the reach title display, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to be visible. The display sizes of the elements E1 to E5 constituting the specific image are changed and displayed according to the difference in display size between the shutter display and the reach title display. In addition, all the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to fit in the shutter display and the reach title display, respectively.

  When the shutter effect is executed after the start of the variable display, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the big hit reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. In addition, when a reach title is displayed during execution of the reach effect, when a fruit pattern image is displayed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. When the fruit pattern is not displayed, for example, a plain image that does not include the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Note that an image pattern other than the fruit pattern image may be prepared as an image indicating the jackpot reliability when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. For example, a white image <a blue image <a red image <a fruit pattern image may be prepared in the order of the jackpot reliability (for example, a red shutter or a red title reach title). Then, one of the image patterns may be selected by a predetermined random number lottery depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit.

  When performing the shutter display and the reach title display, even when a fruit pattern is displayed, the speaker 8 outputs a notification of outputting a common sound (melody) and also notifies the game effect lamp 9 of light emission. The common sound and the emission control of the game effect lamp 9 indicate to the player that the fruit pattern is a special image. When such a shutter display and a reach title display are performed, common notification for the fruit pattern is executed. In the reach title display, a specific sound (voice) is further output after the common notification. Note that the output period of the common sound and the specific sound may partially overlap.

  FIG. 21-12 is a display screen diagram when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. As shown in FIG. 21A, when the shutter effect is performed, the shutter image 31AK061 is displayed on the image display device 5 at the start of the variable display. On the shutter image 31AK061, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. In addition, when the shutter effect is performed, the notification that the common sound (melody) is output by the speaker 8 is performed and the notification by the emission of the game effect lamp 9 is performed. When the closed shutter is opened, as shown in FIG. 21-12 (b), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Downward arrows indicate variable display of left, middle, and right symbols. When the variable display of the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 21D, the super reach effect is started. The variable display is, for example, displayed small in the upper right of the screen, and a character is displayed on the left side of the screen. At the lower right of the screen, a reach title image 31AK062 is displayed, and the contents of the super reach to be executed are shown as reach title display. In the reach title image 31AK062, a fruit pattern image including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. In the reach title image 31AK062, the characters "Battle Reach" indicating that a reach effect accompanied by a battle effect is executed are displayed.

  In addition, when the reach title effect is executed, the notification that the common sound (melody) is output by the speaker 8 is executed and the notification by the emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. Further, after outputting the common sound, an effect is executed in which the character emits a specific sound (voice) indicating that the hit reliability is high, such as "hot hot". Here, in the reach title effect, the size of the suggestion display to be displayed is smaller than in the shutter effect. However, in this way, in the reach title effect, by outputting the specific sound, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the fruit pattern image is displayed. Although the case where the common sound and the specific sound have completely separated output periods has been described, the output periods may partially overlap.

  Thereafter, a battle reach effect as shown in FIG. 21-12 (e) is executed. An enemy character is displayed on the left side of the screen, and an ally character is displayed on the right side of the screen. When the ally character wins the battle with the enemy character, the character “BATTLE WIN!” Is displayed at the upper left of the screen. It is announced that the jackpot has been confirmed by winning the battle. When the battle effect ends, the display returns to the variable display screen using the original numeric symbols. As shown in FIG. 21F, all the symbols are stopped, and the big hit symbol of “777” is displayed.

  As shown in FIGS. 21A and 21D, both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 are displayed including all the elements E1 to E5 constituting the fruit pattern image. In this way, the fruit pattern image can be suitably displayed in both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 having different display sizes. Thereby, it is possible to accurately convey that the fruit pattern image with a high jackpot reliability is displayed.

  The display size of the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 21-12 (a) is displayed larger than the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 21-12 (d). Therefore, the difference between the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 and the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 can be noticed.

  Further, the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 21-12 (a) and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 21-12 (d) are displayed at different timings. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the fruit pattern image, which is the specific image, from being difficult to see due to the overlapping of the execution timings.

  The determination regarding the shutter effect (the presence or absence of the shutter effect and the effect mode) may be performed in step 31AKS004 in FIG. 21-8. In this case, the determination regarding the shutter effect may be performed based on the determination result of the title display color in step 31AKS002 in FIG. 21-8. For example, when it is determined that the display color of the title is a fruit pattern, the shutter effect of the fruit pattern may be easily executed. Also, the determination regarding the reach title effect may be executed in step 31AKS004 in FIG. 21-8 together with the determination regarding the shutter effect.

[Explanation about the characteristic part 21TM]
Next, the characteristic portion 21TM will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is mounted with various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, and a terminal board (information output board) 21TM016 as shown in FIG. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also provided with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 and the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  As shown in FIG. 2 described above, the main board 11 includes a first starting port switch 22A and a second starting port switch 22B, and a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B. Various components are connected, and various effect devices such as speakers 8L and 8R and a game effect lamp 9 are connected to the effect control board 12, but these devices are omitted in FIG. 22-1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side. As shown in FIG. 22C, the main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being accommodated in the board case 21TM201, and progresses the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Various circuits for control are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like are provided. In addition, the main board 11 controls the lighting / extinguishing of each LED (for example, a segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to perform the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Of the predetermined display symbol, such as controlling the variation display of the normal symbol, and controlling the variation display of the ordinary symbol by the ordinary symbol display 20 by performing lighting / off / coloring control of the ordinary symbol display 20. It also has a control function.

  As shown in FIGS. 22-3 and 22-5 (A), the main board 11 is provided with a display monitor 21TM029 which can be viewed from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It also has a function of displaying various winning information related to winning. A display changeover switch 21TM030 is provided on the left side of the display monitor 21TM029, and information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 can be switched by operating the display changeover switch 21TM030.

  The main board 11 receives various signals such as a power-off signal, a clear signal, and a reset signal in addition to detection signals from, for example, the game control microcomputer 100 and various switches for detecting game balls, and the game control microcomputer. An information output circuit 112 for outputting various signals such as a security signal from the switch circuit 110 for transmission to the terminal 100 and the terminal board 21TM016 is mounted.

  The main substrate 11 shown in FIG. 22A is sealed in a substrate case 21TM201 made of a synthetic resin material having transparency as shown in FIGS. 22-3 and 22-5 (A). A display monitor 21TM029 (for example, 7 segments) is arranged at the center of 11, and a display changeover switch 21TM030 is arranged on the right side of the display monitor 21TM029. The display monitor 21TM029 and the display changeover switch 21TM030 are arranged on the front when the main board 11 is viewed. A lock switch 21TM051 (see FIG. 22A) for switching to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is provided at the lower center of the rear surface of the main board 11. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized in a state where the gaming machine frame 3 is not opened, the front face when viewing the main board 11 refers to the back side of the game board 2 in a state where the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. This is the front when viewing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front when viewing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

  The main board 11 (the game control microcomputer 100) has a winning opening (large winning opening, second starting winning opening, first starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning opening, hereinafter referred to as "entry area"). ), And the various kinds of winning information such as the connection ratio and the winning combination based on the counting are displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, and the winning information is displayed. Thereby, various winning information such as the connection ratio and the winning combination after the installation in the game hall can be confirmed. That is, on the maker side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is usual that the game board surface is designed so that the game ball enters the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency (so as to pass the test). When the test is performed, it is checked whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency. Further, even after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, it is confirmed what kind of adjustment has been made, and as a result of the adjustment, whether the game ball has entered the general winning opening as designed. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustment has been made after the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been installed.

  The power supply board is enclosed in a board case made of a synthetic resin material having transparency. On the lower right side of the back of the power supply board, set values such as a jackpot winning probability (a payout rate) described later are changed. A clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 functioning as a setting switch for power supply and a power switch 21TM055 are provided. By operating the power switch 21TM055 in a state where the power supply voltage is not supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, a store clerk or the like at the amusement arcade operates the main control board 11, the game control board 12, the payout control board 21TM037, and so on. A predetermined operating voltage is supplied. Furthermore, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated at the timing when the power switch 21TM055 is operated, a clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100, and an initialization process (RAM clear) described later is performed. Be executed. By arranging the power switch 21TM055 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 close to each other on the same power supply board, the power-on operation and the initialization operation are facilitated.

  The lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 which can be opened by a predetermined key operation is opened. Thus, only a clerk having a predetermined key can operate. In addition, since the lock switch 21TM051 requires key operation, among the store clerks of the amusement shop, only the store clerk having the key for operating the lock switch 21TM051 can be operated. The lock switch 21TM051 is a switch that can execute an ON / OFF switching operation by a predetermined key. The lock switch 21TM051 can execute the switching operation and execute an operation different from the switching operation (for example, a pressing operation). A possible switch may be used.

  The lock switch 21TM051 can maintain the ON state or the OFF state. That is, the lock switch 21TM051 can maintain the ON state or the OFF state even if no force is applied by a store clerk or the like at the game arcade. The lock switch 21TM051 has a configuration in which a key can be inserted and removed only in the OFF state. According to such a configuration, the clerk at the game hall or the like must turn off the lock switch 21TM051 in order to collect the key. Can be prevented.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 22C, the lower part of the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided for discharging the gaming balls that have won each winning opening and the gaming balls that have entered the out opening to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A nozzle (discharge port) is provided, and a discharge port switch 21TM070 for detecting a game ball discharged from the pachinko gaming machine 1 (detecting a shot game ball) is provided in the nozzle. ing. The outlet switch 21TM070 is connected to the above-described switch circuit 110 as shown in FIG.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, an audio control command used to control audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. And an LED control command used to control the lighting operation of the decoration LED and the like.

  FIG. 22B is a block diagram illustrating components related to payout, such as the payout control board 21TM037 and the ball payout device 21TM097. As shown in FIG. 22B, a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 including a payout control CPU 21TM371 is mounted on the payout control board 21TM037. In this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a one-chip microcomputer and has at least a built-in RAM. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, a RAM (not shown), a ROM (not shown) storing a payout control program, an I / O port, and the like constitute a payout control board 21TM037. That is, the payout control board 21TM037 is realized by the payout control CPU 21TM371, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 having RAM and ROM, and the I / O port. Further, the I / O port may be built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  The detection signals from the ball out switch 21TM187, the full tank switch 21TM048, and the payout number count switch 21TM301 are input to the I / O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. In this embodiment, the detection signal from the payout number count switch 21TM301 is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and then is output to the main board 11 via the I / O port 21TM372a and the output circuit 21TM373B. .

  As shown in FIG. 22-2, the payout control board 21TM037 has a game machine frame opening sensor for detecting the opening of the game machine frame 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2, and the front of the game board 2 can be opened and closed. And a door frame opening sensor 21TM300 which is provided with a door frame opening sensor for detecting the opening of the glass door frame 3a to be covered, and various abnormalities are detected based on detection signals output from these sensors. It also has a function to determine the occurrence of (error). The detection signal when the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected and the detection signal when the opening of the glass door frame 3a is detected are input to different terminals, so that the payout control microcomputer is input. 21TM370 is capable of recognizing the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a separately.

  The detection signal from the payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is input to the I / O port 21TM372e of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. The payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is a sensor including a light emitting element (LED) and a light receiving element for detecting the rotational position of the payout motor 21TM289, and is used to detect that a game ball is clogged, that is, to detect a so-called ball bite. . The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 indicates that the detection signal from the ball-out switch 21TM187 indicates the ball-out state, or the detection signal from the full-state switch 21TM048 indicates the full-state. Then, the ball payout process is stopped.

  Further, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates the full tank state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the low level to the firing board 21TM090 in order to stop the ball firing from the hit ball firing device. Outputs a full signal. The firing motor signal to the firing motor 21TM094 output from the AND circuit 21TM091 of the firing board 21TM090 is transmitted from the firing board 21TM090 to the firing motor 21TM094. A full signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is input to one of the input sides of an AND circuit 21TM091 mounted on the launch board 21TM090, and a drive signal from the drive signal generation circuit 21TM092 (for driving the launch motor 21TM094). Signal, which serves to supply power from the power supply board.) Is input to the other of the input sides of the AND circuit 21TM091. Then, the firing motor signal of the AND circuit 21TM091 is input to the firing motor 21TM094. That is, while the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is outputting the full signal, the output of the firing motor signal to the firing motor 21TM094 is stopped.

   The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has a built-in serial communication circuit 21TM380 for inputting / outputting (transmitting / receiving) signals through serial communication with the game control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment, the connection between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is established between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the serial communication circuits 21TM505 and 21TM380. In order to perform confirmation, signals (prize ball request signals and received ACK signals) are exchanged (transmitted and received) at regular intervals (for example, one second). That is, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a signal (prize ball request signal in this embodiment) for confirming the connection at regular intervals via the serial communication circuit 21TM505, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 When the prize ball request signal is received from the game control microcomputer 100, the signal transmits a signal (received ACK signal) notifying the reception to the game control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment, specific data is added to the prize ball request signal and the received ACK signal, so that the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can transmit and receive the prize ball request signal and the received ACK signal. And specific data is exchanged between them. For example, when a prize is generated, the game control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out by changing predetermined bits of a prize ball request signal, and sets the prize for which the setting has been made. The ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 completes the prize ball payout operation, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the data indicating the end of the prize ball by changing a predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and transmits the set received ACK signal to the game. It is transmitted to the control microcomputer 100. When a predetermined error (error such as lending, filling up, or running out of ball) occurs, data indicating the content of the error is set by changing a predetermined bit of the received ACK signal. The received reception ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The specific signal exchange between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 by serial communication will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 22-22 and FIGS.

   The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits, via the output port 21TM372b, a prize ball information signal indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out and a ball lending number signal indicating the number of lending balls to a terminal board (an external terminal board for a frame and an external terminal board for a board). Is output to 21TM160. Although a driver circuit is provided outside the output port 21TM372b, it is omitted in FIG. 22-2.

  Further, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs an error signal to the error display LED 21TM374 using a 7-segment LED via the output port 21TM372c. Further, a signal for instructing turning on / off is output to prize ball LED21TM053 and ball out LED21TM054 via output port 21TM372b. The detection signal from the error release switch 21TM375 for releasing the error state is input to the input port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037. The error release switch 21TM375 is used to release an error state by software reset.

  Further, the drive signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 to the payout motor 21TM289 is transmitted to the payout motor 21TM289 in the payout mechanism of the ball payout device 21TM097 via the output port 21TM372a and the relay board 21TM072. Although a driver circuit (motor drive circuit) is provided outside the output port 21TM372a, it is omitted in FIG. 22-3.

  A card unit control microcomputer is mounted on the card unit 21TM050 installed adjacent to the gaming machine. Further, the card unit 21TM050 is provided with a usable indicator lamp, a connecting stand direction indicator, a card insertion indicator lamp, and a card insertion slot. A frequency display LED 21TM060, a ball lending enable LED 21TM061, a ball lending switch 21TM062, and a return switch 21TM063 are connected to the interface board (relay board) 21TM066.

  From the interface board 21TM066, the card unit 21TM050 is provided with a ball rental switch signal indicating that the ball rental switch 21TM062 has been operated and a return switch signal indicating that the return switch 21TM063 has been operated in response to the operation of the player. . In addition, a card balance display signal indicating the balance of the prepaid card and a ball lending permission display signal are given from the card unit 21TM050 to the interface board 21TM066. Between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037, a connection signal (VL signal), a unit operation signal (BRDY signal), a ball lending request signal (BRQ signal), a ball lending completion signal (EXS signal), and a pachinko machine operation signal ( PRDY signal) is transmitted and received via the input port 21TM372f and the output port 21TM372d. An interface board 21TM066 is interposed between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037. Therefore, a signal such as a connection signal (VL signal) is transmitted and received between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037 via the interface board 21TM066, as shown in FIG.

  When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 outputs a PRDY signal to the card unit 21TM050. When the power is turned on, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a VL signal. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 determines the connection state / non-connection state of the card unit 21TM050 based on the input state of the VL signal. When the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch is operated to input the ball lending switch signal, the microcomputer for controlling the card unit outputs a BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the microcomputer for controlling the card unit outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037.

  Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 raises the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050, and when detecting the fall of the BRQ signal from the card unit 21TM050, drives the payout motor 21TM289 to send a predetermined number of loaned balls to the player. Pay out. When the payout is completed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 lowers the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050. Thereafter, under the condition that the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 is not in the ON state, when a payout command signal is received from the game control microcomputer 100, award ball payout control is executed.

  The power supply voltage AC24V used in the card unit 21TM050 is supplied from the payout control board 21TM037. That is, power supply from the power supply board to the card unit 21TM050 is performed via the payout control board 21TM037 and the interface board 21TM066. In this example, a fuse for protecting the card unit 21TM050 is provided in a power supply line of 24V AC to the card unit 21TM050 provided in the interface board 21TM066, and a voltage higher than a predetermined voltage is supplied to the card unit 21TM050. Is prevented.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment has a configuration in which a jackpot winning probability (payout rate) changes according to a set value. More specifically, in a special symbol normal process of a special symbol process process to be described later, a jackpot winning probability (a payout ratio) is changed by using a display result determination table (winning probability) corresponding to a set value. . The set value is made up of six steps of 1 to 6, where 6 is the highest payout rate, and the lower the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the advantage gradually decreases.

  FIGS. 22A to 22F are explanatory diagrams illustrating display result determination tables corresponding to the respective set values. The display result determination table is a set of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In each of the display result determination tables, the variable special figure designating buffer is 1 (first), that is, the first special symbol is a target of the variable display, and the variable special figure designating buffer is 2 (second). That is, for each of the cases where the second special symbol is subjected to the variable display, the determination value for the big hit is set.

  As shown in FIG. 22A, when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1 is used, the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is the target of the variable display. , The jackpot is won with a lower probability (1/300) than when the set values are “2”, “3”, “4”, “5”, and “6”. ing. Further, when the variable special figure designating buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designating buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is also subject to variable display, the big hit is won with the same probability (1/300) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 22-4 (B), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2 and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”. The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/280) than in a certain case. Further, when the variable special figure designating buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designating buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is also the subject of variable display, the big hit is won with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is the target of variable display.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 22C, when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 3 is used, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is “1”. The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/280) than in the case of "2". Further, when the variable special figure designating buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designating buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is also the subject of variable display, the big hit is won with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is the target of variable display.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 22D, when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 4 is used, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is “1”. The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/250) than in the case of "2" or "3". Further, when the variable special figure designating buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designating buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is also the subject of the variable display, the big hit is won with the same probability (1/250) as the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 22E, when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 5, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/235) than in the case of "2", "3", and "4". Further, when the variable special figure designating buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designating buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is also the subject of the variable display, the big hit is won with the same probability (1/235) as the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 22F, when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 5 is used, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is “1”. The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/220) than in the cases of "2", "3", "4", and "5". Further, when the variable special figure designating buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designating buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is also the subject of the variable display, the big hit is won with the same probability (1/220) as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display.

  That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and determines whether the value of MR1 corresponds to one of the big hits shown in FIGS. If it matches the hit determination value, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit A to big hit F). That is, the winning of the jackpot is determined with a probability according to the set value. The “probability” shown in FIGS. 22-4 (A) to (F) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. To determine whether or not to make a big hit means to determine whether or not to control to a big hit game state, but to determine whether to stop the symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. It is also to decide whether to make a big hit symbol.

  In this embodiment, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit using the display result determination tables shown in FIGS. 22A to 22F. Provided separately, the jackpot determination is performed by using a common table for the case of the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of the variable display of the second special symbol regardless of the variable special figure designation buffer. Is also good.

  In this embodiment, a total of six setting values 1 to 6 are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the present invention is not limited to this. May be set to 2, 3, 4, 5, or 7 or more.

  Here, a description will be given of the display of the total of the game balls and the ratio of the accessory, etc. on the main board 11 of this embodiment.

  The main board 11 has information on winning of a game, for example, the number of prize balls by winning the first starting winning opening (navel), the number of winning balls by winning the second starting winning opening (electric chew), the large winning opening. The number of prize balls and the total number of prize balls due to winning in the (Attacker) are input, and the number of firing balls are totaled. Percentage (%), which is the percentage of the total prize balls, and the percentage of the total number of prize balls by winning in the second starting winning opening (Den Chu) and the number of prize balls by winning in the large winning opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls A base ratio (%), which is a ratio of a certain combination (%) and a ratio of the total number of award balls to the number of game balls launched, is displayed. The repetition ratio is a ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls (the number of continuous character-acquired balls described below) due to a prize in a large winning opening (attacker). The winning combination is the number of winning balls in the second starting winning opening (denchu) and the number of winning balls in the winning opening (attacker) out of the total number of winning balls (the following number of winning balls). Is the percentage that is accounted for. The base is the ratio of the number of game balls launched to the total number of prize balls. The total number of prize balls (the total number of balls obtained as described below) includes the number of prize balls by winning in the big winning opening (attacker), the number of prize balls by winning in the second starting winning opening (denchu), and the large winning opening. (Attacker) and the total number of prize balls by winning a prize port (first start prize port, general prize port) other than the second start prize port (electric chute). The special winning opening (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew) are variable characters, and the passing ratio of the game balls varies, so that the expected winning ratio of the game balls varies. is there. In addition, the winning openings (first starting winning opening, general winning opening) other than the large winning opening (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew) are fixed auditors, and the passable width of the game ball is fixed. As a result, the expected winning percentage of the game balls is a fixed character.

  As a method of totaling and calculating information on winning of the game, the connection ratio and the winning ratio are determined by winning the first starting winning opening (navel) and the general winning opening (sode) in the number of winning balls of 6000 pieces. The number of balls (general prize balls), the number of prize balls by winning in the second starting winning opening (Den Chu), the number of ordinary electric prize balls (den Chu balls), and winning in the big winning opening (attacker) The number of special electric prize balls (the number of attacker prize balls), which is the number of prize balls, is counted. The total is taken as one set, and the connection ratio (%) and the winning combination (%) for 10 sets, that is, 60000 pieces are calculated. The number of prize balls (general prize balls), the number of ordinary electric prize prize balls (the number of prize balls), and the special telephone The number of role prize balls (the number of attacker prize balls) is recorded in a ring buffer provided for each set value, has a recording capacity of at least 11 sets, and is updated for each set. ing. In other words, the storage of 11 sets of 6000 pieces is stored in a considerable amount (for example, several bytes), and the cumulative ratio (%) and the winning combination (%) of the totals can be calculated. As for the base, the number of launched game balls with respect to the number of 60000 awarded balls is totaled. The total is taken as one set, and the ratio (base (%)) of 60,000 prize balls to the number of launched game balls is calculated.

  The display monitor 21TM029 displays the base ratio (%), the combination ratio (%), the total connection ratio (%), the combination ratio (%), and the last calculated 6000 prize balls (6000). The base 1 (%)) and the base (base 2 (%)) calculated based on the immediately preceding 60000 prize balls can be switched and displayed every predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). That is, six displays are switched and displayed by one display means. In this case, it takes 30 seconds to complete the display, but the number of prize balls due to winning in the first starting winning opening (navel) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew) are counted as the game progresses. The number of prize balls due to winning, and the number of prize balls due to winning a large winning opening (attacker) will change. If, for example, the prize balls won after displaying the repetition ratio (%) for 6000 are reflected in the winning ratio (%) for 60,000 displayed thereafter, for example, There is a possibility that a discrepancy may occur between the connection ratio (%) and the combination ratio (%) of 60000 pieces. Therefore, the number of award balls by winning the first starting winning opening (navel), the number of award balls by winning the second starting winning opening (electric chew), the number of award balls by winning a large winning opening (attacker), the award ball Such a discrepancy can be prevented by inputting and summing the total number at a predetermined timing in the switching display (for example, a display timing of a connection ratio (%) of 6000 pieces).

  In this embodiment, a storage area for storing information related to a game winning is provided for each set value, and includes a general winning prize ball, a first starting winning prize ball, a normal electric winning prize ball, and a special electric winning. The prize balls, the total prize balls, and the total hits are stored in a storage area (ring buffer) corresponding to the set value. For this reason, the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base in this embodiment can be individually calculated for each set value.

  In the following, as an example of the calculation method, the total number of prize balls is 60,000, and the number of prize balls by winning in the second starting winning opening (denchu) and the number of winning balls by winning in the large winning opening (attacker) are described below. A method of calculating the ratio of the bonuses (ratio (%)) when the total number of the bonuses acquired balls is 42,000 will be described. In the following description, the total number of acquired balls refers to the total cumulative number of game media (prize balls) paid out from the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, the number of obtained ball is the cumulative number of game media paid out when the game media wins the attacker and the electric chew. In addition, the number of continuous role-acquiring balls refers to the cumulative number of game media paid out when the game media wins the attacker. The total hits refers to the cumulative number of game media hit into the pachinko gaming machine 1 until the number of prize balls reaches 60000. For this reason, the connection ratio can be obtained by the following equation (1). Further, the winning combination can be obtained by the following equation (2). The base can be obtained by the following equation (3).

  Connection ratio = [Number of consecutive bonus balls acquired / Total number of acquisitions] × 100 (1)

  Role ratio = [(number of consecutive role-acquired balls + number of role-acquired balls) / total number of acquired] × 100 (2)

  Base = [60000 (total number of prize balls) / total hits] x 100 ... (3)

  In the case where the total number of prize balls is 60000 and the number of obtained bonus balls is 42,000, the bonus ratio is obtained as 0.70 (three digits after the decimal point are cut off) by dividing 42,000 by 60000. However, since the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot perform calculations below the decimal point, calculations using the following method are required.

  First, the first calculation method will be described. In the first calculation method, first, the number of the accessory acquisition balls is multiplied by 100 to be 4200000. Then, this 4200000 is divided by 60000. As a result, 70 is obtained as a quotient. From the 70 obtained here, the accessory ratio is obtained as 70%. That is, by multiplying the dividend by 100, the calculation result up to two decimal places can be obtained. Here, when calculating the calculation result up to three digits after the decimal point, the calculation result may be multiplied by 1000.

  Next, a second calculation method will be described. In the second calculation method, first, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 to be 600. Then, 42000 is divided by 600. As a result, 70 is obtained as a quotient. From the 70 obtained here, the accessory ratio is obtained as 70%. That is, by dividing the divisor by 100, the calculation result up to two decimal places can be obtained. Here, when calculating the calculation result up to three digits after the decimal point, the calculation result may be divided by 1000.

  In the above example, the total number of prize balls is 60000, but a three-byte area is provided as an area for storing the total number of prize balls in order to calculate a long-lived bonus ratio. That is, in this example, 00EA60h is stored in the 3-byte storage area. Similarly, 00A410h is also stored in the storage area of 3 bytes for the number of the accessory acquisition balls.

  Here, the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can only perform an operation between values of a maximum of 2 bytes. Therefore, the lower one byte may be truncated to facilitate the operation.

  Here, a third calculation method that is performed by simplifying the second calculation method will be described. In the third calculation method, the lower one byte 60h is rounded down to 00EA60h of the total number of prize balls, so that the total number of prize balls is 00EAh, that is, 00EA60h of the total number of prize balls, so that the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can easily calculate. 234 is calculated in decimal notation. Similarly, the lower one byte 10h is rounded down to 00A410h of the number of the accessory acquisition balls, and the number of the accessory acquisition balls is calculated as 00A4h, that is, 164 in decimal notation.

  Then, similarly to the second calculation method, 2 is calculated by dividing the total number of winning balls by 100 (273/100). Then, 156 is divided by 2 to obtain 78 as a quotient. From the 78 obtained here, the accessory ratio is obtained as 78%.

  In the third calculation method, while the calculation by the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is facilitated, an error of + 12% occurs. However, the error when the total number of prize balls and the number of obtained ball are 10 times is + 1%. In other words, the error is reduced as the period for calculating the accessory ratio becomes longer, and the error approximates to the original value.

The board case 21TM201 is formed of a material having a light-transmitting property so that the main board 11 and the display monitor 21TM029 are visible. The board case 21TM201 has a hole (not shown) through which a wiring connector connected to the main board 11 is inserted, and a heat radiating hole for releasing heat of electric components of the main board 11. The display monitor 21TM029 provided on the main board 11 is arranged at a position where the heat radiation hole is not directly in front. For this reason, the visibility of the display monitor 21TM029 is not blocked by the heat radiating holes. Here, “directly in front” means directly in front of the main board 11 as a viewpoint, and means between an employee or the like who wants to view the main board 11 and the main board 11.
Here, the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can only perform an operation between values of a maximum of 2 bytes. Therefore, the lower one byte may be truncated to facilitate the operation.

  Here, a third calculation method that is performed by simplifying the second calculation method will be described. In the third calculation method, the lower one byte 60h is rounded down to 00EA60h of the total number of prize balls, so that the total number of prize balls is 00EAh, that is, 00EA60h of the total number of prize balls, so that the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can easily calculate. 234 is calculated in decimal notation. Similarly, the lower one byte 10h is rounded down to 00A410h of the number of the accessory acquisition balls, and the number of the accessory acquisition balls is calculated as 00A4h, that is, 164 in decimal notation.

  Then, similarly to the second calculation method, 2 is calculated by dividing the total number of winning balls by 100 (273/100). Then, 156 is divided by 2 to obtain 78 as a quotient. From the 78 obtained here, the accessory ratio is obtained as 78%.

  In addition, a storage area in which information on game winning is stored (ring buffer, 10 sets total buffer (sum of information on game winning stored in a ring buffer provided with 10 counters of up to 2 bytes), award ball The total number buffer) may not be initialized when the reset button is operated, and may be stored continuously. The ring buffer will be further described later. It should be noted that the checksum of the stored value is calculated, and initialization is performed when an abnormality is detected. Initialization of the storage area for storing information related to the winning of the game when an event that cannot occur as a situation is detected, such as when the value of the number of consecutive bonus balls obtained is larger than the value of the number of balls obtained. Processing may be performed. Further, an error display, a warning display, or the like may be performed without performing the initialization process, or the error display or the warning display may be performed, or the initialization process may be performed after the display. The error display and the warning display will be further described later.

  The calculation of the winning combination (%) is, for example, assuming that the total number of acquired balls is 34321 and the number of acquired items is 19876, the divisor is divided by 19321 to 34321 to calculate the ratio. 19876/34321 = 0.57912... It is calculated that the winning combination (%) is about 57.9%. When performing calculations in the game control microcomputer 100, calculations with decimal points must be avoided, and therefore, the following formulas are used. In the division of 19876/34321, the denominator 34321 is divided by 100, and the decimal point is truncated to be 19876/343 = 57.9475. Since the fractional part is rounded down, it is calculated to be 57% of the duty ratio (%) and is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. In this example, the value calculated by the accurate calculation is different from the value calculated by the accurate calculation on the display. There will be no.

  The minimum value in 16 bits is 32768 (the value other than the value of the most significant bit is 0), and the value with the largest error is when the total number of acquired balls and the number of accessory acquired balls are 32799. If this is calculated by the above method, 32799/32799 = 100%, and if it is replaced with the calculation by the game control microcomputer 100, 32799/327 = 100.3%, an error of + 0.3% is obtained. When the calculation is performed with the decimal point truncated, for example, the accurate value is 69.9%, and when the value calculated by the game control microcomputer is 70.1%, the display is changed from 69% to 70% by 1%. Although it is conceivable that an error of% is displayed, the combination ratio (%) (or the connection ratio (%)) can be displayed with a very small error on the display of the error of 1%.

  When the above calculation method is used, since the total number of obtained balls is divided by 100, the calculation cannot be performed if the total number of obtained balls is less than 100. Further, the error gradually increases even when the value is less than 32768. If it is less than 10,000, the error may exceed 1% and may be even larger. In other words, the smaller the total number of acquired balls, the larger the error. Therefore, until the total number of acquired balls equal to or more than a specific number (for example, 32768 which is the minimum value of 16 bits) is counted by the counter, the display ratio (%) and the connection ratio (%) are not displayed on the display monitor. Even if the display is performed, the fact that there is a possibility that the error is large may be notified by emitting a dedicated LED, outputting a notification sound, or blinking the displayed value.

  Further, the display monitor 21TM029 displays the combination ratio (%), the connection ratio (%), and the base (%) on seven segments, and switches each value every predetermined period (for example, every 5 seconds). To display. In this case, for example, while the position ratio (%) is displayed for 5 seconds, an event occurs in which a game medium newly wins in the electric chute or the attacker, and the value calculated accordingly changes the ratio ( %), The value of the winning combination (%) may be different from the value of the consecutive winning (%). For this reason, it is preferable that the combination ratio (%) and the connection ratio (%) are calculated within the same interrupt and the calculated values are sequentially displayed.

  Also, when the numerical value that can be displayed in seven segments is two digits (for example, when two seven segments are provided), 100% cannot be displayed as 100. In this case, 99 may be displayed instead of 100. In the display monitor 21TM029 shown in FIG. 22-5 (A), a numerical value can be displayed in the lower two digits, but in this case, the numerical value may be displayed without using the upper two digits. Alternatively, a numerical value may be displayed in a part of the upper two digits under a specific condition.

  In this embodiment, an example has been described in which a sensor provided in each of the attacker and the electric chew detects that a game medium has won, and the number of award balls is individually counted based on the detection result. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and uses a sensor provided after a discharge passage for discharging a game medium that has won the attacker and a game medium that has won the electric chew has been used, and the detection result is used as the detection result. On the basis of this, the number of the acquired accessory balls and the number of the consecutive accessory acquired balls may be totaled.

  Hereinafter, the display of the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base will be described more specifically. In this embodiment, the main board 11 is provided on the back side of the game board 2 (see FIG. 22C). On the back side of the gaming board 2, in addition to the main board 11, peripheral boards such as an effect control board 12 are also provided.

  The RAM 102 on the main board 11 includes a gate passing number counter, a first starting winning number counter, a second starting winning number counter, a first general winning number counter, a second general winning number counter, a third general winning number counter, and a fourth general winning number counter. A general winning number counter and a large winning number counter are provided. In this embodiment, an example is shown in which the number of winnings of a special winning opening (attacker) is counted by a special winning number counter. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and these first special winnings are not limited to this. A first grand prize counter for counting the number of prizes to the mouth and a second grand prize counter for counting the number of prizes to the second grand prize are separately provided, and the number of prizes to the first grand prize is determined. And the number of winnings in the second big winning opening may be separately totalized, and the respective winning numbers may be summed up to be the number of winnings in the attacker.

  The gate passage number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the gate switch 21. The first start winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first start port switch 22A. The second start winning number counter is a counter for counting the number of game balls detected by the second start port switch 22B. The first general winning number counter to the fourth general winning number counter are counters for counting the number of game balls detected by the first general winning opening switch to the fourth general winning opening switch. The large winning number counter is a counter for counting the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23.

  A clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is connected to the power supply board shown in FIG. The clear switch 21TM052 is arranged on the rear side surface of the game board 2 at a position where an employee or the like cannot easily operate it. By operating the clear switch 21TM052, the data used for the connection ratio and the combination stored in the RAM 102 described later is cleared. The clear switch is a switch which is operated when a situation arises in which the calculation of the ratio or the combination of the ratios has to be performed again, for example, when a failure occurs in the calculation of the ratio or the ratio of the ratios in 21TM052. For this reason, this switch does not need to be operated when collecting data for calculating a normal connection ratio or a winning combination. When the clear switch 21TM052 is operated, a clear switch operation signal is transmitted to the main board 11 in addition to clearing the data.

  As described above, the main board 11 is provided with the RTC 106, and the RTC 106 can detect the current time. The RTC 106 can measure a predetermined time, elapsed time, and the like by performing the initial setting. In this embodiment, the RTC 106 can measure the business hours of the game hall.

  The main board 11 is housed in a board case 21TM201 as shown in FIG. The caulking pin 21TM011B is attached to the board case 21TM201. With the provision of the caulking pins 21TM011B, the main board 11 is completely sealed in the board case 21TM201, thereby preventing improper acts on the main board 11. The board case 21TM201 is a swaged board case (hereinafter also referred to as a "swage board case").

  The display monitor 21TM029 is provided on the main board 11. Further, a sealing seal 21TM011S for proving that the main substrate 11 is sealed is attached to the substrate case 21TM201. The sealing seal 21TM011S is affixed, for example, across the removed portion of the board case 21TM201. The seal 21TM011S is arranged at a position distant from the main substrate 11, and is arranged at a position different from a position where visibility of the display monitor 21TM029 is blocked, such as directly in front of the display monitor 21TM029. As described above, the display monitor 21TM029 is arranged at a position which is not hidden by the seal 21TM011S.

  The display monitor 21TM029 includes a first display unit 21TM029A, a second display unit 21TM029B, a third display unit 21TM029C, a fourth display unit 21TM029D, and a fifth display unit 21TM029E. Each of the first display unit 21TM029A to the fifth display unit 21TM029E is composed of seven segments composed of seven segments that draw the character “8” and dots arranged at the lower right side of the seven segments. The first display unit 21TM029A to the fifth display unit 21TM029E can be lit and blinked in various colors, for example, red, blue, green, yellow, white, and the like. In addition, these colors can be displayed in different colors or so-called rainbows while being changed in a very short cycle.

  The items of display Nos. 1 to 6 shown in FIG. 22-5 (B) are displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. The first display unit 21TM029A in the first digit displays the totaled set values (1 to 6) and a RAM clear notification (“C”) indicating that the RAM clear executed by the CPU 103 after the processing of the setting change mode has been completed. ) Is displayed, the totaling period is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B of the second digit and the third display unit 21TM029C of the third digit, the fourth display unit 21TM029D of the fourth digit, and the fifth display unit of the fifth digit 21TM029E displays a numerical value as a percentage. In display No. 1, a short-term connection ratio is displayed, and in display No. 2, a short-term winning ratio is displayed. In the display No. 3, the total ratio is displayed, and in the display No. 4, the total winning combination is displayed. Also, in display No. 5, a base (base 1) calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls is displayed, and in display No. 6, a base (base 2) calculated based on 60000 previous prize balls is displayed. Is done.

  Here, the short term refers to a period in which the number of awarded balls (acquired balls) is 6000. The period for obtaining the total sum means the total period after starting the calculation of the ratio and the winning ratio, or the total period after resetting the calculation of the ratio and the winning ratio once.

  In the above example, the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base are calculated without depending on the game state, but may be calculated in consideration of the game state. For example, the connection ratio may be a percentage of the total number of prize balls occupied by the number of prize balls due to winning in the special winning opening in the jackpot game state. The winning combination is defined as a ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls due to winning in the second starting winning opening during the high base state and the number of prize balls due to winning to the large winning opening during the jackpot game state. Is also good. Further, the base may be calculated separately for the low base state and the high base state.

  When the short-term connection ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed, “y6.” Is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C, and when the short-term duty ratio of the display No. 2 is displayed, the second display unit 21TM029B is displayed. “Y7.” Is displayed on the display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C. When the short-term connection ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed, the short-term connection ratio is displayed as a percentage (in%) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E, and the short-term combination ratio of the display No. 2 is displayed. In this case, the short-term winning combination is displayed as a percentage (in%) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  When the total cumulative ratio of the display No. 3 is displayed, “A6.” Is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C, and when the total cumulative combination ratio of the display No. 4 is displayed, “A7.” Is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C. When the total cumulative connection ratio of the display No. 3 is displayed, the total cumulative connection ratio is displayed as a percentage (in%) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E, and the total cumulative combination of the display No. 4 is displayed. When the ratio is displayed, the total cumulative winning combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  When the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed, “bL.” Is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C, and when the base 2 of the display No. 4 is displayed, the second display unit is displayed. “B6.” Is displayed on the 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C. When the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed, the total cumulative connection ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E, and the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed. In this case, the total cumulative winning combination is displayed as a percentage (in%) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  In calculating the connection ratio, the winning ratio, and the base, the main board 11 enters the large winning opening (attacker), the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the first general winning opening to the fourth general winning opening. The number of entered game balls and the number of game balls discharged from the outlet are counted. In the main process, the CPU 103 controls the gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B, the count switch 23, and the first to fourth general winning opening switches to the fourth general winning opening switch and the outlet switch 21TM070. A switch process for checking the state of each switch (the presence or absence of a detection signal) is performed.

  In this switch process, it is specified which entry area the game ball has entered based on the detection signal output from each switch. Then, when the detection signal is output from the gate switch 21, the value of the gate passage number counter is added, and when the detection signal is output from the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B, The values of the first start winning number counter and the second start winning number counter are added, and when the detection signal is output from the count switch 23, the value of the large winning number counter is added, and the first general winning opening switch, When the detection signals are output from the second general winning opening switch, the third general winning opening switch, and the fourth general winning opening switch, the first general winning number counter, the second general winning number counter, and the third general winning number are output. The values of the counter and the fourth general winning number counter are added, and when a detection signal is output from the outlet switch 21TM070, the value of the driving number counter is added, whereby each entry area is added. Aggregate of entering the number of game balls (the winning number of game balls to each of the winning openings). The value of each counter is stored in the RAM 102.

  As described above, the step of counting the number of game balls entering each entry area is also executed in a series of processing for confirming the state of the switch corresponding to each entry area (switch state confirmation processing. (Included in the switch processing), it is possible to count the number of game balls entering each entry area without having to execute a separate counting program, that is, without causing a problem of insufficient capacity due to an increase in the number of execution programs. It has become.

  The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the number of prize balls by winning in each winning opening based on the total number of game balls winning in each winning opening, and stores the calculated number of winning balls in the RAM 102 for each winning opening. Let it. The number of prize balls obtained by winning a game ball is calculated by multiplying the number of game balls paid out by one prize to the prize port by the number of wins to the prize port. The number of prize balls obtained by winning game balls is predetermined for each winning port.

  As shown in FIG. 22-6, the number of prize balls for each prize port divided here is a prize ball for a general prize port prize ball (first general prize port to fourth general prize port (sode)). ), First starting winning opening prize ball (winning prize ball in the first starting winning opening (navel)), ordinary electric prize winning ball (winning prize ball in electric chew), special electric winning prize ball (to attacker Prize balls). The RAM 102 also stores the total number of prize balls and the number of hit game balls. Note that the CPU 103 separately counts the number of game balls won to the general winning opening and the number of game balls won to the first starting winning opening. The number of game ball winnings to the winning opening may be summed up. In addition, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize ball and the number of prize balls of the first starting winning prize ball are separately calculated. The number of award balls may be calculated together.

  The RAM 102 includes a ring buffer and an active buffer for storing the number of hit balls and the number of hits. The ring buffer includes ten first to tenth storage areas each having a maximum 2-byte counter for storing the number of winning balls in each winning opening for each of the 6,000 winning balls. As described above, the ring buffer has a storage area of a predetermined unit (up to 2 bytes). The active buffer has a 0-th storage area composed of a maximum 2-byte counter for storing the number of prize balls by winning in each winning port for every 6000 prize balls. In the 0th storage area, the number of prize balls for each winning opening that increases as the game progresses is added. The eleven storage areas from the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area can store 256 × 256 = 65536 data, and up to 6000 data can be stored with a margin.

  Further, the RAM 102 is provided with a storage area for each of the winning ports, the sum of the prize balls (for 10 sets) and the number of hits stored in the first storage area to the tenth storage area, and the total sum. I have. The storage area for the total of 10 sets and the total total is composed of a counter of a maximum of 3 bytes. Therefore, 256 × 256 × 256 = 16777216 data can be stored, and up to 60000 data can be stored with a margin. I can remember.

  Further, the RAM 102 has an association ratio storage area for storing the combination ratio and the connection ratio of the 10 sets and the total total, the base of the 10 sets (base 2) and the base of the previous 10 sets (base 1). And a base storage area for storing The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the winning combination and the total ratio of the 10 sets and the total total based on the winning number based on the winning number of the game balls to each winning port of the 10 sets and the total total, and calculates the 10 sets and the total ratio. And a total winning combination storage area for storing the total winning combination and the connection ratio. The connection ratio storage area for storing the combination ratios and the connection ratios of the 10 sets and the total total is configured by a counter of a maximum of 1 byte. When the combination ratio and the connection ratio of the 10 sets and the total total are stored in, for example, integers, they can be stored with a margin by a maximum 1-byte counter.

  Further, the CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the base of 10 sets based on the number of hits of the game balls into the respective winning openings of 10 sets, and calculates the base of the 10 sets (base 2) and the last time. The base (base 1) calculated from the number of hits of the game balls into the respective winning openings for each of the ten sets is stored in the base storage area. When the bases 1 and 2 are to be stored, for example, as integers, they can be stored with a margin with a maximum 1-byte counter.

  Here, the memory space of the CPU 103 on the main board 11 will be described. FIG. 22-7 is a diagram showing a memory map of the CPU on the main board. The CPU 103 has a memory space for accessing the above-described internal registers, the ROM 101, the RAM 102, and the like. More specifically, as shown in the memory map of FIG. 22-7, the address / data signal lines of the ROM 101 correspond to the ROM area of the memory space (0000H to 2FFFH (H represents a hexadecimal number. 0000H to 2FBFH, and 2FC0H to 2FFFH are allocated to a program management area), and the CPU 103 reads data from the ROM 101 by designating the ROM area. In this embodiment, the ROM area is managed by dividing it into eight areas of a first area to an eighth area, and the first area is an area starting from 0000H.

  The address / data signal line of the built-in register is allocated to a register area (FE00H to FEBFH in this embodiment) of the memory space, and the CPU 103 reads out data from the built-in register and transfers data to the register via this register area. Is written.

  The address / data signal lines of the RAM 102 are allocated to RWM areas (F000H to F3FFH in this embodiment) of the memory space. Write data. Note that the other areas of the memory space (in this embodiment, 3000H to EFFFH, F400H to FDFFH, FEC0H to FFFFH) are unused areas.

  As shown in FIG. 22-8, a RAM area corresponding to the storage area of the RAM 102 (in this embodiment, a 16 Kbyte area of 0000H to 2FFFH) is a RAM control area, an unused area, a RAM data area, and other areas. It is composed of In a storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the RAM control area, instruction data (opcode) corresponding to each of a plurality of types of instructions executed by the CPU 103 and supplementary data (operand) necessary for the CPU 103 to execute each instruction are stored. The data for the configured control program (which may be simply referred to as control program data) is temporarily stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the RAM data area, and the reference data referred to by the control program is stored in the storage area. (For example, the various lottery data described above) are temporarily stored.

  Further, data used for displaying the connection ratio and the winning combination is temporarily stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the unused area and the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other areas. For example, the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the non-use area is provided with a storage area for storing the total sum of the number of winning balls for each winning opening and a storage area for the total combination of the winning combinations. The storage areas of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other areas include an active buffer having a zero storage area for each winning opening, a ring buffer having first to tenth storage areas, and the number of prize balls (10 sets) for each winning opening. ), And a storage area for 10 sets. In the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the non-use area and the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other areas, data having different subroutine start addresses are stored.

  In this embodiment, 1-byte (8-bit) data can be stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to each address of the RAM area, and the above-mentioned data (instruction data, supplementary data, reference data) can be stored. , Management data) is data having a number of bytes exceeding 1 byte (for example, 2 bytes), the data is divided and stored for each byte in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to a plurality of consecutive addresses in the RAM control area. are doing.

  The main board 11 controls the display monitor 21TM029 to display the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base. Here, the main board 11 performs control for sequentially displaying a plurality of items. FIG. 22A is a time chart illustrating display times of items displayed on the accessory ratio display device. As shown in FIG. 22-9 (A), when the display on the display monitor 21TM029 is started, first, the short-term connection ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed. The display of the short-term connection ratio of display No. 1 is displayed in green. In the display of the short-term connection ratio of the display No. 1, as shown in FIG. 22-9 (B-1), the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A, and “y” is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. Is displayed, and the character "6." is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. Further, the short-term connection ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E. For example, when the short-term connection ratio is 41%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character “1.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  When the display of the display No. 1 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term role ratio of the display No. 2 is displayed. The display of the short-term connection ratio of display No. 2 is displayed in red. In the display of the short-term role ratio of the display No. 2, as shown in FIG. 22-9 (B-2), the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A, and “y” is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. Is displayed, and the character “7.” is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. In addition, the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E display the short-term role ratio. For example, when the short-term role ratio is 63%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character “3.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  When the display of the display No. 2 is continued for 5 seconds, the total cumulative connection ratio of the display No. 3 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative connection ratio of the display No. 3 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative connection ratio of the display No. 3, as shown in FIG. 22-9 (B-3), the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A, and “A” is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. Is displayed, and the character "6." is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. The fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E display the total cumulative connection ratio. For example, when the total cumulative connection ratio is 58%, the character “5.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character “8.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  When the display of the display No. 3 continues for 5 seconds, the total total winning combination of the display No. 4 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative combination ratio of the display No. 4 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative combination ratio of the display No. 4, as shown in FIG. 22-9 (B-4), the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A, and “A” is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. Is displayed, and the character "7." is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. The total display ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E. For example, when the total cumulative combination ratio is 68%, the character “6.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character “8.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  When the display of the display No. 4 continues for 5 seconds, the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed as shown in FIG. 22-9 (B-5). The display of the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed in red. In the display of the base 1 of the display No. 5, as shown in FIG. 22-9 (B-5), the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A, and “b” is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. The character is displayed, and the character “L.” is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. The base 1 calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E. For example, when the base 1 is 40%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character “0.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

When the display of the display No. 5 is continued for 5 seconds, the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed as shown in FIG. 22-9 (B-6). The display of the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed in red. In the display of the base 2 of the display No. 6, as shown in FIG. 22-9 (B-6), the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A, and “b” is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. The character is displayed, and the character “6.” is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. In addition, the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E include:
The base 2 calculated based on the immediately preceding 60000 prize balls is displayed. For example, when the base 2 is 42%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character “2” is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  Then, when the display of the display No. 5 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term connection ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 22-9 (B-1). The short-term connection ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed. Thereafter, the short-term connection ratio of display No. 1 to the display of base 2 of display No. 6 are sequentially displayed every 5 seconds. In the display color, only the short-term connection ratio of display No. 1 is green, and the short-term role ratio of display No. 2 to base 2 of display No. 5 are red. As described above, the display monitor 21TM029 switches and displays the short-term ratio, the short-term ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 every 5 seconds.

  Further, the display of the short-term ratio, short-term position ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative ratio, base 1 and base 2 is indicated by a display changeover switch 21TM030 as shown in FIGS. Based on the operation, the short-term connection ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative connection ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the display of the base 1 and the base 2 when the set value is “1”, and the display when the set value is “2” Short-term ratio, short-term position ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative ratio, display of base 1 and base 2, short-term ratio when the set value is "3", short-term role ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative It is possible to sequentially change the display of the winning combination, the base 1 and the base 2. When the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated during the display of the short term ratio, the short term ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 when the set value is “1”, The numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is updated to "2", and the short-term ratio, short-term position ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative position displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E are displayed. The numerical values of the ratio, the base 1, and the base 2 are switched to the value of the set value “2”.

  When the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated during the display of the short-term connection ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative connection ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 when the set value is “2”, The numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is updated to “3”, and the short-term connection ratio, the short-term position ratio, the total cumulative ratio, and the total cumulative position displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E. The numerical values of the ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are switched to the value of the set value “3”.

  When the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated during the display of the short-term ratio, the short-term ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 when the set value is “3”, The numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is updated to “4”, and the short-term connection ratio, the short-term position ratio, the total cumulative ratio, and the total cumulative position displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E. The numerical values of the ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are switched to the value of the set value “4”.

  When the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated during the display of the short-term connection ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative connection ratio, the total total combination ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 when the set value is “4”, The numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is updated to “5”, and the short-term ratio, the short-term position ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative position displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E are displayed. The numerical values of the ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are switched to the value of the set value “5”.

  When the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated during the display of the short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative connection ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 when the set value is “5”, The numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is updated to “6”, and the short-term ratio, short-term position ratio, total cumulative ratio, and total cumulative position displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E are displayed. The numerical values of the ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are switched to the set value “6”.

  If the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated during the display of the short-term connection ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative connection ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 when the set value is “6”, The numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is updated to “1”, and the short-term ratio, the short-term position ratio, the total cumulative ratio, and the total cumulative position displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E are displayed. The numerical values of the ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are switched to the value of the set value “1”.

  In the display monitor 21TM029 of this embodiment, the form in which the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base at each set value can be displayed is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this. May be able to display only one numerical value or any two numerical values among these connection ratio, combination ratio, and base.

  Further, in this embodiment, an example is shown in which the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base, which are information based on the number of awarded balls, are calculated, and the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base are displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the history of the awarded number of awarded balls may be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 without calculating the connection ratio, the winning ratio, and the base. .

  Also, in this embodiment, only the short-term ratio is displayed in red on the display monitor 21TM029, and the short-term ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are displayed in green. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The short-term ratio and short-term duty ratio, the total cumulative ratio and the total cumulative role ratio are displayed in the same color. It may be displayed in the same color different from the winning combination, the total cumulative connecting ratio, and the total cumulative winning ratio.

  When the total prize balls in the 0th storage area in the active buffer reach the predetermined capacity of 6000, the main board 11 updates the storage in the 0th to 10th storage areas in the ring buffer. Further, the storage area of the sum and total accumulation for 10 sets and the storage of the combination ratio storage area for storing the combination and the combination of 10 sets and total are respectively updated.

  In updating in the active buffer and the ring buffer, the numerical value stored in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the first storage area of the ring buffer. Further, the numerical values stored in the first to ninth storage areas of the ring buffer are moved to the second to tenth storage areas, respectively. For example, as shown in FIG. 22-10, the prize balls of the general winning opening prize balls in the 0th storage area to the ninth storage area are “27”, “81”, “120”, “36”, “225”, and “87”, respectively. It is assumed that they are "66", "117", "45", and "21". At this time, when the total prize balls in the 0th storage area of the active buffer reach 6000, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize balls in the 1st storage area to the 10th storage area are respectively “27”, “81” and “81”. 120, "36", "225", "87", "66", "117", "45", and "21". Also, the number of award balls in the 0th storage area is set to “0”, and the number of award balls in the 10th storage area is deleted.

  When updating the number of prize balls stored in the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area, the stored number of prize balls may be temporarily deleted and then a new number of prize balls may be stored. Alternatively, a new prize ball number may be stored by overwriting the stored prize ball number.

  Next, an operation (operation) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. As shown in FIG. 22-11, when the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 executes a security check process, which is a process for confirming whether or not the contents of the program are valid, and then executes the game control main process from step S21TM1010. Start processing. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S21TM1010). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S21TM1020), and the stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S21TM1030). Next, a wait is performed until the effect control board 12 starts operating (step S21TM1040).

  Then, the CPU 103 initializes the built-in device (eg, initializes a CTC (counter / timer) and a PIO (parallel input / output port) which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) (step S21TM1050), and then stores the RAM 102 in the RAM 102. The access state is set (step S21TM1060). In the interrupt mode 2, an address synthesized from a value (1 byte) of a specific register (I register) built in the CPU 103 and an interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is: This is a mode indicating an interrupt address.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 22-12, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21TM1110). If the lock switch 21TM051 is not ON (step S21TM1110; NO), the process proceeds to step S21TM1310. When the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21TM1110; YES), the CPU 103 outputs the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch mounted on the power supply board) 21TM052 input through the input port. ) Is confirmed (step S21TM1120).

  When the ON state is detected in checking the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM1120), the CPU 103 shifts to a setting change mode in which the set value can be changed. . That is, the CPU 103 satisfies the first condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, and the second condition that the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. The processing state is controlled to the setting change mode based on the status.

  Upon transition to the setting change mode, CPU 103 outputs a setting change corresponding signal from information output circuit 112 and outputs a security signal (step S21TM1130). Thus, in an external device such as a hall computer that manages game information of each gaming machine, based on the input of the setting change corresponding signal and the security signal, the gaming machine that is the output source of these signals changes the setting. It is possible to specify that the mode is controlled to the mode or the setting confirmation mode described later. Therefore, in the display device provided in the external device, it is possible to notify a gaming machine (for example, a machine number or the like) controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode in a identifiable manner.

  In addition, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change mode command designating the control to the setting change mode as an effect control command for the effect control board 12 (step S21TM1140). The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode based on the reception of the setting change mode command. Therefore, the image display device 5 can notify that the gaming machine is being controlled to the setting change mode.

  Then, the CPU 103 reads out the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 and displays it on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM1150). Then, the operation waits for the operation of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 (step S21TM1160) and the operation for turning off the lock switch 21TM051 (step S21TM1180).

  In the operation standby state of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052, the CPU 103 changes the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 every time the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated (YES in step S21TM1160). (Step S21TM1170). For example, as will be described later, each time a setting change operation is received, a display control is executed in which the displayed set value is increased by one and returned to one after reaching six.

  When the CPU 103 detects the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 in a state of waiting for the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 (YES in step S21TM1180), the CPU 103 changes the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 to The set value is changed to the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM1190). That is, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is overwritten with the displayed set value, thereby fixing the set value. Then, the determined set value (the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102) is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM1190).

  In step S21TM1160, when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not operated (without determining YES in step S21TM1160), and the lock switch 21TM051 is turned OFF (YES in step S21TM1180). If it is determined), the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 matches the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, and as a result, the set value stored in the RAM 102 The setting value stored in the area is not changed.

  When the process of step S21TM1200 is executed, the setting change mode ends, and the CPU 103 shifts to the initialization process of step S21TM1410 shown in FIGS.

  In the state confirmation of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 in the above-described step S21TM1120, if the OFF state is detected (NO in step S21TM1120), the CPU 103 performs the setting for confirming the set value. Move to confirmation mode. That is, the CPU 103 satisfies the first condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, but does not satisfy the second condition that the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. Based on this, the processing state is controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

  The CPU 103 outputs a setting change corresponding signal from the information output circuit 112 and outputs a security signal with the transition to the setting confirmation mode (step S21TM1210). Thus, in an external device such as a hall computer that manages game information of each gaming machine, based on the input of the setting change corresponding signal and the security signal, the gaming machine that is the output source of these signals changes the setting. It is possible to specify that the mode is controlled to the mode or the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, in the display device provided in the external device, it is possible to notify a gaming machine (for example, a machine number or the like) controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode in a identifiable manner.

  In addition, the CPU 103 transmits, as an effect control command for the effect control board 12, a setting confirmation mode command designating control to the setting confirmation mode (step S21TM1220). The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command. Therefore, the image display device 5 can notify that the gaming machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

  Then, the CPU 103 reads out the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 and displays it on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM1230). Then, it waits for the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 (step S21TM1240).

  When the CPU 103 detects the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 in the state of waiting for the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 (YES in step S21TM1240), the setting confirmation mode ends, and the CPU 103 executes the processing shown in FIG. The process proceeds to a determination process of whether or not the power-off detection process has been performed in step S21TM1320 shown in FIG.

  If it is determined in step S21TM1110 that the lock switch is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM1110), the CPU 103 executes the clear switch input via the input port as shown in FIG. (Setting switch mounted on the power supply board) The state of the output signal (clear signal) of 21TM052 is confirmed (step S21TM1310).

  When the state of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not ON (NO in step S21TM1310), the CPU 103 executes power-off detection processing (see FIG. 22-14). It is determined whether or not check data is stored in a predetermined backup area (step S21TM1320).

  In this example, as a case where the process of step S21TM1320 is executed, (1) the setting change is performed based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF when the power is turned on and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is also OFF. When the process of step S21TM1320 is immediately executed without shifting to any of the mode and the setting confirmation mode, (2) when the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, and when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF. There is a case where the mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on the fact that the processing has been executed, and the processing of step S21TM1320 is executed after the setting confirmation mode ends.

  When the backup data is stored, the CPU 103 checks the data in the backup RAM area (Step S21TM1330). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S21TM1330, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same processing in the power-off detection processing. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply, an initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on and not at the time of recovery from the stop of the power supply is executed (NO in step S21TM1330). It is determined and the process proceeds to step S21TM1410).

  If the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM1330), CPU 103 performs a game state restoring process (steps S21TM1340 and step S21TM1350) for returning game control microcomputer 100 to the state at the time of stopping power supply. Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 101 is set as a pointer (step S21TM1340), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in a work area (an area in the RAM 102), and step S21TM1360 is set. (Step S21TM1350). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. As a result of the processing of steps S21TM1340 and S21TM1350, the saved contents of the work area that must not be initialized remain. The parts that must not be initialized include, for example, data indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probable change flag, time saving flag, restriction member state designation flag, initialized flag, etc.), output of output port This is an area in which the state is stored (output port buffer), a part in which data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set, and the like. The set value storage area (the area where the determined set value is stored) is also included in the part that must not be initialized. Further, for each set value, an area in which each total value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base is stored is also included in the part that must not be initialized.

  Next, the CPU 103 reads the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (Step S21TM1360). In a later-described game control timer interrupt process, a big hit determination in the special symbol process process (step S21TM1690) is executed based on the set value read here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits a backup command (command at the time of restoration) as a command at the time of restoration of power supply (step S21TM1370). The effect control CPU 120 recognizes that restoration from the power interruption has been performed based on the data at the time of stopping the power supply based on the reception of the backup command (command at the time of restoration). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the backup command, the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9 and the like are restored from the power-off based on the data at the time of stopping the power supply. It is possible to notify that. Next, CPU 103 executes a setting command transmission process of step S21TM1470.

  In step S21TM1310, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is on (step S21TM1310; YES) or if no backup data is stored in step S21TM1320 (step S21TM1320; NO), the process proceeds to step S21TM1330. If the result of the parity check is not normal (step S21TM1330; NO), an initialization process is executed (step S21TM1410).

  In this example, the initialization processing of step S21TM1410 is executed as follows: (1) The setting is performed based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. The case where the initialization processing of step S21TM1410 is immediately executed without shifting to either the change mode or the setting confirmation mode, or (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF when the power is turned on, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052. Is also OFF, based on the determination of NO in either step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330, immediately after step S21TM1410 without shifting to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. When the initialization process is executed and (3) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is also ON, the mode shifts to the setting change mode, and The case where the initialization process of step S21TM1410 is executed after the end of the setting change mode, and the case where (4) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF when the power is turned on. There is a case where the mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode, and the initialization processing of the step S21TM1410 is executed on condition that it is determined as NO in either the step S21TM1320 or the step S21TM1330 after the setting confirmation mode ends. .

  In the initialization process, the CPU 103 first performs a RAM clear process (step S21TM1410). In the RAM clearing process, the data (the special symbol process flag, the probable change flag, the time reduction flag, etc.) indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped, which is stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102, is cleared and the initial value is set. However, the set values stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 are not cleared and are not changed before the RAM clear processing. In addition, the area in which each total value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as the connection ratio, the role ratio, and the base is stored for each set value is not cleared. The value is not changed before the RAM clear processing. Then, by notifying the character "C" on the display monitor 21TM029, it is notified that the gaming state has been initialized (step S21TM1420). The RAM clear processing initializes predetermined data (for example, data of a count value of a counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) to 0, but an arbitrary value or a predetermined value. May be initialized. Alternatively, predetermined data (for example, data of a count value of a counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) may be left as it is without initializing the entire area of the RAM 102. The start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 101 is set as a pointer (step S21TM1430), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S21TM1440).

  In addition, by performing the processing of step S21TM1430 and step S21TM1440, for example, it is possible to selectively perform processing according to a control state such as a random number counter for determining a normal symbol hit, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, and the like. An initial value is set in the flag.

  In this embodiment, the mode is changed to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode on condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Further, the setting change mode is provided on condition that the gaming machine frame 3 is opened (it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is open by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300). A transition to the setting confirmation mode may be made possible.

  After executing Step S21TM1430 and Step S21TM1440, the CPU 103 reads the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (Step S21TM1450). In a later-described game control timer interrupt process, a big hit determination in the special symbol process process (step S21TM1690) is executed based on the set value read here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command designating that the initialization process has been performed when the power is turned on (or when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends) (step S21TM1460). The effect control CPU 120 recognizes that the initialization processing has been performed based on the reception of the initialization command. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the initialization command, the effect control device 120 may notify that the effect such as the game state has been initialized in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9. It is possible. Next, CPU 103 executes a setting command transmission process of step S21TM1470.

  The CPU 103 transmits the setting command specifying the setting value read in step S21TM1360 or step S21TM1450 to the effect control CPU 120 (step S21TM1470). The effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting command can suggest a setting value by executing an effect according to the setting value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by making the mode of the ending effect executed when the big hit gaming state ends according to the specified set value.

  Then, CPU 103 executes a setting process of serial communication circuit 21TM505 (step S21TM1480). In this setting process, a connection confirmation signal is output from the output circuit 21TM067 of the main board 11 to the input circuit 21TM373A of the payout control board 21TM037 (see FIGS. 22-19 and 22-21). The communication between the serial communication circuit 21TM505 of the game control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set to be executable.

  Next, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initial setting the random number circuit 104 (step S21TM1490). The CPU 103 performs setting for causing the random number circuit 104 to update the value of the random number value MR1 for determining a special figure display result by executing a process according to a random number circuit setting program, for example.

  Then, in step S21TM1500, the CPU 103 sets the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that the timer interrupt is periodically performed every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically performed every 2 ms.

  Next, CPU 103 repeatedly executes a display random number update process (step S21TM1520) and an initial value random number update process (step S21TM1530). When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are executed, the interrupt is prohibited (step S21TM1510), and when the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are completed, the interrupt is enabled. It is set (step S21TM1540). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining a stop symbol of a special symbol when a big hit is not made or a random number for determining whether or not to reach when a big hit is not made. The random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of a counter for generating a display random number. The initial value random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of a counter for generating an initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is an initial value of a count value of a counter (normal symbol hit determination random number generation counter) for generating a random number for determining whether or not a symbol is a hit. It is a random number to perform. A game control process for controlling the progress of a game described later (the game control microcomputer 100 controls a game device such as an effect display device, a variable winning ball device, and a ball payout device provided in the game machine by itself. In this process, the count value of the random number for the normal symbol hit determination is one cycle (the normal value for the random number for the symbol hit determination) in the process of transmitting the command signal for controlling the other microcomputer, or the gaming machine control process. When the number of possible values has increased by the number between the minimum value and the maximum value), an initial value is set in the counter.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 22-12 and 22-13, when the CPU 103 is controlled in the setting change mode, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change mode command (step S21TM1140), and then transmits a power-on initialization command. (Step S21TM1460), and transmits a setting command (Step S21TM1470). When the CPU 103 is set to the setting check mode, the CPU 103 transmits a setting check mode command (step S21TM1220), and then transmits a backup command at the time of power-off recovery or an initialization command at power-on (step S21TM1370 or step S21TM1370). S21TM1460), and transmits a setting command (step S21TM1470). Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the end of the setting change mode based on the reception of the initialization command after the reception of the setting change mode command, and the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect, and the like. It is possible to notify the end of the setting change mode by the effect device such as the lamp 9. Further, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the end of the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the backup command or the initialization command after the reception of the setting confirmation mode command, and the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R. It is possible to notify the end of the setting confirmation mode by the effect device such as the game effect lamp 9 or the like.

  When receiving the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receiving the interrupt request, the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 22-14 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a power-off detection process (step S21TM1610). Then, it is determined whether or not a game stop error has occurred (step S21TM1615). On the condition that the game stop error has not occurred (NO in step S21TM1615), a predetermined switch process is executed to execute a switch. The state of the detection signal input from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, the count switch 23, and the discharge port switch 21TM070 via the circuit 110 is determined (step S21TM1620). On the other hand, if a game stop error has occurred (YES in step S21TM1615), the switch processing in step S21TM1620 is not executed, and as a result, the game is stopped.

  For example, the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, the opening state of the glass door frame 3a is detected, and an abnormality is detected by a magnetic sensor (not shown). The level of magnetism that is determined is detected, the level of vibration determined to be abnormal by a vibration sensor (not shown) is detected, and the level and frequency Based on the detection of the radio wave, it is determined that a game stop error has occurred.

  Subsequently, when the game ball wins any of the first start winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the big winning opening, the first general winning opening to the fourth general winning opening, that is, the first starting opening switch 22A. When the detection signals are input from the second starting port switch 22B, the count switch 23, the first general winning port switch to the fourth general winning port switch, the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning by each detection signal is determined. A prize ball process (step S21TM1630) for performing settings and the like is executed.

  Next, the CPU 103 displays the winning information such as the winning ratio such as the winning ratio, the connecting ratio, and the base (step S21TM1640), and displays the winning information such as the winning ratio, the connecting ratio, and the base calculated by the winning information. A winning information display control process to be displayed on the 21TM029 (step S21TM1650) is performed. Thereafter, by executing a predetermined main-side error process (step S21TM1660), an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be executed if necessary according to the diagnosis result. In step S21TM1660, an abnormality (game stop error) is detected by the various sensors described in the description of step S1615, and if an abnormality is detected, an abnormality detection flag is set and a step in the next timer interrupt is performed. In S21TM1615, the game may be stopped (the switch process is not executed). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, data such as big hit information, start information, probability variation information, and payout information which are supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 are output. (Step S21TM1670).

  Subsequent to the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random number such as the random number value MR1 or the random number values MR1 to MR4 used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S21TM1680). ). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S21TM1690). In the special symbol process processing, the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display are displayed. Various processes are selected and executed in order to control the display operation in the device 4B and set the opening / closing operation of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a predetermined procedure.

  Subsequent to the special symbol processing, the ordinary symbol processing is executed (step S21TM1700). The CPU 103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on / off the segment LED) on the normal symbol display 20 by executing the normal symbol process process, and displays the fluctuation of the normal symbol and the movable wings on the variable winning ball device 6B. Enables setting of one-sided tilting operation.

  After executing the normal symbol process processing, the CPU 103 executes the command control processing to transmit a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 (step S21TM1710). As an example of these, in the command control process, the output port included in the I / O 105 corresponds to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit. After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the control board 12, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. Then, the production control command can be transmitted based on the setting in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, after setting the interrupt enabled state, the game control timer interrupt process ends.

  In the command control process of step S21TM1710, a command for notifying the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or a command for notifying that the variation pattern or the variation display has been completed is provided. By transmitting the information of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 to an existing command such as the above, the set value may be periodically notified to the effect control board 12. Further, by receiving these commands from the main board 11, the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) executes an effect indicating the set value at various timings, such as during variable display or during a big hit game. You may.

  Next, the display mode of the display monitor 21TM029 in the processing related to the setting change mode (steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200 of the main processing) and RAM clear (steps S21TM1410 to S21TM1420 of the main processing) will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 22-15 (A), when the power is turned off (power is turned off) by an operation of a game clerk or the like, the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, and the display monitor is stopped. The display on 21TM029 ends.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 22-15 (B), on condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (Y in step S21TM1110 of the main processing), a store clerk of the game arcade or the like switches the clear switch (setting changeover switch). When the power is turned on while operating the 21TM052 (in the case of Y in step S21TM1120 of the main processing), the processing of steps S21TM1130 and S21TM1140 is executed by the CPU 103, and the set values stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (this In the example, the setting value "1") is copied to the setting information temporary storage area of the RAM 102, and the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area on the display monitor 21TM029 (more precisely, the first display unit 21TM029A). (In this example, the setting value "1") is displayed. (Step S21TM1150).

  In the state where the set value is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A in this manner, as shown in FIG. 22-15 (C), the CPU 103 sets the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 by a store clerk or the like of the game arcade. Each time an operation is detected, the numerical value (setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area) displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is sequentially updated and displayed (step S21TM1170). For example, every time the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the numerical value (setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area) displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is changed from 1 → 2 → 3 → Update display such as 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 →. Here, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the setting value (the setting value “1” in this example) stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is not changed by the operation. When the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 described later is executed, the set value (the set value “1” in this example) stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A. Is changed (in this example, the setting value “2” stored in the setting information temporary storage area) (overwritten).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 22D, the CPU 103 detects the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 by the clerk of the game arcade or the like (YES in step S21TM1180), and stores the OFF operation in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. The stored setting value (in this example, the setting value “1”) is changed to the numerical value displayed in the first display unit 21TM029A (in this example, the setting value “2” stored in the setting information temporary storage area). ), And the set value (set value “2” in this example) stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is determined (step S21TM1190). At this time, the CPU 103 blinks the first display unit 21TM029A to notify a store clerk or the like of the game arcade that the new set value is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 and that the control of the setting change mode has been completed. (Setting completion notification) is performed (step S21TM1200).

  Note that once the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A (in this example, the setting information temporary storage area Neither the stored set value “2”) nor the set value (set value “2” in this example) stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is changed. If the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A can be changed even after the set value is determined, there is a possibility that the user may misunderstand that the set value can be changed even when the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state. Therefore, in this embodiment, once the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is not changed.

  Then, the setting change mode (from step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) ends, and the CPU 103 executes a RAM clear process (step S21TM1410). In the RAM clearing process, data (a special symbol process flag, a probable change flag, a time saving flag, etc.) stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102 and indicating the game state at the time of power failure is cleared, and an initial value is set. Thereby, the game state is initialized, but the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared and is not changed before the RAM clear processing. Further, when the reserved storage is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, the reserved storage is cleared. After the RAM clearing process is completed, the CPU 103 displays “C” on the first display unit 21TM029A, thereby notifying a clerk at the game hall or the like that the RAM clearing process has been performed (RAM clear notification). (Step S21TM1420). Thereby, the store clerk of the game hall or the like grasps that the setting change mode has ended (the set value has been determined) and the initialization process has been executed. Then, by executing the processing after step S21TM1430, a state in which a game is possible, that is, a state in which a variable display result, a jackpot type, a variable pattern determination lottery, a prize ball payout, and the like can be performed.

  In the setting change mode of this embodiment, a mode in which the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is displayed as an initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is exemplified. The initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the setting change mode is not limited to the setting value most advantageous to the player ("6" in this embodiment), or the most disadvantageous value to the player. A set value (“1” in this embodiment) may be displayed.

  Further, with the end of the setting change mode, the CPU 103 notifies the display monitor 21TM029 of the connection ratio and the combination corresponding to the determined set value (the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102) after the RAM clear notification. You may make it display each total value, such as a ratio and a base. In addition, for each set value, the total value such as the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base corresponding to each set value may be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in order (in ascending or descending order of the set value).

  If the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off without turning off the lock switch 21TM051 while the lock switch 21TM051 is being set to the setting change mode, the lock value of the RAM 102 is not set. The setting values stored in the storage area have not been changed since the power was turned on, and the setting values stored in the setting information temporary storage area are deleted.

  Next, a display mode of the display monitor 21TM029 in the processing of the setting confirmation mode (steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 22-16 (A), when the power is turned off (power is turned off) by an operation of a game hall clerk or the like, the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, and the display monitor is stopped. The display on 21TM029 ends.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 22-16 (B), on condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (Y in step S21TM1110 of the main process), the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF. (In the case of N in step S21TM1120 of the main processing), the CPU 103 executes the processing of step S21TM1210 and step S21TM1220, and the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (in this example, the setting value "1") is copied to the setting information temporary storage area of the RAM 102, and the setting value (in this example, the setting value) stored in the setting information temporary storage area on the display monitor 21TM029 (more precisely, the first display unit 21TM029A). Set value "1") is displayed (step 21TM1230).

  Unlike the case where the setting change mode is controlled, the first display unit is operated when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated by a game room clerk or the like when the setting confirmation mode is controlled. The numerical value displayed in 21TM029A (in this example, the set value “1” stored in the setting information temporary storage area) is not updated and displayed. If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated by a store clerk or the like in the game arcade while being controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A (in this example). In such a case, if the setting value “1” stored in the setting information temporary storage area is updated and displayed, it may be misunderstood that the setting value can be changed in the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the setting check mode is being controlled, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A (in this example, the setting The setting value “1” stored in the information temporary storage area is not updated and displayed.

  Then, the CPU 103 ends the setting confirmation mode based on detecting that the lock switch 21TM051 has been turned off by the store clerk at the game arcade (YES in step S21TM1240). By executing the processing after step S21TM1320, a state in which a game is possible, that is, a state in which a variable display result, a jackpot type, a variable pattern determination lottery, a prize ball payout, and the like can be performed. That is, when the processing in the setting confirmation mode is executed, the CPU 103 does not execute the processing related to the RAM clear, except when the result of the determination in step S21TM1320 or S21TM1330 is NO.

  After the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off, as described above, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A (in this example, the setting information Neither the set value “1” stored in the temporary storage area nor the set value (set value “1” in this example) stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is changed.

  As described above, when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, (1) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is also in the ON state. When the condition for controlling to the setting change mode is satisfied, the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode, (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (setting change switch) If the condition for controlling the setting confirmation mode, that is, 21TM052 is in the OFF state, is established, the gaming machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

  In order to change or display the set value (to shift to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode), the store clerk of the game arcade turns on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on. In order to shift to, the operation for further executing the initialization processing (operation of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052) is performed, and in order to shift to the setting confirmation mode, the initialization processing is executed. Do not perform the operation. In this way, the store clerk at the game arcade can select whether to control the gaming machine in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (or not to control any of them) when the power is turned on, and to perform the initialization process. Whether or not to execute can be selected.

  Further, in this embodiment, initialization processing is not required to shift the gaming machine to the setting confirmation mode (RAM clear is not executed except for the case where NO is determined in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330). Therefore, even if a clerk at the game hall wants to check the set value while the player is playing a game, the power is temporarily turned off, and when the power is turned on thereafter, the game state is changed to the setting check mode. It is not initialized and does not disadvantage the player. On the amusement arcade side, the setting value can be confirmed without any trouble by the setting confirmation mode.

  In addition, with the end of the setting confirmation mode, the CPU 103 displays the setting values displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (setting values stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102), such as the connection ratio, the role ratio, and the base. May be displayed. In addition, for each set value, the total value such as the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base corresponding to each set value may be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in order (in ascending or descending order of the set value).

  FIG. 22-17 shows the setting change mode, the setting change mode, and the effect setting device (the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when controlled in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. An example is shown in which notification that the mode has shifted to the setting confirmation mode is performed. FIG. 22-17 (1) shows an example of an image displayed on the image display device 5 when controlled in the setting change mode. FIG. 22-17 (2) shows an image displayed when controlled in the setting confirmation mode. An example of an image displayed on the device 5 is shown.

  As shown in (A) of FIG. 22-17 (1), when the power is turned on (in particular, before the wait of the effect control board operation waiting in step S21TM1040 is completed), the activation of the effect control board 12 is not completed. Therefore, no image is displayed on the image display device 5, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the gaming effect lamp 9 is not emitting light.

  Next, as shown in (B) of FIG. 22-17 (1), based on the reception of the setting change mode command transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control board 12 in step S21TM1140 in the main processing, the effect control The CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode, and can notify that fact. For example, on the image display device 5, the character "Setting is being changed" is displayed, and a sound (for example, "Setting is being changed") is output from the speakers 8L and 8R to notify that the mode has been changed to the setting change mode. By making the effect lamp 9 emit light in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, white blinking mode), it is notified that the mode has shifted to the setting change mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify that the mode is shifted to the setting change mode in the image display device 5 or the like having the largest display area in the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that the setting change is performed. It is possible to clearly understand that the mode is controlled. Here, in the state shown in (B) of FIG. 22-17 (1), other display information (for example, effect design, small design, fourth design, right-handed display, etc.) on the image display device 5 is not displayed.

  It should be noted that when the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting change mode command, the video signal is not supplied to the image display device 5 by the VDP (Video Display Processor) (that is, by the display control unit 123). Until the control of the image display device 5 is not possible (until the image display device 5 can be supplied to the image display device 5) (that is, until the display control unit 123 can control the image display device 5). In addition, the notification by the image display device 5 is not performed, and the voice notification and the light emission notification are executed in advance. That is, a sound (for example, a sound saying "Setting is being changed") is output from the speakers 8L and 8R to notify that the mode has shifted to the setting change mode, and the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a predetermined light emitting manner (for example, a white blinking manner). By emitting light, it is notified that the mode has shifted to the setting change mode. After that, when the image signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 (that is, when the display control unit 123 can control the image display device 5), the sound notification and the light emission notification are performed. In addition, the notification by the image display device 5 is started. That is, the character “Setting is being changed” is displayed on the image display device 5.

  Then, as shown in (C) of FIG. 22-17 (1), based on the reception of the setting command transmitted from CPU 103 to effect control board 12 at step S21TM1470 in the main processing (or at step S21TM1460, CPU 103). The CPU 120 for effect control specifies that the microcomputer 100 for game control has ended the setting change mode, based on the reception of the power-on initialization command transmitted to the effect control board 12 from That fact can be reported. For example, on the image display device 5, a character “Setting change completed” is displayed, and a sound (for example, a sound “Setting is being changed”) for notifying that the mode has been changed to the setting change mode output from the speakers 8L and 8R is output. By stopping the output and stopping the light emission by the game effect lamp 9 in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, a white blinking mode), the end of the setting change mode is notified. According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify that the setting change mode has ended in the image display device 5 or the like having the largest display area in the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that the setting change mode is set to It is possible to clearly understand that the process has been completed.

  Then, as shown in (D) of FIG. 22-17 (1), the CPU 103 executes the processing after step S21TM1480 of the main processing, and is in a game-enabled state (the game control timer interrupt processing is performed). Along with the execution, the effect control command for displaying the demonstration screen on the image display device 5 is transmitted, and the effect control CPU 120 having received the command displays the demonstration screen on the image display device 5.

  As shown in (A) of FIG. 22-17 (2), the activation of the effect control board 12 is not completed when the power is turned on (in particular, before the wait for the effect control board operation in step S21TM1040 is completed). Therefore, no image is displayed on the image display device 5, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the gaming effect lamp 9 is not emitting light.

  Next, as shown in (B) of FIG. 22-17 (2), based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control board 12 in step S21TM1220 in the main processing, the effect control The CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode, and can notify that fact. For example, the image display device 5 displays the characters “Setting is being confirmed”, and outputs a sound (for example, a sound of “Setting is being confirmed”) from the speakers 8L and 8R to notify that the mode has shifted to the setting confirmation mode. By making the effect lamp 9 emit light in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, a white blinking mode), it is notified that the mode has shifted to the setting confirmation mode. According to such a configuration, in the image display device 5 having the largest display area in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like, it is possible to notify that the mode has been shifted to the setting confirmation mode. It is possible to clearly understand that the mode is controlled. Here, in the state shown in (B) of FIG. 22-17 (2), other display information on the image display device 5 (for example, effect design, small design, fourth design, right-handed display, etc.) is not displayed.

  It should be noted that when the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting confirmation mode command, it is not in a state in which a video signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 by a VDP (Video Display Processor) (that is, by the display control unit 123). Until the control of the image display device 5 is not possible (until the image display device 5 can be supplied to the image display device 5) (that is, until the display control unit 123 can control the image display device 5). In addition, the notification by the image display device 5 is not performed, and the voice notification and the light emission notification are executed in advance. That is, a sound (for example, a sound of "Setting is being changed") is output from the speakers 8L and 8R to notify that the mode has shifted to the setting confirmation mode, and the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a predetermined light emitting mode (for example, a white blinking mode). By emitting light, it is notified that the mode has shifted to the setting confirmation mode. After that, when the image signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 (that is, when the display control unit 123 can control the image display device 5), the sound notification and the light emission notification are performed. In addition, the notification by the image display device 5 is started. That is, the image display device 5 displays the text “setting is being confirmed”.

  Then, as shown in (C) of FIG. 22-17 (2), based on the reception of the setting command transmitted from CPU 103 to effect control board 12 in step S21TM1470 in the main processing (or in step S21TM1370 or step S21TM1370). In step S21TM1460, based on the reception of the power-off restoration command or the power-on initialization command transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control board 12 from the CPU 103, the effect control CPU 120 is set by the game control microcomputer 100. It is possible to specify that the confirmation mode has ended and to notify that fact. For example, on the image display device 5, a character "Setting confirmation completed" is displayed, and a sound (for example, a sound saying "Setting is being confirmed") for notifying that the mode has been shifted to the setting confirmation mode output from the speakers 8L and 8R. By stopping the output and stopping the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, a white blinking mode), the end of the setting confirmation mode is notified. According to such a configuration, in the image display device 5 or the like having the largest display area in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like, it is possible to notify that the setting check mode has ended. It is possible to clearly understand that the process has been completed.

  Then, as shown in (D) of FIG. 22-17 (2), the CPU 103 executes the processing after step S21TM1480 of the main processing, and is in a state where a game can be played (the game control timer interrupt processing is performed). Along with the execution, the effect control command for displaying the demonstration screen on the image display device 5 is transmitted, and the effect control CPU 120 having received the command displays the demonstration screen on the image display device 5.

  The effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting command can suggest a setting value by executing an effect according to the setting value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by making the mode of the ending effect executed when the big hit gaming state ends according to the specified set value. 22-18 (1), (2), and (3) show examples of the setting suggestion effect. FIG. 22-18 (1) shows an example in which the “sunny” mode ending image is selected on the big hit end screen, and FIG. 22-18 (2) shows an example in which the “cloudy” mode ending image is selected on the big hit end screen. FIG. 22-18 (3) shows an example in which the ending image of the “rain” mode is selected on the big hit end screen. Fig. 22-18 (4) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining the mode of the setting suggestion effect based on the setting value specified by the setting command.

  In step S21TM1470 of the main process, the CPU 103 transmits a setting command for designating a setting value to the effect control CPU 120. Further, when the big hitting game state ends, the CPU 103 transmits to the effect control CPU 120 an effect control command for executing an ending effect on the image display device 5. The effect control CPU 120 stores the setting value specified by the received setting command in the RAM 102, so that the ending effect mode can be determined based on the stored setting value. For example, based on an effect control command transmitted when the big hit game state ends, the image display device 5 stores the character together with a character (“BONUS end” character) indicating that the big hit game state has ended. It is possible to display an ending image of a mode (fine mode, cloudy mode, rainy mode) determined based on the set value that is set.

  The table shown in FIG. 22-18 (4) shows that the setting value specified by the setting command is “1, 2”, “3, 4”, and “5, 6”. When the mode of the setting suggestive effect is determined to be the “sunny” mode shown in FIG. 22-18 (1), the “cloudy” mode shown in FIG. 22-18 (2), and FIG. In the case of deciding on the “rain” mode shown in FIG. 18 (3), the determination value of is assigned.

  When the set value specified by the received setting command is “1” or “2”, effect control CPU 120 suggests a setting of the “sunny” mode shown in (1) at a low rate (for example, 20%). It is decided to perform the effect (ending effect), and to execute the setting suggestive effect (ending effect) of the “cloudy” mode shown in (2) at a moderate ratio (for example, 40%). It is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “rain” mode shown in (3) at the ratio (for example, 40%). When the setting value specified by the received setting command is “3” or “4”, the effect control CPU 120 performs the “clear” mode shown in (1) at a low rate (for example, 20%). It is determined that the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) is to be executed, and that the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “cloudy” mode shown in (2) is to be executed at a high rate (for example, 50%), and It is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “rain” mode shown in (3) at the ratio (for example, 30%). When the setting value specified by the received setting command is “5” or “6”, effect control CPU 120 performs the “clear” mode shown in (1) at a high rate (for example, 50%). It is determined that the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) is to be executed, and that the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “cloudy” mode shown in (2) is to be executed at a low ratio (for example, 20%). It is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “rain” mode shown in (3) at the ratio (for example, 30%).

  In this way, by making the determination ratio of each mode of the setting suggestion effect different according to the setting value, the player becomes interested in what mode the setting suggestion effect is executed, and the setting suggestion effect is performed. The entertainment of the production can be improved. In this example, the player is interested in the manner in which the ending effect performed when the big hit gaming state ends is performed, and in particular, the ending effect is performed in the “sunny” mode. You expect to be done.

  Next, the prize ball processing (step S21TM1630) in the main processing will be described. First, a payout control signal (connection confirmation signal) and a prize ball request signal (payout control command) transmitted and received between the main board 11 and the payout control board 21TM037 will be described.

  FIG. 22-19 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of a control signal output from the game control microcomputer 100 to the payout control board 21TM037. In this embodiment, a connection confirmation signal is transmitted and received as a control signal between the main board 11 and the payout control board 21TM037 in order to perform various controls related to payout control and the like. As shown in FIGS. 22-19, the connection confirmation signal is output when the main board 11 starts up (when the game control microcomputer 100 starts the game control process), and the main board 11 is output to the payout control board 21TM037. Is a signal (connection confirmation signal of the main board 11) for notifying that has started. The connection confirmation signal indicates that a prize ball can be paid out. The connection confirmation signal is output through the I / O port 21TM057 of the game control microcomputer 100 and the output circuit 21TM067, and is controlled through the input circuit 21TM373A and the I / O port 21TM372e of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Input to the microcomputer 21TM370. Each of the connection confirmation signals is 1-bit data, and is transmitted by one signal line. It should be noted that the connection confirmation signal is set in an output enabled state by setting an initial value to a bit corresponding to the connection confirmation signal of the output port 0 by the processing of steps S21TM1350 and S21TM1440 executed when the power is turned on (specifically, Is output by the processing of step S21TM2080, but may be output at the timing of steps S21TM1350 and S21TM1440.)

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, like the game control microcomputer 100, has a built-in serial communication circuit 21TM380. Various payout control commands are transmitted and received between the serial communication circuit 21TM505 built in the game control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The configuration and function of the serial communication circuit 21TM380 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are the same as the configuration and function of the serial communication circuit 21TM505 included in the game control microcomputer 100.

  FIG. 22-20 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of a control command transmitted and received between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control board 21TM037. In this embodiment, various control commands (prize ball request signals) are transmitted and received between the microcomputers of the main board 11 and the payout control board 21TM037 in order to perform various controls related to payout control and the like.

  As described above, the prize ball request signal and the received ACK signal are composed of 8-bit data (binary 8-digit data), and are output as control commands indicating predetermined contents according to the set contents of the 8-bit data. Is done.

  The connection confirmation command is sent from the game control microcomputer 100 at regular intervals (1 s) to check whether the connection state between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is normal. This is a control command to be transmitted. The data content of the connection confirmation command is “A0 (H)”, that is, “1010000”.

  The connection OK command is a control command for notifying that the connection state between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is normal, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the connection confirmation command. Is a control command to be transmitted as a response signal in response to the reception of the command. The data content of the connection OK command is “8x (H)”, that is, “10000xxx”. Here, if an award ball error (an abnormal state in which the award ball payout operation based on the winning or the ball lending operation based on the ball lending request cannot be performed normally) occurs, the first bit “x” is set. Is set to "1". When a full tank error occurs, “1” is set to “x” of the second bit. In addition, when an out-of-ball error occurs, “1” is set to “x” of the third bit. When a door opening error occurs, “1” is set to “x” of the fourth bit. In this way, while the connection between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is being checked, the occurrence of a predetermined error in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is determined by the game control microcomputer. 100 can be notified.

  The prize ball number command is a control command for notifying the number (0 to 14) of game balls for which a payout request is made, and is a control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 100 based on the occurrence of a winning. . The content of the data of the winning ball number command is “5x (H)”, that is, “0101xxxx”. In this embodiment, when a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B, three prize balls are paid out, and the game ball is set by the prize port switch corresponding to the general prize port 10. When detected, ten prize balls are paid out, and when game balls are detected by the count switch 23, 14 prize balls are paid out. Therefore, when a game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B, a prize ball number command “01010111” for notifying three prize balls is transmitted to the general winning port 10. When a game ball is detected by the corresponding winning opening switch, a prize ball number command “01011010” for notifying the number of prize balls is transmitted, and when a game ball is detected by the count switch 23, the prize ball number is determined. The award ball number command “0101110” for notifying the 14 balls is transmitted. It should be noted that any one of the connection confirmation command and the winning ball number command is transmitted as a winning ball request signal. The prize ball number command is transmitted in place of the connection confirmation command at the timing when the connection confirmation command is transmitted, based on the fulfillment of the prize ball payout condition (the occurrence of a prize or the like). In this embodiment, as described above, data corresponding to the number of winning balls is set in the upper 4 bits, but data corresponding to the number of winning balls is set in the lower 4 bits while sharing the upper 4 bits. You may do so.

  The prize ball end command is a control command indicating that the prize ball operation (prize ball payout operation) has ended, and is a control command transmitted by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 based on the end of the prize ball operation. The content of the data of the award ball end command is “50 (H)”, that is, “01010000”. The prize ball end command is transmitted instead of the connection OK command at the timing when the connection OK command is transmitted based on the completion of the prize ball operation. In this embodiment, it is not configured to set data indicating error information in the prize ball end command. This is because the prize ball end command is transmitted only once when the prize ball operation ends, so that the data indicating the error information is set and transmitted in the next connection OK command without transmitting the error information at that timing. This is because it is possible to do so. Note that data indicating error information may be set in the lower 4 bits of the award ball end command.

  The prize ball preparation command is a control command for notifying that a predetermined error has occurred and the prize ball operation has not been completed. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 generates a predetermined error during execution of the prize ball operation. This is a control command to be transmitted based on what has been done. The data content of the connection OK command is “8x (H)”, that is, “10000xxx”. Here, when an award ball error occurs, “1” is set to “x” of the first bit. When a full tank error occurs, “1” is set to “x” of the second bit. In addition, when an out-of-ball error occurs, “1” is set to “x” of the third bit. When a door opening error occurs, “1” is set to “x” of the fourth bit. In this way, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 notifies the game control microcomputer 100 that a predetermined error has occurred during the execution of the prize ball operation and the prize ball operation has not been completed. In addition, the content of the error can be notified to the game control microcomputer 100. As with the connection OK command, the prize ball preparation command notifies that a predetermined error has occurred by changing the contents of the lower 4 bits in accordance with the error state (by changing the predetermined bit). The connection OK command, the prize ball preparation command, and the prize ball end command are configured so that any one of the commands is transmitted as a received ACK signal. The prize ball preparation command is a command (signal) output not only in a state where an error has occurred but the prize ball operation cannot be executed, but also in a state where the prize ball operation is being executed.

  The prize ball preparation command is transmitted in place of the connection OK command at the timing when the connection OK command is transmitted based on the fact that an error has occurred and the prize ball operation cannot be performed. is there.

  FIG. 22-21 is a block diagram illustrating signal lines and the like used for transmitting and receiving the control signal illustrated in FIG. 22-19 and the control command illustrated in FIG. 22-20. As shown in FIG. 22-21, the connection confirmation signal is output by the game control microcomputer 100 via the output circuit 21TM067, and is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the input circuit 21TM373A. The connection confirmation command and the number of prize balls command among the control commands are output from the serial communication circuit 21TM505 incorporated in the game control microcomputer 100 and input to the serial communication circuit 21TM380 incorporated in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. You. Among the control commands, the connection OK command, the prize ball end command and the prize ball preparation command are output from the serial communication circuit 21TM380 incorporated in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the serial communication circuit incorporated in the game control microcomputer 100. 21TM505. In FIG. 22-21, two signal lines (a signal line for transmitting a prize ball request signal and a signal line for transmitting a received ACK signal) are shown as signal lines for performing serial communication. However, actually, the prize ball request signal and the received ACK signal are transmitted and received through one signal line.

  Next, transmission and reception of signals (prize ball request signal, received ACK signal; control command) between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer during normal operation will be described. The winning ball request signal includes a connection confirmation command and a winning ball number command, and the received ACK signal includes a connection OK command, a winning ball end command, and a winning ball preparation command.

  FIG. 22-22 is a sequence diagram showing transmission and reception of signals between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during normal operation. As shown in FIGS. 22-22, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the signal line connection with the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is disconnected via the serial communication circuit 21TM505. A connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal via the serial communication circuit 21TM380, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits a connection OK command as the reception ACK signal to the game control microcomputer 100. Upon receiving the connection OK command as a received ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal after a lapse of 1 s (1 second) from the point of reception. The game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-described connection confirmation communication processing as long as the connection state is normal.

  Next, the operation of the payout control board 21TM037 will be described. FIG. 22-23 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the payout control board 21TM037. In the main process, the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 first performs necessary initialization. That is, the payout control CPU 21TM371 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S21TM1810). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S21TM1820), and the stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S21TM1830). Further, the payout control CPU 21TM371 sets the built-in device register (step S21TM1840), sets the CTC and PIO (step S21TM1850), and then sets the RAM to an accessible state (step S21TM1860). Also, 0000 (H) is set as an initial value of the award ball unpaid number counter (step S21TM1870).

  In this embodiment, one channel of the built-in CTC is used in the timer mode. Therefore, in the setting process of the internal device register of step S21TM1840 and the process of step S21TM1850, the register setting for setting the channel to be used to the timer mode, the register setting for permitting the interrupt generation, and the interrupt vector are set. Is set. Then, the interruption by the channel is used as a timer interruption. When it is desired to generate a timer interrupt every 2 ms, for example, a value corresponding to 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value.

  The interrupt vector set for the channel set in the timer mode (channel 3 in this embodiment) corresponds to the start address of the timer interrupt processing. Specifically, the start address of the timer interrupt processing is specified by the value set in the I register and the interrupt vector. In the timer interruption process, a payout control process for controlling the payout means (including a process of driving at least the payout motor 21TM289 in response to a command signal relating to winning ball payout from the main board, and driving the payout motor 21TM289 in response to a ball lending request) May be included).

  In this embodiment, the interruption mode 2 is also set in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Therefore, it is possible to use the interrupt processing based on the count-up of the built-in CTC. Further, it is possible to set an interrupt processing start address according to the interrupt vector transmitted by the CTC. The interrupt based on the count-up of the channel 3 (CH3) of the CTC is an interrupt generated when the internal clock (system clock) of the CPU is counted down and the register value becomes “0”, and is used as a timer interrupt. .

  Next, the payout control CPU 21TM371 first performs a RAM clear process (step S21TM1880). Further, an initial value is set to a flag, a counter, and the like in the RAM area (step S21TM1890). The process of step S21TM1890 includes a process of setting the prize ball unpaid number counter initial value to the prize ball unpaid number counter.

  Also, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes a serial communication circuit setting process for initializing the serial communication circuit 21TM380 (step S21TM1900). In this case, the payout control CPU 21TM371 causes the serial communication circuit 21TM380 to perform serial communication with the game control microcomputer 100 according to the same process as the serial communication circuit setting process (see step S21TM2560) performed by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100. Make the settings for

  When the serial communication circuit 21TM380 is initialized, the payout control CPU 21TM371 initializes the priority of the interrupt processing executed in response to the interrupt request of the serial communication circuit 21TM380 (step S21TM1910). In this case, the payout control CPU 21TM 371 initializes the priority of the interrupt processing in accordance with the same processing as the processing of initializing the priority performed by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100.

  Then, the register of the CTC provided in the microcomputer 21TM370 for payout control is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically performed (step S21TM1920). That is, a value corresponding to the timer interrupt occurrence interval is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. Since the interrupt is prohibited in step S21TM1810 of the initial setting process, the interrupt is permitted before the initialization process is completed (step S21TM1930). Thereafter, the process enters a loop process for monitoring occurrence of a timer interrupt.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the built-in CTC of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set to repeatedly generate a timer interrupt. Then, when a timer interrupt occurs, the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 executes a timer interrupt process.

  FIG. 22-24 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a timer interrupt process executed by the payout control board 21TM037. In the timer interrupt processing, the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 executes the following processing as payout control processing. First, the payout control CPU 21TM371 performs an input determination process (step S21TM2010). The input determination process is a process of detecting the states of bits 4 to 6 of input port 0 and bits 3 to 6 of input port 1 and reflecting the detection result to a predetermined byte (called an input state flag) of the RAM. is there. In the payout control process, when the control is performed based on the state of bits 4 to 6 of input port 0 and the states of bits 3 to 6 of input port 1, the state of the input port is not directly checked but the input state is checked. Check the state of the flag.

  Next, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes a payout motor control process (step S21TM2020). In the payout motor control process, when the payout motor 21TM289 is to be driven, a process for outputting the pattern of the payout motors φ1 to φ4 to the output port 0 is performed.

  The payout control CPU 21TM371 executes a prepaid card unit control process for communicating with the card unit 21TM050 (step S21TM2030). Further, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes a main control communication process described later (step S21TM2035). Furthermore, a prize ball lending control process for controlling to pay out a lending ball in response to a ball lending request from the card unit 21TM050 and for controlling to pay out a number of prize balls indicated by a prize ball number command from the main board. Is executed (step S21TM2040).

  Then, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes error processing for detecting various errors (step S21TM2050). Further, an information output process for outputting prize ball information and ball lending information output to the outside of the gaming machine is executed (step S21TM2060). In addition, a predetermined display is performed on the error display LED 21TM374 according to the result of the error processing, and a display control process for turning on the prize ball LED 21TM053 and the ball cut LED21TM054 is executed (step S21TM2070).

  In this embodiment, when various errors (for example, a full error, an out-of-ball error, a prepaid card unit unconnection error) are detected in an error process described later, an error bit corresponding to the detected error is set. Then, in the display control process of step S21TM2070, the payout control CPU 21TM371 performs a predetermined display on the error display LED 21TM374 based on the error bit being set. In the display control process, the payout control CPU 21TM371 performs control for turning on the prize ball LED21TM053 when the prize ball is being paid out. When the prize ball payout is completed, control for turning off the prize ball LED 21TM053 is performed.

  Further, in this embodiment, the RAM area (output port 0 buffer, output port 1 buffer, output port 2 buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. The contents of the port 0 buffer, the output port 1 buffer, and the output port 2 buffer are output to the output port (step S760: output processing). The output port 0 buffer, the output port 1 buffer, and the output port 2 buffer perform payout motor control processing (step S21TM2020), prepaid card control processing (step S21TM2030), main control communication processing (step S21TM2035), and information output processing (step S21TM2060). And is updated in the display control process (step S21TM2070).

  Next, in the main control communication processing of step S21TM2035, an operation in which the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits and receives various commands will be described. As shown in FIG. 22-21, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has a built-in serial communication circuit 21TM380 for serially communicating various commands with the game control microcomputer 100. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the prize ball number command shown in FIGS. 22-20 from the game control microcomputer 100 using the serial communication circuit 21TM380. When receiving the award ball number command, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits the award ball ACK command "D2" as a reception confirmation signal using the serial communication circuit 21TM380.

  Similarly to the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100, when there is an interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 21TM380 while the interrupt is enabled, the payout control CPU 21TM 371 performs the interrupt requested by the serial communication circuit 21TM 380. Execute the interrupt processing according to the cause. In this embodiment, when the payout control CPU 21TM371 specifies that the interrupt cause is that the serial communication circuit 21TM380 has received the received data, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes the reception interruption process. In this case, the payout control CPU 21TM371 sets a reception interrupt flag indicating that the serial communication circuit 21TM380 is receiving the received data. Note that the payout control CPU 21TM371 may read data from the reception data register of the serial communication circuit 21TM380 instead of setting the reception interrupt flag in the reception interrupt processing. In this case, for example, the payout control CPU 21TM371 determines whether or not the read reception data is a winning ball number command in the reception interruption process. When the received data is the winning ball number command, the payout control CPU 21TM371 may add the winning ball number indicated by the winning ball number command to the winning ball unpaid number counter. By doing so, in a main control communication process described later, it is determined whether or not the received data is a prize ball number command based on the reception interrupt flag being set, and the prize ball number is determined. It is not necessary to execute the process of adding the number to the unpaid number counter.

  FIG. 22-25 shows a ball lending executed between the main board 11 (the game control microcomputer 100), the payout control board 21TM037 (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) and the payout motor 21TM289, and the card unit 21TM050. It is a block diagram for explaining communication processing of. Here, as described later, there are a first ball lending restriction method to a fourth ball lending restriction method described below as methods for restricting ball lending by the payout motor 21TM289.

  First, (1) in the first ball lending restriction method, during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcontroller) is used from the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100). This is a method of stopping the output of the connection confirmation signal to the computer 21TM370). (2) In the second ball lending restriction method, during the period in which the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, PRDY from the payout control board 21TM037 (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) to the card unit 21TM050 is used. This is a method of stopping signal output. (3) In the third ball lending restriction method, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 including the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. During this period, output of a signal for driving the payout motor 21TM289 from the payout control board 21TM037 (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) to the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped. (4) In the fourth ball lending restriction method, the EXS from the payout control board 21TM037 (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) to the card unit 21TM050 is controlled during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled. This is a method of stopping signal output.

  Since the transition to the setting change mode and the transition to the setting confirmation mode involve power-off (including turning off the power switch 21TM055) and subsequent power-on, the state of the gaming machine is unstable. If the payout control corresponding to the ball lending process is executed in such an unstable state, there is a possibility that an appropriate amount of game media corresponding to the lending request cannot be paid out. In order to prevent the disadvantage of the player in such a situation, in the following embodiment, ball lending in a gaming machine controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is limited. Hereinafter, these first to fourth ball lending restriction methods will be specifically described.

  FIG. 22-26 is a timing chart for explaining communication among the main board 11, the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050 of the gaming machine. When the power supply to the gaming machine is started and the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is ON, the payout control board 21TM037 turns the PRDY signal ON when the payout operation is possible. The connection confirmation signal is turned on in the serial communication circuit setting process in step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 22-13 (see FIG. 22-19). When power supply is started, the card unit 21TM050 turns on a VL signal as a connection signal.

  When the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch is operated, and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 sends the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being ON. Output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. After a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Then, the payout control board 21TM037 turns on the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the ON state and the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are both in the ON state. When the falling (OFF) of the BRQ signal is detected, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven to pay out a predetermined number (for example, 25) of loaned balls to the player. Then, the payout control board 21TM037 lowers the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050. That is, the EXS signal is turned off.

(First ball lending restriction method in setting change mode)
As a method of restricting ball lending during the period in which the setting is changed to the setting change mode, there are the first ball lending restriction method to the fourth ball lending restriction method described above. First, the first ball lending restriction method will be specifically described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 22-27 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout) when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between the control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 22-13, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. While the processing in the mode or the setting confirmation mode is being executed, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state.

  While the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection control signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state, so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not set the PRDY signal to the ON state. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not set the PRDY signal to the ON state but changes the state to the OFF state even when the VL signal is in the ON state, that is, even when the VL signal is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

  As a result, even if the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, The card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains OFF. Even if a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains OFF.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state without turning the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. While the process is being executed, ball lending (payout of game media) is not executed even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated.

  As described above, during the period in which the game control microcomputer 100 is in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the game control microcomputer 100 does not set the connection confirmation signal to the ON state. It can be prevented from running. In addition, the card unit 21TM050 can notify that ball lending is not executed (that a ball lending error has occurred) based on the PRDY signal not being turned on.

  When the CPU 103 completes the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and executes the serial communication circuit setting processing of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. When the payout operation is possible, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal.

  When the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated to input the ball lending switch signal, the card unit 21TM050 sends the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the ON state of the PRDY signal. Is output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. After a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 to the ON state based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the ON state, and executes the subsequent ball lending payout control.

  In addition, during the game (the state in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed), a configuration is adopted in which the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Even in this case, the first ball lending restriction method shown in FIGS. 22 to 27 can be applied. That is, the game control microcomputer 100 stops outputting the connection confirmation signal (switches from the ON state to the OFF state) based on the control in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Thereby, based on the fact that the connection confirmation signal is no longer input, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns off the PRDY signal or does not turn on the EXS signal, thereby executing ball lending. Not to be.

(Second ball lending restriction method in setting change mode)
Next, the second ball lending restriction method will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. In the example shown in FIGS. 22 to 28, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state during the period in which the setting change mode is being controlled, and the connection confirmation signal is also in the ON state during the period in which the setting confirmation mode is being controlled. Shall be. That is, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 22-12 and 22-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at a timing before being controlled to the setting change mode, and is kept on during the setting change mode. Shall be. Also, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 22-12 and 22-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at a timing before being controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and is kept on during the setting confirmation mode. Shall be.

  FIGS. 22 to 28 show the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout) when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between the control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. Then, after the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is turned on, the mode shifts to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  In the example of FIGS. 22 to 28, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state while the CPU 103 is executing the processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Here, the game control microcomputer 100 stops transmitting the connection confirmation command based on the control in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The connection confirmation command is a command for confirming the communication state with the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the serial communication circuit 21TM505 as described above.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not set the PRDY signal to the ON state based on the fact that the connection control command has not been received from the game control microcomputer 100. If the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is switched from the ON state to the OFF state. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (that is, the state in which it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (that is, the game control microcomputer). Even when the CPU 103 is executing the processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (while not receiving the connection confirmation command), the PRDY signal is turned on even when the CPU 103 is in the state of being electrically connected. It is not in the state but in the OFF state.

  As a result, even if the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, The card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains OFF. Even if a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains OFF.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state without turning the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, when the connection confirmation command is not transmitted, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. Is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the ball lending (payout of the game medium) is not executed even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated.

  As described above, during the period in which the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are controlled, the game control microcomputer 100 does not transmit the connection confirmation command, so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has not received the connection confirmation command. Thus, the PRDY signal is not turned on. In this way, it is possible to prevent the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 from performing the payout control of the game medium. In addition, the card unit 21TM050 can notify that ball lending is not executed (that a ball lending error has occurred) based on the PRDY signal not being turned on.

  When the CPU 103 ends the processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the transmission of the connection confirmation command is restarted. Based on restarting the reception of the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns the PRDY signal ON when the payout operation is possible.

  When the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated to input the ball lending switch signal, the card unit 21TM050 sends the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the ON state of the PRDY signal. Is output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. After a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 to the ON state based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the ON state, and executes the subsequent ball lending payout control.

  In addition, during the game (the state in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed), a configuration is adopted in which the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Even in this case, the second ball lending restriction method shown in FIGS. 22 to 28 can be applied. Further, the PRDY signal can be output (turned on) regardless of whether the connection control signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (whether the connection is on or off). Even if such a configuration is adopted, the second ball lending restriction method shown in FIGS. 22-28 can be applied. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the PRDY signal which is in the ON state based on not receiving the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100 controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Is switched to the OFF state. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the ball lending from being executed during the period in which the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

(Third ball lending restriction method in setting change mode)
Next, the third ball lending restriction method will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. In this embodiment, the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and do not open the gaming machine frame 3 which can be opened by a predetermined key operation. In order to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the gaming machine frame 3 must be opened. That is, it is normal that the gaming machine frame 3 is open during the period in which the control is performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. That is, during the period in which the control is performed in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the gaming machine frame 3 has been opened. Become. In this manner, the period in which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected includes a period in which the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode and a period in which the gaming machine frame 3 is controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

  FIGS. 22-29 show the main board when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). FIG. 11 is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between the payout control board 21TM037 (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050.

  In the example of FIGS. 22 to 29, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a) is open. Therefore, the PRDY signal is not turned on. If the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is switched from the ON state to the OFF state. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (ie, the state in which the VL signal is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (ie, the game control microcomputer). Even when the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (a period in which the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state), The PRDY signal is not turned on, but is turned off.

  As a result, even if the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, The card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains OFF. Even if a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains OFF.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state without turning the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. That is, when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a), the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, and the BRQ Both the signal and the EXS signal are in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. Therefore, while the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the ball is not operated even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated. Lending (payout of game media) is not executed.

  As described above, during the period in which the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are controlled, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 causes the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a) to move. Is detected, the PRDY signal is not turned on. In this way, it is possible to prevent the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 from performing the payout control of the game medium. In addition, the card unit 21TM050 can notify that ball lending is not executed (that a ball lending error has occurred) based on the PRDY signal not being turned on.

  Then, when a store clerk at the game hall or the like performs an operation of turning off the lock switch 21TM051, the CPU 103 ends the processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Further, a clerk of a game arcade or the like closes the game machine frame 3 in order to bring the pachinko game machine 1 into a playable state. 21TM300 does not detect the open state of gaming machine frame 3. With the closing of the gaming machine frame 3, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible.

  When the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated to input the ball lending switch signal, the card unit 21TM050 sends the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the ON state of the PRDY signal. Is output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. After a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 to the ON state based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the ON state, and executes the subsequent ball lending payout control.

  In addition, during the game (the state in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed), a configuration is adopted in which the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Even in this case, the third ball lending restriction method shown in FIGS. 22 to 29 can be applied. Further, the PRDY signal can be output (turned on) regardless of whether the connection control signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (whether the connection is on or off). Even when such a configuration is adopted, the third ball lending restriction method shown in FIGS. 22-29 can be applied. That is, during the period in which the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 uses the gaming machine frame 3 ( Alternatively, the PRDY signal is not turned on based on the detection of the open state of the glass door frame 3a). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the ball lending from being executed during the period in which the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  In this embodiment, an example is shown in which the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is provided on the payout control board 21TM037 (an open state detection signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370). The game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 is not limited to such a form, and may be provided on the main board 11 (an open state detection signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100). In the case of such a configuration, the game control microcomputer 100 determines that the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). Then, the output of the connection confirmation signal is stopped (switching from the ON state to the OFF state). Thereby, based on the fact that the connection confirmation signal is no longer input, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns off the PRDY signal or does not turn on the EXS signal, thereby executing ball lending. Not to be.

(Fourth ball lending restriction method in setting change mode)
Next, the fourth ball lending restriction method will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. In the example illustrated in FIGS. 22 to 30, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state during the period in which the setting confirmation mode is being controlled, and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state also during the period in which the setting confirmation mode is being controlled. Shall be. That is, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 22-12 and 22-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at a timing before being controlled to the setting change mode, and is kept on during the setting change mode. Shall be. Also, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 22-12 and 22-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at a timing before being controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and is kept on during the setting confirmation mode. Shall be.

  FIG. 22-30 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout) when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between the control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. Then, after the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is turned on, the mode shifts to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  In the example of FIGS. 22-30, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state even while the CPU 103 is executing the processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Here, the game control microcomputer 100 stops transmitting the connection confirmation command based on the control in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The connection confirmation command is a command for confirming the communication state with the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the serial communication circuit 21TM505 as described above.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns the PRDY signal ON based on the connection confirmation signal being ON. If the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is maintained in the ON state. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (that is, the state in which it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (that is, the game control microcomputer). When the CPU 103 is in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the PRDY signal is set to the ON state.

  When the card is received in the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 The PRDY signal is output to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the ON state of the PRDY signal. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. After a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Here, in the payout control board 21TM037, the PRDY signal is in the ON state, and the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are both in the ON state, but the connection control command is not received from the game control microcomputer 100. Based on this, the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 is not turned on. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (ie, the state in which the VL signal is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (ie, the game control microcomputer). 100), the PRDY signal is in the ON state (ie, the payout operation is possible by the payout control board 21TM037), and the BRDY signal is in the ON state (ie, the ball rental switch 21TM062). Is operated, and the ball lending switch signal is input), and the CPU 103 sets even if the BRQ signal is in the ON state (ie, a state in which a predetermined delay time has elapsed since the BRDY signal was turned ON). While processing in change mode or setting confirmation mode (while connection confirmation command is not received) It is without EXS signal ON state to the OFF state. As described above, even when the connection confirmation signal, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, and the BRQ signal are in the ON state, when the connection confirmation command is not transmitted, the EXS signal is in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. While the processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is being executed, ball lending (payout of game media) is not executed even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated.

  In this way, during the period in which the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are controlled, the game control microcomputer 100 does not transmit the connection confirmation command, so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has not received the connection confirmation command. Therefore, the EXS signal is not turned on. In this way, it is possible to prevent the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 from performing the payout control of the game medium. Further, the card unit 21TM050 can notify that ball lending is not executed (occurrence of ball lending error) based on the fact that the EXS signal is not turned on.

  Then, when a predetermined time elapses while the EXS signal is in the OFF state after the BRQ signal is turned on (when the timer set to a predetermined value times out), the card unit 21TM050 stops outputting the BRQ signal. I do. That is, the BRQ signal is turned off. Then, the card unit 21TM050 stops outputting the BRDY signal based on the BRQ signal being turned off. That is, the BRDY signal is turned off.

  When the CPU 103 ends the processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the transmission of the connection confirmation command is restarted. At this time, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the PRDY signal in the ON state.

  When the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated to input the ball lending switch signal, the card unit 21TM050 sends the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the ON state of the PRDY signal. Is output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. After a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 resumes the reception of the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100, and based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the ON state, The EXS signal to the unit 21TM050 is turned on, and the subsequent ball lending payout control is executed.

  In addition, during the game (the state in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed), a configuration is adopted in which the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Even in this case, the fourth ball lending restriction method shown in FIGS. 22-30 can be applied. Further, the PRDY signal can be output (turned on) regardless of whether the connection control signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (whether the connection is on or off). Even if such a configuration is adopted, the fourth ball lending restriction method shown in FIGS. 22-30 can be applied. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not set the EXS signal to the ON state based on not receiving a connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100 controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the ball lending from being executed during the period in which the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  Further, in FIG. 22-30, if a predetermined time elapses after the BRQ signal is turned on and the EXS signal is turned off (when a timer set to a predetermined value times out), the card unit 21TM050 Shows an example in which the BRQ signal is returned to the OFF state, and the BRDY signal is also returned to the OFF state. Even if a predetermined time has elapsed, the BRQ signal may be maintained in the ON state, and the BRDY signal may be maintained in the ON state. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 resumes the reception of the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100 (the completion of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode), and the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal. May be turned on based on the fact that both are on. Here, when the EXS signal is turned on, (1) the BRQ signal is turned off and the ball lending is automatically executed without operating the ball lending switch 21TM062 again (that is, the setting change mode or When the setting confirmation mode ends, a ball lending process according to the ball lending operation received during the setting change mode or the period of the setting confirmation mode may be executed.) (2) Ball lending When the switch 21TM062 is operated again, the BRQ signal may be turned off and ball lending may be executed.

(How to not execute the ball lending restriction during the setting change mode)
Next, a method of not executing the ball lending restriction during the setting change mode will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. In the example illustrated in FIGS. 22 to 31, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state during the period of being controlled to the setting change mode, and the connection confirmation signal is also in the ON state of the period of being controlled to the setting confirmation mode. Shall be. That is, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 22-12 and 22-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at a timing before being controlled to the setting change mode, and is kept on during the setting change mode. Shall be. Also, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 22-12 and 22-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at a timing before being controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and is kept on during the setting confirmation mode. Shall be.

  FIG. 22-31 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout) when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between the control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. Then, after the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is turned on, the mode shifts to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  In the example of FIGS. 22 to 31, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state while the CPU 103 is executing the processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Here, the game control microcomputer 100 continues to transmit the connection confirmation command even during the period of being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The connection confirmation command is a command for confirming the communication state with the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the serial communication circuit 21TM505 as described above.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the PRDY signal to the ON state based on the fact that the connection confirmation signal is ON and that the connection confirmation command has been received. If the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is maintained in the ON state. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (that is, in a state of being electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (that is, in the game control microcomputer 100). When the CPU 103 is in the state of being electrically connected) and receiving the connection confirmation command, regardless of whether the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the PRDY signal is output. Is turned on.

  When the card is received in the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 The PRDY signal is output to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the ON state of the PRDY signal. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. After a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  The payout control board 21TM037 outputs an EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, and the BRQ signal are all in the ON state and the connection confirmation command is being received. Is turned on, and when the fall (OFF) of the BRQ signal from the card unit 21TM050 is detected, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven to pay out a predetermined number (for example, 25) of game media to the player.

  As described above, even during the period in which the setting control mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the game control microcomputer 100 continuously transmits the connection confirmation command, thereby continuously receiving the connection confirmation command. On the control microcomputer 21TM370 side, the PRDY signal and the EXS signal are turned on. In this way, even during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the payout control of the game medium by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can be executed, and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set. The control load for preventing the payout control from being executed during the controlled period can be reduced. In addition, during the period in which the setting is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the communication function between the card unit 21TM050 and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be checked at the same time, and workability can be improved. it can.

  The CPU 103 continues to transmit the connection confirmation command even after ending the processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Based on continuing to receive the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the ON state of the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible.

  Note that when the payout of a predetermined number of game media is completed and the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped in the period in which the control is performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the payout control board 21TM037 stops outputting the EXS signal. . That is, the EXS signal is turned off. Then, the card unit 21TM050 stops outputting the BRDY signal based on the fact that the EXS signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal is turned off. As described above, during the period in which the setting is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the EXS signal may change from the ON state to the OFF state, and accordingly, the BRDY signal may change from the ON state to the OFF state. When the payout of a predetermined number of game media ends and the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 stops after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the payout control board 21TM037 stops outputting the EXS signal. That is, the EXS signal is turned off. Then, the card unit 21TM050 stops outputting the BRDY signal based on the fact that the EXS signal is in the OFF state. As described above, after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the EXS signal changes from the ON state to the OFF state, and accordingly, the BRDY signal may change from the ON state to the OFF state.

(How to restart ball lending after the end of setting change mode)
Next, FIG. 22-32 shows the processing in the case where the payout is interrupted due to the power cutoff during the ball lending is executed and the setting is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on thereafter. This will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. In the example shown in FIGS. 22 to 32, the payout of the game medium is interrupted based on the occurrence of the power supply interruption while the payout of the game medium is executed, and the control is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is turned on. After the change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the suspended payout is resumed.

  FIGS. 22-32 show the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control) when the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) executes payout of game media. FIG. 11 is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between the microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. While the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the PRDY signal and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. Is in the ON state.

  When the power is cut off during the period in which the payout control board 21TM037 is performing the payout of the game medium, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped, and the output of the PRDY signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. You. That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the output of the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are turned off. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, and the payout of the game medium is interrupted. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  The unpaid number is updated based on a detection signal from the number-of-payouts count switch 21TM301 input to the I / O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. More specifically, the number of unpaid items is calculated from a predetermined number of game media to be paid out by the payout motor 21TM289 (that is, a payout number designated by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25), and It is calculated by subtracting the number counted by the 21TM301 (that is, the number of game media actually paid out by the payout motor 21TM289).

  Thereafter, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process serving as a game control main process. Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 22-13, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. While the processing in the mode or the setting confirmation mode is being executed, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state.

  While the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection control signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state, so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not set the PRDY signal to the ON state. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not set the PRDY signal to the ON state but changes the state to the OFF state even when the VL signal is in the ON state, that is, even when the VL signal is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

  As a result, during the period when the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 performs the payout control based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the OFF state even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated. The BRDY signal is not output to the substrate 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains OFF. Even if a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains OFF.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state without turning the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the state in which the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. While the processing is being executed, the payout of the game medium is not executed.

  When the CPU 103 completes the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and executes the serial communication circuit setting processing of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. When the payout operation is possible, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal.

  Then, the power supply is restarted, and the payout control is performed based on the fact that the setting change mode or the setting check mode controlled at the time of turning on the power is ended (the connection check signal is turned on and the PRDY signal is turned on). The microcomputer 21TM370 drives the payout motor 21TM289 based on the content of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and drives the payout motor 21TM289 one by one until the data of the unpaid number becomes zero. Perform payout operation. As a result, the payout of the game medium that has been interrupted due to the power-off and the subsequent transition to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. As described above, when the supply of the game medium is interrupted due to the power outage during the execution of the ball lending, even if the setting is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode at the time of power restoration, the setting is not performed. After the end of the change mode or the setting confirmation mode, it is possible to resume the interrupted payout of the game medium and complete the ball lending.

  Here, in the example shown in FIGS. 22 to 32, the payout process is interrupted due to the power interruption during the payout process, and is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is restored. After the end of the above, an example in which the interrupted payout process is restarted is shown. However, this power-off is caused by the clerk of the game hall turning off the power switch 21TM055 in order to change or confirm the set value. It may be a power-off that has occurred or a power-off that has occurred due to turning off the power switch 21TM055 with the closing of the game arcade. Not only when the power is cut off, but also during the payout processing, the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, or the opening of the glass door frame 3a. In response to the state being detected, the payout process being executed is interrupted, and thereafter, the control is switched to the setting change mode or the setting check mode.After the end of the setting change mode or the setting check mode, the interrupted payout process is performed. You may make it restart.

(Forced termination of ball rental due to power outage)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 22 to 33, the processing when the payout is forcibly terminated (stopped) when the power is cut off while the ball lending is being performed and the payout is not restarted after the power is restored will be specifically described. explain. In the example shown in FIGS. 22-33, when the power supply is cut off during the execution of the payout of the game medium, the payout being executed is stopped, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled after the power is restored, The payout is not restarted and the payout is not restarted even after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  FIGS. 22-33 show the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control) when the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) executes payout of the game medium. FIG. 11 is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between the microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. While the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the PRDY signal and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. Is in the ON state.

  When the power is cut off during the period in which the payout control board 21TM037 is performing the payout of the game medium, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped, and the output of the PRDY signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. You. That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the output of the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, both the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are in the OFF state. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stops driving the payout motor 21TM289 based on the EXS signal being turned off, and forcibly ends (stops) the payout of the game medium. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is not stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (or the unpaid number storage buffer itself is not provided). Therefore, as shown below, after the power is restored, the payout of the game media corresponding to the unpaid number is not executed.

  Thereafter, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process serving as a game control main process. Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 22-13, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. While the processing in the mode or the setting confirmation mode is being executed, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state.

  Thereafter, while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not set the PRDY signal to the ON state but changes the state to the OFF state even when the VL signal is in the ON state, that is, even when the VL signal is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

  As a result, during the period when the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 performs the payout control based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the OFF state even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated. The BRDY signal is not output to the substrate 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains OFF. Even if a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains OFF.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state without turning the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the state in which the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. While the processing is being executed, the payout of the game medium is not executed.

  When the CPU 103 completes the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and executes the serial communication circuit setting processing of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. When the payout operation is possible, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal. Since the data of the number of unpaid items is not backed up, a predetermined amount to be paid out in the ball lending process which was executed before the power failure occurred (before being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode upon power restoration). Of the number of game media (that is, the number of payouts specified from the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25), the payout is not made for the unpaid number that has not been paid out due to the stoppage of the payout (forced termination). Not done. As described above, when the power is cut off during the ball lending, the payout is forcibly terminated (stopped), and thereafter, when the power is restored, the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the setting change mode or the setting is changed. By not executing the payout of the unpaid number after the confirmation mode is completed, the control of backing up the data of the unpaid number and restarting the payout becomes unnecessary, and the ball lending process can be simplified.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 22 to 33, when the power is cut off during the payout, the payout in progress is forcibly terminated (stopped) in the middle by not backing up the data of the unpaid number. Not limited to this mode, as in the example shown in FIGS. 22 to 32, when the power is cut off, the data of the unpaid number is backed up, and after the power is restored, the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are set. Under the condition that neither is controlled, the payout of the game media corresponding to the unpaid number is executed based on the data of the unpaid number that has been backed up (payout is restarted based on the backup data). When the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the payout of the game media corresponding to the unpaid number is not executed (the payout based on the backup data is not restarted), and the setting is not performed. Do not run the payout of unpaid coin number corresponding to the game medium even after the change mode or setting confirmation mode end may be so.

  In addition, during the game (the state in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed), a configuration is adopted in which the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Even in this case, the method of forcibly terminating the ball lending accompanying the shift to the setting change mode shown in FIGS. 22-33 can be applied. Further, the PRDY signal can be output (turned on) regardless of whether the connection control signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (whether the connection is on or off). Even if such a configuration is adopted, the method of forcibly terminating ball lending accompanying the shift to the setting change mode shown in FIGS. 22-33 can be applied. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not set the PRDY signal to the ON state based on not receiving a connection confirmation signal from the game control microcomputer 100 controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Thereby, it is possible to prevent payout (ball lending) from being executed during the period in which the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

(Award ball payout control)
FIG. 22-34 is a timing chart showing transmission and reception of signals between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during normal operation. As shown in FIGS. 22-34, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the reception ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Is received as the connection OK command. Upon receiving the connection OK command as the received ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits again the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal after a lapse of 1 s (1 second) from the reception. The game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-described connection confirmation communication processing as long as the connection state is normal.

  If there is a prize when the connection confirmation communication processing is not being executed (between the reception of the connection OK command as the received ACK signal and the transmission of the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal), The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of winning balls in the winning ball request signal, and transmits the winning ball number command as the set winning ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Upon receiving the winning ball number command as the winning ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 pays out the number of winning balls specified by the winning ball number command, and pays out the winning ball (winning ball payout operation). Upon completion, a prize ball end command as a received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. Upon receiving the prize ball end command as a received ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal 1 s (1 second) after the reception.

  Although not shown, a prize is awarded during execution of communication processing for connection confirmation (from transmission of a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to reception of a connection OK command as a received ACK signal). In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the data indicating the number of winning balls to the winning ball request signal, and sends the set winning ball number command as the set winning ball request signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. After receiving the connection OK command as a reception ACK signal, the connection control section 21 transmits the connection OK command to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Upon receiving the winning ball number command as the winning ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 pays out the number of winning balls specified by the winning ball number command, and pays out the winning ball (winning ball payout operation). Upon completion, a prize ball end command as a received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. During the execution of the prize ball payout (prize ball payout operation), a prize ball preparation command as a received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

(Winning is invalid during the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode)
FIG. 22-35 is a timing chart showing transmission and reception of signals between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process.

  As described above, until the CPU 103 executes the interruption permission (step S21TM1540) shown in FIG. 22-13, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, the first general winning opening switch to the fourth winning port switch. A special symbol process including a jackpot determination process and the like, in which a switch process (step S21TM1620 shown in FIG. 22-14) for confirming a state of each of the general winning opening switch and the count switch 23 (the presence or absence of a detection signal) is not executed. The processing (step S21TM1690 shown in FIG. 22-14) and the like are not executed. Therefore, while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the CPU 103 does not detect the detection signal output from each switch, and does not execute the big hit determination processing or the like. That is, during the period in which the game medium is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the winning is invalid even if the game medium passes through each winning opening. Further, since the switch process is not executed, the detection of the game ball by the outlet switch 21TM070 is not executed, and the totaling of the base is not executed. In other words, until the interruption permission is executed, the tabulation of each item such as the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base is not required. , And the processing load on the CPU 103 can be reduced.

  During the period in which the game is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the game control microcomputer 100 does not execute the switch process and the special symbol process process, thereby invalidating the winning based on the game medium passing through each winning opening. And That is, it does not transmit the winning ball number command to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and does not execute the big hit determination processing or the like. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not drive the payout motor 21TM289 based on not receiving the winning ball number command from the game control microcomputer 100. That is, even if the game medium passes through each winning opening during the period of being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the payout control of the prize ball is not executed.

  When the CPU 103 finishes the processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the first to fourth general winning port switches to the fourth general winning port switch, and the count switch 23 A switch process for confirming the state of each switch (presence or absence of a detection signal) can be executed, it can be detected that the game medium has passed through each winning opening, and a prize ball number command (and a connection confirmation command) can be transmitted. Become. In addition, it becomes possible to execute a special symbol process including a jackpot determination process.

  The game control microcomputer 100 transmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 which has received the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal receives the ACK. A connection OK command is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100 as a signal. At this time, when the game medium passes through any of the winning holes (when a winning is generated), the CPU 103 detects the winning by executing a switch process, and the microcomputer 100 for game control controls the gaming control microcomputer 100 as a winning ball request signal. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, which has transmitted the prize ball number command to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 and received the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, drives the payout motor 21TM289 to drive a predetermined number (for example, three). Pay out game media. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has paid out a predetermined number of game media transmits a winning ball end command as a received ACK signal.

  If the switch process is executed during the setting change mode period in which the setting value may be changed, the jackpot determination random number is extracted, and the jackpot determination is performed based on the jackpot determination random number. In the case where the big hit is determined based on the big hit determination random number which is a big hit with the set value before the change but is not a big hit with the set value after the change (the set value after the determination), Although the setting value of (1) does not result in a big hit, there may be a case where the big hit determination is executed based on the big hit determination random number which becomes the big hit with the changed set value (set value after determination). That is, in these cases, the relationship between the execution timing of the big hit determination and the set value becomes complicated, and the player or the playground may be disadvantaged.

  In this embodiment, when the game mode is controlled to the setting change mode, the payout of the prize ball based on the passing of the game ball through each winning port is not performed, and the big hit determination process is not performed. Is prevented from complicating the relationship between the execution timing and the set value, and disadvantages of the player or the playground are prevented.

  In this embodiment, in addition to the setting change mode in which the set value can be changed, in the setting check mode in which the set value is displayed but cannot be changed, similarly, the winning is invalidated, and the big hit determination process is not performed. I have to. Unlike the setting change mode, the setting check mode can be controlled when the game control timer interrupt process is executed instead of when the power is turned on, and the switch period is controlled during the setting check mode. If the special symbol process can be executed, a completely different control from the setting change mode is required, and a problem arises in that the control load of the game control microcomputer 100 increases.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, even in the setting confirmation mode, control can be performed only at the time of turning on the power, similarly to the setting change mode. By not executing the processing, the processing is made common and the control load of the game control microcomputer 100 is reduced.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 22-12 and 22-13, the timer interrupt is set after the processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed (step S21TM1500). . Therefore, since the game control timer interrupt process itself is not executed, the switch process and the special symbol process process in the game control timer interrupt process are not executed, and the game control timer interrupt process is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Winning in has been disabled. On the other hand, when the game is stopped due to a magnetic error, a radio wave error, a vibration error, or the like, whether a game stop error has occurred during the period in which the game control timer interrupt process is being executed, that is, during the game. If it is determined (step S21TM1615) that a game stop error has occurred (step S21TM1615), subsequent switch processing (step S21TM1620) and special symbol processing (step S21TM) in the same interrupt processing are performed. S21TM1690) is not executed, so that the winning is invalidated. As described above, the method of invalidating the winning (stopping the game) differs between the case where the control is performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and the case where the game stop error occurs.

  Note that by stopping the transmission of the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during the period in which the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not transmit a connection OK command as a received ACK signal to the game control microcomputer 100. Therefore, the microcomputer 100 for game control controls the microcomputer 21TM370 for payout as a prize ball request signal based on the fact that the connection OK command has not been received during the period of being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. By not transmitting the award ball number command, it is possible to prevent the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 from executing the payout control of the game medium. As described above, based on the fact that the game control microcomputer 100 does not output the connection confirmation command and the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not execute the payout control, Winning can be invalidated.

  Note that, during a game (a state in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed), the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 may be operated to control the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. . Even when such a configuration is adopted, the method shown in FIGS. 22 to 35 is applicable, and based on the control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the game control microcomputer 100 , Switch processing and special symbol processing are preferably not executed.

  In addition, a configuration in which the game control microcomputer 100 can execute a switch process while being controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (a configuration in which it is possible to detect that the game medium has passed each winning opening). It is good. When such a configuration is adopted, as described above, the transmission of the prize ball number command and the connection confirmation command is stopped while being controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, so that the payout control is performed. The payout is invalidated without causing the microcomputer 21TM370 to execute the payout control, and the special symbol process is not executed. Then, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the transmission of the winning ball number command and the connection confirmation command is resumed in a state where the switch processing can be executed, and the special symbol process processing is executed.

(Payout restriction method during detection of gaming machine frame / door frame opening)
FIG. 22-36 is a timing chart showing transmission and reception of signals between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during the detection of the opening of the gaming machine frame / door frame. As described above, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the reception ACK transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during the normal operation. A connection OK command is received as a signal. At this time, when a clerk of the game hall opens the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 causes the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door. An open state of the frame 3a is detected.

  In the state in which the gaming machine frame 3 is open (and in the case where the glass door frame 3a and the upper plate are integrated, the state in which the glass door frame 3a is open), award balls to be paid out Is not physically connected to the path where the flowing prize balls are stored.If the prize balls are paid out in this state, the game media reaches the upper plate. Without falling. Here, in a state where the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is open, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first general winning opening to the fourth general winning opening, and the large winning opening. When the passage of the game medium is detected at any one of the winning ports, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a prize ball number command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, which detects the open state of the frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, does not execute the payout control of the game medium, and sends a prize ball preparation command as a received ACK signal to the game control microcomputer 100. Send to This prize ball preparation command is issued until the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 no longer detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, that is, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Transmission to the game control microcomputer 100 is continued until the state is closed.

  In this manner, during the period in which the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, even if the game medium passes through each winning opening and detects a winning, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the payout motor 21TM289. Is not executed without driving the prize ball. Then, a prize ball preparation command as a received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

  When the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 finishes detecting the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 activates the payout motor 21TM289. It is driven to execute a payout control of a predetermined number (a number specified by a prize ball number command) of prize balls according to a prize during a period in which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected. . Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has paid out the predetermined number of game media transmits a winning ball end command as a received ACK signal.

  When detecting the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a during the payout of the prize ball, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 suspends the payout of the prize ball, and The data of the unpaid number out of the number specified by the number command is stored in the backup area in the RAM. Then, a prize ball preparation command as a received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. When the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 finishes detecting the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 activates the payout motor 21TM289. It drives and executes the payout control of the game media corresponding to the number of unpaid. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has paid out the game medium transmits a prize ball end command as a received ACK signal.

  It should be noted that, during the game (a state in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed), a configuration is adopted in which the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Even in this case, the payout restriction method during the detection of the opening of the gaming machine frame / door frame shown in FIGS. 22-36 can be applied. In this embodiment, the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and operate as long as the gaming machine frame 3 that can be opened by a predetermined key operation is not opened. It is considered impossible. Therefore, in order to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the gaming machine frame 3 must be opened, and during the period in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, Normally, the machine frame 3 is open. During the period in which the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is restricted so that the payout of the prize balls is not executed. As a result, the payout of the prize balls during the period when the setting change mode is being controlled and the period when the setting confirmation mode is being controlled are restricted.

  Next, control when power is cut off during the setting change mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 22-37 (1) and (2).

  FIGS. 22-37 (1) and (2) show the patterns related to the power-down in different charts based on the difference in the situation when the power-down occurs. The power-off pattern shown in FIG. 22-37 (1) indicates the control when the power-off occurs in a state where “set value confirmation” is not performed during “setting value change”, and the power-off recovery is performed. The set value at the time becomes the set value at the time of the previous power-on. Further, the power-off pattern shown in FIG. 22-37 (2) shows the control when the power-off occurs in the situation where the “set value decision” has been performed while “the set value is being changed”. The set value at the time of power recovery is the set value at the time of power failure.

  That is, FIG. 22-37 (1) shows a setting in a case where the power is cut off in a state where the “set value confirmation” operation in which the lock switch 21TM051 is operated to the OFF state is not performed (the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state). FIG. 22-37 (2) shows the control related to the set value when the power is cut off after the operation of “set value confirmation” in which the lock switch 21TM051 is operated to the OFF state. Is shown.

  FIGS. 22-37 (1) and (2) show various situations in the work of setting change from the top to the bottom in the order of occurrence (see the “order” and “status” columns). ). Further, in FIGS. 22-37 (1) and (2), the ON / OFF state of the lock switch 21TM051 in each situation (order 1 to 8) is shown in the column of “lock switch”. In the column of "set value", set value data (set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102) in each situation is shown. In the column of “set value display” in the figure, the display contents (set values stored in the setting information temporary storage area) of the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) in each situation are shown. I have.

  When the setting is changed, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on (order 1) as shown in the uppermost column of the “status” column in FIG. 22-37 (1). As shown in the “lock switch” column, the lock switch 21TM051 at this time is in the ON state. In FIG. 22-37 (1), the “set value” at the time of “power-on” in order 1 is “1” because the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 at this time is “1”. , "1".

  Also, the display content of the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) shown in the column of "set value display" is blank (blank) just at the time of turning on the power at this stage. Since the process of reading and displaying the set value stored in the set value storage area (step S21TM1150) is not performed, it indicates that the display of the set value has not been started.

  After the “power-on” status, the “setting change mode starts” status (order 2). Then, in the “setting change mode start”, as shown in FIG. 22-37 (1), the “lock switch” column is “ON”, and the “setting value” column is the RAM 102. Is set to “1” based on the fact that the set value is not changed from the set value stored in the set value storage area of the set value storage area of the RAM 102 as described above. Is set to “1” based on the fact that the setting value read from the setting information and stored in the setting information temporary storage area is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A).

  Subsequently, when the setting value is being changed (order 3), the “lock switch” column remains “ON” and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated. As shown in FIG. 22-37 (1), since the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not changed, the “set value” column remains “1”, but the setting information is temporarily stored. By changing the set value stored in the area from “1” to “2”, the “set value display” column (set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A)) The selected value changes to “2”.

  Further, when the status of “setting value is being changed” is set (order 4), the “lock switch” column remains “ON”, and when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, As shown in FIG. 22-37 (1), although the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is not changed, the “setting value” column remains “1”, but the setting information temporary storage area Is changed from “2” to “3”, the “set value display” column (set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A)) is selected. To the new value "3".

  Then, as shown in FIG. 22-37 (1), when the power is turned off during “change of the set value” (order 5), the operation for finalizing the set value is not performed, and the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is set. Has not been executed (the process of step S21TM1190 for finalizing the set value), the column of “set value” remains “1”. That is, when the power is turned off, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 maintains the state of “1” when the power is turned on. Here, the set value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is erased due to the occurrence of the power interruption.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 22-37 (1), when the power is turned on while the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON (order 6), In the “setting change mode start” situation (order 7), the setting value (“1” in this example) stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read out and stored in the setting information temporary storage area. Is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A), the "set value" column remains "1", and the "set value display" column also becomes "1". Note that, in the order 7, the same applies to the case where the setting is changed to the setting confirmation mode instead of the setting change mode.

  As described above, when the power is turned on, the mode is changed to the setting change mode, and the setting change operation is not completed (the lock switch 21TM051 is not switched to the OFF state). Since the set value stored in the storage area has not been changed, the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) when the mode is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the restoration of the power is: The setting values stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 at the time of the previous power-on (before the power-off occurs) are used. As described above, it is possible to appropriately set a set value in the case where power is cut off while being controlled in the setting change mode.

  Next, the control in the case where the power is cut off after the set value is determined will be described with reference to FIG. The description of the processing part common to the case where the power supply is cut off before the set value is determined will be omitted. When the power is cut off after the set value is determined, it is assumed that the “set value change” shown in order 5 is performed after the “setting value is being changed” shown in order 4. Here, immediately before the operation for fixing the set value is performed, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is “1”, and the set value ( The display monitor 21TM029 (the set value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A) is in the state of “3”. Then, during the setting change mode, the “lock switch” column is set to “OFF” based on turning off the lock switch 21TM051.

  That is, in the setting change mode, when the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off (YES in step S21TM1180), the setting value “1” stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is stored in the setting information temporary storage area. The stored set value (set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A)) is overwritten by "3", and the set value is determined (step S21TM1190). As a result, “3” is stored as the set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102.

  Then, if a power failure occurs in this state (order 6), the process of overwriting the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (the process of step S21TM1190 for fixing the set value) is executed. The column of “setting value” is “3”. That is, when the power is turned off, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is changed to “3” which is different from the value when the power is turned on. Here, the set value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is erased due to the occurrence of the power interruption.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 22-37 (2), when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the OFF state to the ON state and the power is turned on (order 7), the status of the “setting change mode start” thereafter ( In order 8), the setting value (“3” in this example) stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read and stored in the setting information temporary storage area, and the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A). ), The “set value” column is “3”, and the “set value display” column is also “3”. Note that, in the order 8, the same applies to the case where the setting is changed to the setting confirmation mode instead of the setting change mode.

  As described above, when the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off without turning off the lock switch 21TM051 while being controlled in the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is not turned off. The setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 has not been changed since the power was turned on, and the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is deleted. Therefore, a clerk of a game arcade may erroneously shift the gaming machine to the setting change mode when the power is turned on, and further perform a setting change operation (operation of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052). However, by subsequently turning off the power switch 21TM055, the change of the set value can be stopped to return to the state before shifting to the setting change mode.

  The transition to the setting change mode and the transition to the setting confirmation mode involve power-off (including turning off the power switch 21TM055) and subsequent power-on, so that the state of the gaming machine is unstable. The handling of the set value in such an unstable state becomes a problem. However, as shown in FIG. 22-37 (1), the power is supplied without turning the lock switch 21TM051 to the OFF state. When a power failure occurs, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not changed from the time of power-on, so that the set value can be appropriately determined and the control of the set value becomes unstable. Therefore, appropriate control relating to the set value can be executed.

  FIG. 22-38 shows an effect device of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the lock switch 21TM051 or the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated during a game (a state in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed). An example is shown in which (image display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R, and game effect lamp 9) notifies that an operation for changing a set value has been performed.

  FIG. 22-38 (1) shows a state in which a decorative symbol is variably displayed on the image display device 5 during a game. At this time, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing a game control timer interrupt process. The main board 11 (CPU 103) detects that the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated (switched from the OFF state to the ON state) during the game (for example, during the variable display of a special symbol) (game control). (Step S21TM1660 of timer interrupt processing for game), and transmits a lock switch operation command indicating that lock switch 21TM051 has been operated to effect control board 12 (CPU 120 for effect control) (step S21TM1710 of timer interrupt processing for game control). ), When it is detected that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 has been operated (step S21TM1660 of the game control timer interrupt process), the setting changeover switch operation indicating that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 has been operated Command to the production control board 12 And transmits to the effect control CPU 120) (step a game control timer interruption process S21TM1710). That is, a lock switch operation command and / or a setting changeover switch operation command are transmitted to notify that an operation for changing the setting value has been performed.

  As shown in FIG. 22-38 (2), the effect control board 12 (the effect control CPU 120) receives the lock switch operation command and / or the setting changeover switch operation command, and based on the reception of the setting change mode and the setting changeover switch operation command. It is possible to specify that an operation for changing the set value has been performed, and to notify the user of the fact that control is not performed in any of the setting check modes. For example, based on the reception of the lock switch operation command, the image display device 5 executes an abnormal operation warning notification that displays the characters “lock switch operation detected.” Also, based on the reception of the setting changeover switch operation command, an abnormal operation warning notification displaying the character “Operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected.” Is executed.

  In this example, based on the reception of both the lock switch operation command and the setting changeover switch operation command, the effect control CPU 120 detects the operation of the lock switch and the setting changeover switch as the abnormal operation warning notification. Are displayed on the image display device 5. In the abnormal operation warning notification, since the display priority is higher than the background image and the decorative pattern (the displayed layer is higher than the background image and the decorative pattern), as shown in FIG. Even during the variable display of the symbol, the clerk at the game hall, etc., confirms that the operation for changing the set value has been performed even though it is not controlled in any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. By grasping clearly, it is possible to confirm whether or not fraud has been performed. Note that the speaker 8L, 8R outputs a sound (for example, a sound indicating that the operation of the lock switch and the setting changeover switch has been detected) to notify that the operation for changing the set value has been detected, and outputs the game effect lamp 9. May be emitted in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, a red blinking mode) to notify that an operation for changing the set value has been detected.

  In this embodiment, only when the power is turned on (before the game control timer interrupt processing is executed), the configuration can be set to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Normally, the setting value is changed or confirmed. (Operation of the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052) is not performed during a period in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed. Accordingly, the operation of the lock switch 21TM051 and the operation of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are performed during the period in which the special symbol and the decorative symbol are variably displayed or the period in which the normal symbol is variably displayed. In such a case, there is a possibility that the setting value is being illegally changed.

  In this embodiment, when the lock switch 21TM051 and / or the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are operated at a timing other than the time when the power is turned on or during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled. Informs that an operation for changing the set value and an operation for confirming the set value have been performed on the image display device 5, which is the largest display device provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1, to detect the fraud. I try to deter them.

  Further, as described above, when the lock switch 21TM051 and / or the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are operated, the gaming machine frame 3 is normally in an open state, so that the gaming machine frame / door frame is opened. The open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected by the sensor 21TM300, and the fact is notified. In addition, as described above, ball lending is interrupted or stopped, and award ball payout is also interrupted or stopped. However, with respect to the pachinko gaming machine 1 installed at a predetermined position on the gaming island, the gaming machine frame 3 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 installed at a position facing the predetermined position on the gaming island is opened. Thus, the back side of the gaming board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 installed at the predetermined position can be seen from the position facing the predetermined position, and the lock switch 21TM051 and / or the clear switch ( Setting switch 21TM052 can be operated. That is, even when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 at a predetermined position does not detect the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3, the lock switch 21TM051 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the predetermined position and In some cases, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be operated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the lock switch 21TM051 and / or the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are set regardless of whether the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300. When the operation is performed, the fact that an operation for changing the set value and an operation for confirming the set value are performed is notified to enhance the deterrence of fraud.

(Setting change corresponding signal)
Next, various signals output from the information output terminal of the main board 11 will be specifically described. As shown in FIGS. 22 to 39, the information output circuit 112 in this embodiment is provided with ten information output terminals from a first terminal to a tenth terminal, and outputs a signal corresponding to each information output terminal. Is done.

  In the example of pattern 1 shown in FIG. 22-39 (1), a prize ball signal is output from the first terminal. The prize ball signal is a pulse signal output every time ten prize balls are paid out, and has a pulse width of 0.1 second. A game machine frame / door frame open signal is output from the second terminal. The gaming machine frame / door frame opening signal is turned on when the gaming machine frame 3 opening state is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, and the opening state of the glass door frame 3a is detected. It is also in the ON state when it is on.

  From the third terminal, a signal for all symbol determination times is output. The all symbol determination count signal is output when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and the display result is derived and displayed (when it is determined), and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed to derive the display result. This is a pulse-like signal output when displayed (when it is determined), and has a pulse width of 0.5 seconds. From the fourth terminal, an all starting port signal is output. The all-starting-port signal is a pulse-shaped signal that is output when a game ball is won to the first starting winning port and is also output when a game ball is winning to the second starting winning port. And the pulse width is 0.1 second.

  One signal of the big hit is output from the fifth terminal. The big hit 1 signal is turned on when the big hit game state is controlled. Two signals are output from the sixth terminal. The big hit 2 signal is turned on when being controlled to the big hit gaming state, and is also turned on when being controlled to the high base state. That is, a period in which one big hit signal is in the OFF state and two big hit signals are in the ON state can be specified as the high base state.

  A setting change correspondence signal is output from the seventh terminal. The setting change corresponding signal is a signal that is turned on during the period of being controlled in the setting change mode and is also turned on during the period of being controlled in the setting confirmation mode. The setting change corresponding signal can be output in a pulse form (special mode) after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, as described later. It is possible.

  An out signal is output from the eighth terminal. The out signal is a pulse signal output every time 10 out balls (game balls fired in the game area and guided to the outlet) are detected by the outlet switch 21TM070, and the pulse width is 0. .1 second. A winning signal is output from the ninth terminal. A winning signal is generated each time a game ball wins in each winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, large winning opening, first general winning opening to fourth general winning opening) (corresponding to each winning opening). This is a pulse-shaped signal that is output each time a winning is detected by the switch) and is output each time 10 winning balls are paid out. The pulse width of the winning signal is 0.1 second.

  A security signal is output from the tenth terminal. The security signal is a signal that is turned on for 30 seconds when an initialization process (RAM clear in step S21TM1410) is executed when the power is turned on. In addition, when an injustice is detected, it is turned on for 4 minutes. In the case where an illegal act is detected, for example, a case where an abnormal winning is generated is included, and an abnormal frequency is displayed in each winning opening (for example, a game ball is played in the first starting winning opening at a frequency of 15 times or more per 30 seconds). An abnormal winning is determined based on the fact that the game ball has won in the case of winning). In addition, this includes the case where the switch abnormality detection has occurred, and the period in which the switch corresponding to each winning opening is in the winning detection state is abnormal (for example, the game control timer interrupt process is performed 10 times or more consecutively. (1 When the start port switch is in the ON state, etc.), it is determined that the switch is abnormal. When the magnetic sensor detects the abnormal magnetism, based on the occurrence of the game stop target error, the ON state continues until the power is turned off, and when the abnormal magnetism is not detected after the power is turned on again ( After the error is cleared), it is ON for 4 minutes.

  Furthermore, in the example of pattern 1 shown in FIG. 22-39 (1), the security signal is turned on during the period of being controlled in the setting change mode, and is also turned on during the period of being controlled in the setting confirmation mode. .

  As described above, the security signal can be output from the tenth terminal, and the setting change correspondence signal can be output from the seventh terminal. It is possible to notify to the outside that the control has been performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (the processing related to the setting change has been executed). Also, with the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the setting change corresponding signal output from the seventh terminal is temporarily turned off, and then stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 from the same seventh terminal. Since the number of pulse-like setting change correspondence signals corresponding to the current setting value is output, the setting value can be notified to the outside.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 22-40 (1), when the mode shifts to the setting change mode when the power is turned on, a setting corresponding change signal is output from the seventh terminal, and at the same time, from the tenth terminal. Outputs a security signal. Then, based on the execution of the RAM clear, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds even after the setting change corresponding signal is turned off with the end of the setting change mode.

  As shown in FIG. 22-40 (2), when the mode shifts to the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on, a setting change corresponding signal is output from the seventh terminal, and at the same time, a security signal is output from the tenth terminal. Is output. Then, based on the fact that the RAM clear is not executed, the setting change corresponding signal and the security signal are simultaneously turned off with the end of the setting confirmation mode. Here, if the RAM clear is executed after the control is switched to the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on (NO in step S21TM1320 or NO in step S21TM1330), the example shown in FIG. Similarly to the above, the security signal is kept ON for 30 seconds even after the setting change corresponding signal is turned OFF with the end of the setting confirmation mode.

  When the RAM is cleared without switching to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds after the power is turned on. Does not turn on.

  As described above, the security signal is also in the ON state while being controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, even when the external device does not assume the input of the setting change corresponding signal and is configured not to execute the processing based on the input of the setting change corresponding signal, at least the external device is configured not to perform the processing based on the input of the security signal. Thus, it is possible to recognize that control may be performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  The setting change corresponding signal is turned off when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, but the security signal is changed in the setting change mode (or the parity in the setting confirmation mode) based on the execution of the RAM clear. It remains ON for 30 seconds after the end of (if the result of the check is not normal). On the other hand, when the RAM is cleared without being controlled by any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds from when the power is turned on. Therefore, on the external device side to which the security signal is input, when the input period of the security signal is about 30 seconds, the RAM clear is executed without being controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is possible to recognize that there is a possibility. On the other hand, when the input period of the security signal exceeds 30 seconds, it is possible to recognize that the control may be performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the input period of the security signal reaches 30 seconds. If not, it is possible to recognize that the RAM clear may not have been executed after being controlled to the setting confirmation mode. That is, when the input period of the security signal is about 30 seconds, it is determined that the RAM clear may have been executed without being controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. When the security signal can be recognized by the device and the input period of the security signal is less than 30 seconds, the management device can recognize that the device may be temporarily controlled to the setting confirmation mode. If the period exceeds 30 seconds, the management apparatus can recognize that the setting change mode may have been controlled. Therefore, it is possible to distinguish what control is performed by the gaming machine on the outside based on the output period of the security signal of the gaming machine.

  Therefore, even when the external device does not assume the input of the setting change corresponding signal and is configured not to execute the processing based on the input of the setting change corresponding signal, at least the external device is configured not to perform the processing based on the input of the security signal. Thus, the possibility of executing the RAM clear and the possibility of being controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode can be distinguished and recognized.

  Note that as shown in FIG. 22C, the security signal may not be output during the period in which the mode is controlled to the setting confirmation mode. This configuration includes a configuration in which a security signal is output during the period of being controlled in the setting change mode, and a period in which the security signal is not output during the period of being controlled in the setting confirmation mode. Does not output the security signal and does not output the security signal even during the period in which the mode is controlled to the setting confirmation mode. Specifically, when the mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on, the setting correspondence change signal is output from the seventh terminal, but the security signal is not output from the tenth terminal. When the setting change corresponding signal is turned off with the end of the setting check mode, the off state of the security signal is maintained based on the fact that the RAM is not cleared. That is, when the mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode, the security signal is not output on condition that the RAM clear is not executed.

  As described above, in the configuration in which the security signal is not output during the period of being controlled in the setting confirmation mode, the RAM is cleared after being controlled to the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on, as shown in FIG. In this case (NO in step S21TM1320 or NO in step S21TM1330), the security signal is ON for 30 seconds from the end of the setting confirmation mode (OFF state of the setting change corresponding signal).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 22D, the security signal may not be output during the period when the mode is controlled to the setting change mode. That is, when the mode is changed to the setting change mode when the power is turned on, the setting correspondence change signal is output from the seventh terminal, but the security signal is not output from the tenth terminal. Then, based on the fact that the RAM has been cleared with the end of the setting change mode, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds even after the setting change corresponding signal is turned off. In the configuration in which the security signal is not output during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, if the RAM is cleared without shifting to any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on. The security signal is turned on for 30 seconds after the power is turned on, but the setting change corresponding signal is not turned on.

  As described above, while the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is being controlled, the setting change corresponding signal is set to the ON state while the security signal is set to the OFF state, and when the RAM is cleared, the setting change mode or the setting change mode is set. By turning on the security signal for 30 seconds after the setting confirmation mode ends (after the setting change corresponding signal is turned off), when one signal is on, the other signal is turned off. Relationship. Due to such a relationship, the signal output control is simplified (the output control is simplified because both signals are not turned on at the same time), and the control period to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is clarified in the external device. And that the initialization process has been executed upon termination of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 22-40 (6), when the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, the game is started from the second terminal. A machine frame / door frame open signal is output, and at the same time, a security signal is output from the tenth terminal. Then, based on the fact that the detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is completed with the closing of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, After the machine frame / door frame open signal is turned off, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds.

  Here, in the example of the pattern 1 shown in FIG. 22-39 (1), the setting change corresponding signal is output from the seventh terminal, and the security signal is output from the tenth terminal. There is a case where it is difficult to assign an output terminal dedicated to the setting change correspondence signal due to restrictions on the assignment of the setting change correspondence signal. The example of the pattern 2 shown in FIG. 22-39 (2) shows an example in which the setting change corresponding signal is also output from the tenth terminal from which the security signal is output.

  In the pattern 2, the first to sixth terminals, the eighth terminal, and the ninth terminal are the same as in the signal assignment in the pattern 1. In pattern 2, unlike pattern 1, a high base signal is output from the seventh terminal. The high base signal is turned on when being controlled to the high base state. A security signal is output from the tenth terminal. The security signal is a signal that is turned on for 30 seconds when an initialization process (RAM clear in step S21TM1410) is executed when the power is turned on. In addition, when an injustice is detected, it is turned on for 4 minutes. In the case where an illegal act is detected, for example, a case where an abnormal winning is generated is included, and an abnormal frequency is displayed in each winning opening (for example, a game ball is played in the first starting winning opening at a frequency of 15 times or more per 30 seconds). An abnormal winning is determined based on the fact that the game ball has won in the case of winning). In addition, this includes the case where the switch abnormality detection has occurred, and the period in which the switch corresponding to each winning opening is in the winning detection state is abnormal (for example, the game control timer interrupt process is performed 10 times or more consecutively. (1 When the start port switch is in the ON state, etc.), it is determined that the switch is abnormal. When the magnetic sensor detects the abnormal magnetism, based on the occurrence of the game stop target error, the ON state continues until the power is turned off, and when the abnormal magnetism is not detected after the power is turned on again ( After the error is cleared), it is ON for 4 minutes.

  Further, in the example of FIG. 22-39 (2), a setting change corresponding signal is output from the tenth terminal. The setting change corresponding signal is a signal that is turned on during the period of being controlled in the setting change mode and is also turned on during the period of being controlled in the setting confirmation mode. The setting change corresponding signal can be output in a pulse form (special mode) after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, as described later. It is possible. Therefore, a security signal and a setting change correspondence signal are output from the tenth terminal. That is, the security signal and the setting change correspondence signal are output from the common terminal.

  As described above, since the security signal and the setting change correspondence signal can be output from the tenth terminal, it is possible to notify the possibility that an illegal act has been performed to the outside, and to provide an output terminal dedicated to the setting change correspondence signal. Without this, it is possible to notify outside that there is a possibility that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has been controlled (that there is a possibility that a process related to the setting change has been executed). Further, with the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the setting change corresponding signal output from the tenth terminal is temporarily turned OFF (when the RAM clear is executed, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is disabled). After 30 seconds from the end, the signal output from the tenth terminal is turned off), and thereafter, from the same tenth terminal, the number of pulse-shaped pulses corresponding to the current set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 Since the setting change corresponding signal is output, the setting value can be notified to the outside. Since the setting change corresponding signal is transmitted to the management device together with the game machine number (vehicle number) via the relay device provided on the gaming machine island, the management device sets the set value based on the machine number and the setting change corresponding signal. By displaying the set value and the predetermined set value in association with each other, it is possible to perform a process of displaying the set value in a comparable manner. As a result, the actual setting values of the plurality of gaming machines can be easily managed by the manager of the gaming arcade through the management device, and the setting values determined in advance by the manager and the settings changed in the setting change work. The inconsistency with the value can be grasped by the administrator. Then, when such inconsistency has occurred, by performing setting confirmation or setting change work again for the gaming machine, it is possible to achieve appropriate management of settings for a plurality of gaming machines in the game arcade. it can.

  As described above, the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off with the end of the setting change mode and the end of the setting confirmation mode, but thereafter, the signal corresponding to the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is output. Output in a special manner. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 22-41, a number of pulses corresponding to the set value are output as a special mode setting change corresponding signal. In this example, the same pulses as the number of set values are output. The width of the pulse is, for example, 0.1 second. For example, when the set value is 3, a pulse having a width of 0.1 second is output three times at predetermined intervals (for example, 0.5 second intervals). This makes it possible to easily specify the set value of each gaming machine in an external device such as a hall computer.

  As shown in FIG. 22-42 (1), the setting change corresponding signal is turned on when the power is turned on and the setting change mode is controlled. Here, it is assumed that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on is 1. Then, in the setting change mode, it is assumed that the setting change mode ends without the setting value being changed. With the end of the setting change mode, the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off. However, based on the fact that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is 1, the setting change corresponding signal in the special mode is set. Is output as one pulse.

  As described above, it is possible to notify the outside whether or not the setting change mode is controlled by the setting change corresponding signal, and to set the value at the end of the setting change mode (when the setting value is changed, (A set value after change) can be notified to the outside, and a signal for notifying whether or not the mode is controlled to the setting change mode and a signal for notifying the set value are output from a common information output terminal. Becomes possible.

  Further, in this embodiment, not only when the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are completed, but also at a predetermined timing, a pulse corresponding to the set value is output as a setting change corresponding signal in a special mode. You. Specifically, events related to the gaming state, such as being controlled to the jackpot gaming state, ending the jackpot gaming state, ending the high base state, and increasing the number of paid prize balls by 1000. When an event related to a gaming machine error such as detection of the opening of the gaming machine frame 3, detection of the opening of the glass door frame 3 a, detection of a magnetic abnormality, etc. (When it occurs), a setting change corresponding signal in a special mode corresponding to the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is output. In the example shown in FIG. 22-42 (1), one pulse is output as a special mode setting change corresponding signal in response to the occurrence of a big hit.

  Thereby, in the external device, it is possible to secure an opportunity to grasp the setting value of each gaming machine. For example, when the setting change corresponding signal is not properly input at the end of the setting change mode, the external device Even if the set value cannot be specified on the side, the set value can be specified at a predetermined subsequent timing, and the prevention of fraudulent change of the set value by an inappropriate method can be enhanced.

  In the example shown in FIG. 22-42 (2), the setting change corresponding signal is turned on when the power is turned on and the setting change mode is controlled. Here, it is assumed that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on is 1. Then, it is assumed that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 has been changed from 1 to 3 as a result of the change of the set value in the setting change mode. In this case, with the end of the setting change mode, the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off, and based on the fact that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 becomes 3, the setting change corresponding signal is turned off. Three pulses are output as a signal. In the example shown in FIG. 22-42 (2), a pulse of 3 is output as a setting change correspondence signal in a special mode triggered by the occurrence of a big hit.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 22-41 (1), the operation of changing the set value (the operation of the setting changeover switch 21TM052) was not performed while being controlled in the setting change mode, and the set value was not changed. In the case and as shown in FIG. 22-41 (2), an operation of changing the set value (operation of the setting changeover switch 21TM052) is performed while being controlled in the setting change mode, and the set value is changed. In either case, after the setting change mode ends, a pulse-like setting change corresponding signal corresponding to the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is output. I have. As described above, when the mode is controlled to the setting change mode, the common signal output process is executed at the end of the setting change mode regardless of whether the setting change operation or the setting value is actually changed. Therefore, the signal output processing can be simplified.

  In the example shown in FIG. 22-42 (3), the setting change corresponding signal is turned on in accordance with the control in the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on. Here, it is assumed that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on is 1. In the setting confirmation mode, since the setting value is not changed, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 remains unchanged at 1. In this case, with the end of the setting confirmation mode, the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned OFF, and based on the fact that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is 1, the setting change corresponding signal is turned off. Is output as one pulse. In the example shown in FIG. 22- (3), one pulse is output as a setting change correspondence signal in a special mode triggered by the occurrence of a big hit.

  As described above, it is possible to notify to the outside whether or not the control mode is set to the setting check mode by the setting change corresponding signal, and to set values notified in the setting check mode (setting values stored in the RAM 102 when the power is turned on). A setting value stored in the area, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) can be notified to the outside, and a signal notifying whether or not the setting is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and a setting value Can be output from a common information output terminal.

  In the information terminal assignment pattern 2 shown in FIG. 22-39 (2) described above, if the RAM clear is executed following the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, a signal output from the tenth terminal is output. After 30 seconds from the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the state becomes the OFF state, and thereafter, from the same tenth terminal, the pulse number (special mode) corresponding to the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 ) Will be output.

(Modification of the game control main process)
Next, another embodiment related to the game control main process of FIGS. 22-11 to 22-13 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 22-43 and 22-44. FIGS. 22-11 to 22-13 show an example in which the initialization process (RAM clear) is executed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. As shown in FIGS. 43 and 22-44, after the initialization process (RAM clear) is executed, the mode may be shifted to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  In the game control main process shown in FIG. 22-11, when the CPU 103 sets the RAM 102 to an accessible state (step S21TM1060), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM2110 in FIG. 22-43, and clears the input through the input port. The state of the output signal (clear signal) of the switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is confirmed (step S21TM2110).

  When the ON state is detected in checking the state of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM2110), the CPU 103 sets the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on. A RAM clear flag indicating that the operation has been performed is set (step S21TM2210), and an initialization process is executed (step S21TM2220). A series of processes involved in the initialization process (the processes shown in steps S21TM2220 to S21TM2270) are the same as the processes shown in steps S21TM1410 to S21TM1460 shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, in the state confirmation of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 in step S21TM2110, if the OFF state is detected (NO in step S21TM2110), the CPU 103 executes the processing of step S21TM2120 and thereafter. I do. The processing shown in steps S21TM2210 to S2170 is the same as the processing shown in steps S21TM1230 to S21TM1370 shown in FIG.

  Then, the CPU 103 determines whether the lock switch 21TM051 is ON after transmitting the backup command at the time of power-off restoration in step S21TM2170 or transmitting the initialization command at power-on in step S21TM2270. (Step S21TM2310 in FIGS. 22-44). If the lock switch 21TM051 is not ON (step S21TM2310; NO), the process proceeds to step S21TM2550. If lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21TM2310; YES), CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag has been set, that is, whether or not clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 has been operated at power-on. Is confirmed (step S21TM2320).

  If the RAM clear flag is set, that is, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 has been operated when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM2320), the CPU 103 sets the setting change mode in which the set value can be changed. (Step S21TM2330 to Step S21TM2400). That is, the CPU 103 satisfies the first condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, and the second condition that the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. The processing state is controlled to the setting change mode based on the status. The processing shown in steps S21TM2330 to S21TM2400 related to the setting change mode is the same as the processing shown in steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200 in FIG. Then, after executing the processing in step S21TM2400, the set RAM clear flag is deleted (step S21TM2410), and the flow advances to step S21TM2550.

  If the RAM clear flag has not been set, that is, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 has not been operated when the power is turned on (NO in step S21TM2320), the CPU 103 checks the setting to confirm the setting value. The mode shifts to the mode (step S21TM2510 to step S21TM2540). That is, the CPU 103 satisfies the first condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, but does not satisfy the second condition that the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. Based on this, the processing state is controlled to the setting confirmation mode. The processing shown in steps S21TM2510 to S21TM2540 related to the setting confirmation mode is the same as the processing shown in steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240 in FIG. Then, in step S21TM2540, when it is confirmed that lock switch 21TM051 has been turned off (YES in step S21TM2540), the flow proceeds to step S21TM2550.

  Here, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not operated when the power is turned on, it is temporarily determined to be NO in step S21TM2120 or step S21TM2130 in FIG. Is executed, the RAM clear flag is not set. As a result, NO is determined in step S21TM2320, and the mode is not shifted to the setting change mode. As described above, even when the initialization process (initialization of the game state by clearing the RAM) is executed, when the second condition that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on is not satisfied. Are not controlled by the setting change mode.

  After the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed, or when the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state at the time of turning on the power, a series of processes related to Steps S21TM2550 to S21TM2620 are performed in Steps S21TM1470 to S21TM1470 shown in FIG. This is the same as the series of processes shown in step S21TM1540, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 22-43 and 22-44, when the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting change mode, the CPU 103 transmits the power-on initialization command (step S21TM2270), and then transmits the setting change mode command (step S21TM2340). ) To transmit a setting command (step S21TM2550). When the mode is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation mode command after transmitting a backup command at the time of power-off restoration or an initialization command at the time of power-on (step S21TM2170 or step S21TM2270) (step S21TM2170). S21TM2520), and transmits a setting command (step S21TM2550). Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the end of the setting change mode based on the reception of the setting command after receiving the setting change mode command, and can display the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp. 9 can notify the end of the setting change mode. Further, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the end of the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting command after receiving the setting confirmation mode command, and the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp, and the like. 9 can notify the end of the setting confirmation mode. According to such a configuration, without providing a dedicated command (setting change mode end command or setting check mode end command) for designating that the setting change mode or the setting check mode has ended, the setting command can be received. Since the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode can be specified on the production control CPU 120 side, the number of commands can be suppressed. That is, the control load of the game control microcomputer 100 can be reduced, and the capacity for storing the number of commands can be suppressed.

(Other Modifications Related to Feature 21TM)
In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the switch for changing the set value is common to the clear switch for initializing the game machine (RAM clear) is not limited to such a form. Is provided on the main board 11 (the game control microcomputer 100 can detect an operation), and is different from a clear switch for initializing the game machine (RAM clearing). It may be. With this configuration, the position of the switch for switching the set value and the position of the display monitor 21TM029 (the first display unit 21TM029A) are different from the case where the switch for switching the set value is provided on the power supply board. Therefore, when changing the set value, the check of the set value and the switching operation according to the check of the set value are facilitated, and the workability can be improved.

  In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the set value is displayed in the partial display area (first display unit 21TM029A) of the display monitor 21TM029 on which the game information such as the totaled base is displayed is described. The display device is not limited to such a form, and is a display device different from the display monitor 21TM029 on which the aggregated game state is displayed, for example, a dedicated display device for displaying set values, and is provided on the main board 11. The set value may be displayed on a 7-segment display or the like. According to such a configuration, the aggregated game information and the set value can be individually and more clearly understood, so that the operation of changing the set value according to the aggregated game information can be easily performed. And workability can be improved.

  Further, a configuration may be adopted in which a clear switch for initializing the gaming machine (RAM clear) is provided, but a switch for changing the set value is not provided. In such a configuration, the game control microcomputer 100 automatically changes the set values to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (the first display unit 21TM029A) in order while being controlled in the setting change mode (for example, 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 every 5 seconds), and when the lock switch 21TM051 changes from the ON state to the OFF state, it is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A). The set value (the set value stored in the set information temporary storage area) is stored in the set value storage area (the set value stored in the set value storage area is stored in the set information temporary storage area). The set value may be determined by overwriting the set value. The store clerk at the game hall switches the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state at the timing when the set value to be determined is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A), and the value is displayed at that time. The set value can be determined as the set value of the gaming machine.

  In the above embodiment, the example has been described in which the gaming machine is the pachinko gaming machine 1 that pays out a predetermined number of game media to the upper plate or the lower plate based on the occurrence of a prize, but is not limited to such a form. An enclosed gaming machine may be one in which a gaming medium is sealed in a gaming machine and a score is given based on the occurrence of a prize. In this enclosed gaming machine, information on the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode may be included in the information periodically transmitted from the main board 11 to the card unit 21TM050 via the payout control board 21TM037, For example, being controlled by the setting change mode, being controlled by the setting confirmation mode, being within the period controlled by the setting change mode, being within the period being controlled by the setting confirmation mode, May be included, indicating that an operation for changing the setting has been performed, that the setting change mode has ended, that the setting confirmation mode has ended, and the like. Further, the information output circuit 112 may transmit these pieces of information to a management device such as a hall computer or the like, and the hall computer may specify that each gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. .

  In the above embodiment, the image display device 5 or the like connected to the effect control board 12 is within the period of being controlled in the setting change mode, being within the period of being controlled in the setting confirmation mode, and the like. Is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this mode. The game control microcomputer 100 is configured to control the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol The symbol display device 4B, the ordinary symbol display 20, and the like may notify that the control is being performed in the setting change mode (for example, the 7-segment display may emit light in the first notification mode). Is controlled to the setting confirmation mode by the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the ordinary symbol display device 20, etc. Notification (for example, emit light to a different second notification manner from the first notification manner the 7-segment display) may be. Further, a display (number of rounds display) for displaying the number of rounds during the big hit game on the pachinko gaming machine 1 and an instruction for the player to launch a game ball in a specific area of the game area (for example, the right game area). If a display (right-handed display) or the like is provided, the display indicates that the processing of the setting change mode is being executed and that the processing of the setting confirmation mode is being executed. The light may be emitted in the embodiment.

  In the above embodiment, when the security signal is turned on when the mode is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the RAM is cleared after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the security is changed. An example is shown in which the security signal is continuously turned ON for 30 seconds after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode without the signal being turned OFF. Alternatively, when the security signal is turned on when the mode is controlled to the setting check mode, and then the RAM is cleared after the setting change mode or the setting check mode ends, the security change signal is turned off. Accordingly, the security signal is temporarily turned off for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds), and then the security signal is turned off. Utility signal specified period (e.g., 30 seconds) may be turned ON. By using such a signal output method, it is possible to clearly specify the period in which the apparatus is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode in an external device such as a hall computer, and to clearly indicate that the RAM clear has been executed. Can be specified.

  Regarding the expected degree suggestion effect shown in FIG. 21-5, each effect mode (black star) is set according to the set value of the gaming machine (the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102) and the big hit expected degree. May be changed. For example, even when the jackpot expectation degree is low, if the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is high (for example, 5 or 6), if the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is low (for example, (1 or 2), an expectation degree suggestion effect in which the number of black stars is 3 or more may be executed at a higher rate. With such an effect configuration, even if the display result is lost, the expected value indicating that the number of black stars is 3 or more is executed, so that the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is high. Can be expected from the player, and the player can pay attention to the effect mode (the number of black stars) when the expectation effect indicating effect is executed. In addition, even if the reach of the large hit expectation is low, the expectation suggestion effect in which the number of black stars is large (for example, 3 or more) is executed, so that the player can use the pachinko gaming machine 1 Since it can be expected that the set value is high, the interest can be improved even when the jackpot expectation degree is low.

  In the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted, a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated in accordance with the operation of the operation lever by the player to play the game. If the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific symbol combination when the symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by the player, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player (for example, a big machine) The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine in which one or more of bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus etc.) are mounted. In such a slot machine, the rate at which the bonus is established differs according to the set value. The set value can be changed by controlling the slot machine to the setting change mode, and the set value can be changed by controlling the slot machine to the setting check mode. It can be confirmed.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko gaming machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Game effect lamp 10 ... General winning opening 11 ... Main board 12 ... Effect control board 13 ... Voice control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 20 ... Ordinary symbol display 21 ... Gate switch 22A, 22B ... Starting port Switch 23: Count switch 30: Hitting operation handle 31A: Stick controller 31B: Push button 32: Movable body 100: Game control microcomputers 101, 121: ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for effect control
123 ... Display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of performing a game and being controllable to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestion effects indicating that the advantageous state is controlled,
When any one of the plurality of types of suggestion effects is performed, a notification effect execution unit that can execute a notification effect for notifying a predetermined period until the suggestion effect is performed,
After notifying the predetermined period in the notification effect, the notification of the predetermined period cannot be recognized before the predetermined period elapses,
further,
A title notifying unit capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggested effect,
A gaming machine, wherein the title notifying unit is capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggested effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggested effect.